Home

5 - Sorensen

1. sesssegesuueene E a TEE B AD anenanenmRRR E nannlebaeenneaeeeSeSSeRRSO CIIM O 4 BANAN 4 4 2 orm FBEOOIDUCREAE T Ul OL Bs ZZ 7 Ele BEBE i JUUL J 5 RBG Dy ai ES On uv RANA yA Oc O O ap cela SELLE PAU Sl 0 Beda SO BUN I gi 7 2 nmm 6 apageaseagagace ABQ d Figure C 6 XG XTR in Full Rack Mechanical Dimensions 60 V to 600 V Models w DC Output Cover C 16 M370430 01 Rev C Specifications 482 60mm 18 000in jp eum Em S pi aE E i tup ES a E Ei Ea a lin SJH 21 81124112 54 s e eR aa nq reci Fa E Seo oo Fim 5212113 isise mooie EH 55 79mm 2197in Figure C 7 XG850 with Full Rack and Foot Options Front Side and Rear Views either or both options available SULLA Figure C 8 XG850 Standard in Full Rack Option M370430 01 Rev C C 17 Specifications 482 60mm 19 000in i n 7 ubl 476 15mm
2. 43 6mm j BREE it iar 86804 remm RERE L7ein DURO es Figure C 4 XG XTR in Full Rack Mechanical Dimensions 6 V to 40 V Models DC Output Cover C 14 M370430 01 Rev C Specifications 482 6mm 19 00in E B j 128 3mm li li H gt L 1 12in 444 2mm 17 49in 473 8mm 18 65in y TII Jno Lr 114 6mm 4 51in BEQIRON gt Figure C 5 XG XTR in Full Rack Mechanical Dimensions 60 V to 600 V Models M370430 01 Rev C C 15 Specifications 482 EMM 19 001n 444 2mm 7 AQ 30 17 49 4 3 BMM 18 65iN T L 3 114 6mm 4 olin
3. Positive Negative 60 V 600 V Figure 1 7 XG XTR 1500 and 1700 Watt Units 60 V to 600 V Models Item Description 1 6 V 40 V Models DC Output Terminal Positive 8 5 mm hole diameter 60 V 600 V Models DC Output Connectors Positive 2 6 V 40 V Models DC Output Terminal Negative 8 5 mm hole diameter 60 V 600 V Models DC Output Connectors Negative 3 J2 Ethernet ENET or GPIB Connector optional 4 J4 RS 232 RS 485 Connector In Port 5 AC Input Terminal 6 Chassis Ground Stud 7 J1 Analog Programming APG Connector For pin information see page 4 5 8 J3 AUX Output and Isolated Analog Programming ISOL Connector For pin information see page 4 20 9 J5 USB Connector 10 J6 RS 485 Connector Multichannel Port 11 Ethernet Connector 12 Fan Exhaust Vents 1 10 M370430 01 Rev C Installation Chapter 2 Installation provides information and procedures for inspecting installing and testing the power supply Installation Basic Setup Procedure Table 2 1 provides a summary of the basic setup procedure with references to the relevant sections in this chapter Refer to this table if you are unfamiliar with the installation requirements for the power supply Complete each step in the sequence given Table 2 1 Basic Setup Procedure Step Action Reference l Inspect Inspect the power supply Step 1 Insp
4. 7 20 Isolated Resistive Programming of Current Calibration 7 21 Calibrating the Input Voltage APG Signal cccccccecsseeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaaeeees 7 22 Calibrating the Input Current APG Signal ccccccceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeaaeeees 7 23 STORING AND LOADING CALIBRATION PARAMETERS ssscecceeceeceeeeeeseeceeeeeeeeass 1 25 RESTORE FACTORY CALIBRATION eaae set eis cet ea creel ee at tte tes 1 26 RESTORE DEFAULT CALIBRATION 0 cccccecceccecceceecteccueeeeeueeeeseusceteusunsueteneceseueas 1 26 WISER DINGNOSTICS E n 7 26 Emergency SUI OWI cesariana i SAC DON SEC TMN RSS Le SARD Reiet 7 27 Driusualor Erratic Operation 2002020056 i Oe ne bbs inu od RM Pau 7 27 Troubleshooting Tor Operators sere ote ebat Ae en teen eee kas 7 28 SOPI COMMAND REFERENCE 22822560 tea ei reti e RU daa Ioue AA AGR SRS uud A 1 SCPI CONFORMANCE INFORMATION eene nennen nennen nnns A 2 Codes and Slain CS 2 cou esate ie Duae eost loai oreet unes ied ossi E lose aestatis dot een A 2 IEEE 488 2 G CPI Syntax and Styles itio uera repe ra ue teu etic p aleae ur A 2 oGPI Gomriarid Pleratelly ascendit coeno es eel nelsoni ae uenerat dE A 3 Using SGPLGOmMandS 2522s coterie ae A 4 Parameter TYDES aoina a Tc AAA tad teii A 7 SGP COMMAND TREE minuna eimi in cen lun usa ode ratios uu P Ma DU Ld A 8 SGP Gomridtid Summary iemcsteectucito tomen ie ouis aet
5. LINKSYS A Division of Cisco Systems inc Applications amp Gaming Port Range Forward Look for a tab that will take you to a location for port forwarding In this case it is the tab for Application amp Gaming Forward messages on ports 80 111 5024 and 5025 to the power supply s address in this case it is 192 168 1 101 When finished the page should look similar to Figure 6 40 Click the Save Settings button when complete Firmware Version 1 02 15 WRT54GX Access Applications Administration Status Restrictions amp Gaming Wireless Security Port Range Forward Port Triggering DMZ Port Range Forwarding Verba saat aye F to open specific ports in order Appietion Start End Protocol iPAddress Enable BEEPITETT 80 to 80 Examples of these applications ETAT AC y include servers and certain 114 to 111 Both v gt 19216811 J ele manner ee ee e for a certain port comes in from 502 to 502 Both v 192 168 1 1C J the Internet the router will route the data to the computer you 0 to 0 Both v 192 168 1 0 specify Due to security concerns you may want to limit 0 to 0 Both w 192 168 1 0 port forwarding to only those ports you are using and 0 to 0 Both v 192 168 1 0 uncheck the Enable checkbox after ycu are finished 0 to 0 Both w 192 168 1 0 More 0 to 0 Both v 192 168 1 0 0 to 0 Both w 192 168 1 0 0 to 0 Both w 192 168 1 0 Cisco SYSTEMS Cancel Changes
6. CAUTION Equipment damage Before making connections from external circuits to the Analog Programming Connector turn the front panel power switch to Off and wait until the front panel displays are not illuminated CAUTION Equipment damage Program monitor signal and return are internally connected to the power supply negative output S Do not attempt to bias these away from that potential To connect the output wires to the APG and DC output connector 1 Insert a 3 32 inch slot head screwdriver into the orange colored box of the connector until the end of the spring is reached See Figure 4 2 2 Hold the connector open and insert the applicable output wire 3 Remove the screwdriver oT n Pere TUN u gt Free SE Le SMS rra SIDA as Ain pi S d quiz r1 Figure 4 2 Inserting Screwdriver into Spring Terminal Block Figure 4 3 APG and DC Output Connector M370430 01 Rev C 4 7 Analog Programming APG and Isolated Analog Programming ISOL Wiring 4 8 WARNING Shock hazard There is a potential shock hazard at the output when using a power supply with a rated output greater than 60 V Use load wiring with a minimum insulation rating equivalent to the maximum output voltage of the power supply For example select TEW 105 C 600 V wiring for use with a 600 V 1 4 Amp or 2 8 Amp power supply For most connectors and jumpers use any suitable wire such as 20 to 26 AWG stranded wire Fo
7. Calibration and Troubleshooting Storing and Loading Calibration Parameters M370430 01 Rev C It is recommended that you save all the calibration parameters in a text file so they can be reloaded in the event of a flash failure or a mistake in calibration To get the calibration data execute the following commands and save the response in a text file The SCPI command s to download all the calibration data are CALibration PARameter OUTPut CALibration PARameter APRogram CALibration PARameter INPut The response to these commands are in the 488 2 Arbitrary Program Block Data format If the calibration ever needs to be restored you can execute the same commands and write the arbitrary block data response that was received in the query as the parameter For example downloading the parameter data can be done from the hyper terminal as follows ical par TZ 6Z h271710 5 Hh0000 35h2710 h0000 7Dn27T0 450000 h2710 h0000 h1AA4 ocaglfpart dpr 259 hH7B 4 h7F h7F h7F h7F h7F h7F h7F h7F h 7F h 7F FATF cals par inp 227 h2710 600 h2710 h00 To restore the unit with a set of previously saved calibration values can be done as follows pad par 2602 h2710 hO000 h2710 hO000 h2710 hO000 h2710 hO 000 h1AA4 cal par apr F259 A7F Jew Ee Jeu core Jee hier RAT Ey Fo E FAE 78 sal Ee EOI EEN PATE Ca lktpart inp h227 h2710 hO0 h2710 h00 By saving an
8. LAPr is displayed on the output voltage display 2 Turn rotary Adjust Enter control to select r 5 voltage source from isolated connector 3 Press the rotary Adjust Enter control to commit the selected mode LE L is displayed on the output voltage display 4 Select the input source level using the rotary Adjust Enter control 5 Once the desired level has been selected press the rotary Adjust Enter control to commit the change The display will return to the normal display Deactivating ISOL Current Mode To deactivate the ISOL current mode 1 Turn the 9 position mode control to the CAP position or press the rotary Adjust Enter control if the control knob is already at the CAP position 2 LRPr is displayed on the output voltage display 3 Turn the rotary Adjust Enter control to select nanE 4 Press the rotary Adjust Enter control to commit the change The display will return to the normal display 4 30 M370430 01 Rev C Analog Programming APG and Isolated Analog Programming ISOL Query for ISOL Current Input Level To query for ISOL current input level from non isolated input 1 Turn the 9 position mode control to the CAP position or press the rotary Adjust Enter control if the control knob is already at the CAP position LAPr is displayed on the output voltage display 2 Ifthe mode is currently nont then select any other ISOL mode If this step is done be sure to restore the ISOL setting to nan
9. OUTP ON Enter the interactive calibration mode by sending the SCPI command CAL OUTP ANAL CURR RES ISOL Press the terminal keys or to reduce or increase the main output current value Adjust the main output current to 100 Press any key other than the or keys to exit from the interactive calibration mode 7 21 Calibration and Troubleshooting Calibrating the Input Voltage APG Signal The input voltage APG calibration is necessary to ensure accurate measurements when using the MEAS APR and MEAS APR ISOL SCPI command queries to monitor the APG input signal Gain Calibration Offset Calibration 1 22 To calibrate the VAP APG input gain l Connect a voltmeter and a DC voltage source to the non isolated voltage APG input lines J1 9 and J1 7 Turn the power supply On Set the Voltage APG level to 4 V Send the SCPI command SyST COMM APR LEV 4 Set the input source as Voltage analog APG Send the SCPI command SYST REM SOUR VOLT AVOL Set the voltage source attached to the non isolated voltage APG input to 90 of the nominal voltage level in this case 3 6 V Turn the output power on The power supply starts up in Constant Voltage mode Read the input voltage value from the voltmeter connected in step 1 Type the SCPI input Voltage calibration command with voltage noted in step 8 as the parameter data For example you would type CAL INP ANAL 3 53 if you were reading 3 53
10. The Loop Protection feature can be used to enable or disable multiple units in daisy chain configuration through the AUX Output and Isolated Analog Programming Connector J3 Up to four units example Units 1 through 4 can be configured in Loop Protection if one of the units is experiencing a fault condition other units in the same loop will disable their output simultaneously This is achieved by connecting Unit 1 s MAIN PS GOOD to Unit 2 s SD Shutdown Main O P and continues until Unit 4 s MAIN PS GOOD is fed to Unit 1 s SD Shutdown Main O P Common applications include single master controlling multiple slave units as a system On Off In addition any fault from either operating unit will cause the system to disable The Loop Protection can be enabled or disabled locally using the front panel 9 position mode control or remotely using a SCPI command Important While Loop Protection is enabled ON the external shutdown function will be automatically set to low active When Loop Protection 1s disabled OFF the external shutdown function will be set to the user s last setting 3 34 M370430 01 Rev C Local Operation Setting up Loop Protection To set up Loop Protection With the AC powered OFF connect the first unit s pin J13 13 to the next unit s J 13 12 on the AUX Output and Isolated Analog Programming Connector Do this for up to four units An example of a 3 unit loop protection is illustrated as follow
11. The terminal program allows serial communication with the power supply To use a terminal program set it up using the parameters from the following sections If you wish to use HyperTerminal see HyperTerminal on page 5 21 for instructions setting it up Data Format Serial data format is 8 bit one stop bit No parity bit Flow control none End of Message The end of message is the Carriage Return character ASCII 13 0x0D The power supply ignores the Line Feed ASCII 10 0x0A character HyperTerminal The HyperTerminal program is a standard windows program and can be found in Start gt All Programs gt Accessories gt Communications gt Hyper Terminal Setting up a HyperTerminal connection To set up a HyperTerminal connection 1 When HyperTerminal opens it will immediately enter the New Connection wizard If you don t already have a connection saved continue If you do click cancel and then open the pre existing connection and skip the remaining steps in this procedure 2 Enter a name Include the name of the interface you are intending to use for the connection as part of the name 3 Click OK 4 Select the COM port that is connected to the interface you wish to use to connect to the XG XTR M370430 01 Rev C 5 21 Remote Operation 5 22 E Ly Connect To Settings This is the COM port that you have your serial cable hooked up to or in the case of USB the one that was configured t
12. c cccceceeeeeeeeseeeeeseeseueeueeueeaveueeaeeaueneeaeeaees 5 2 Configuring Remote Control Using RS 232 cccccccccsseseeceeeeesaeeseeeeeeeeseeaeaeeeeeees 5 2 Configuring Remote Control Using RS 485 ssseseeesesseeeseeeeeen nnns 5 7 Configuring Remote Control using the USB Connector seeeeuussss 5 9 Setting Up the PC to Use the USB Connection eeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeee 5 9 GPIB Gonnector ODHWOPSl iocans eade cetattesctionst dhsteon baec sues up eoe Tae U ero nth 20 cd eget end os adco eus 5 15 Ethernet LAN ENET Connector Optional cccccceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 5 19 Multiple Power Supply Connections to RS 485 Bus esses 5 19 TERMINAL CONFIGURATION RREEo Ug siimotntwilimndcadiw ska pa ME das uper ss idee n pco qub Rede 5 21 LATA OMAN AU EIL TITULUM 5 21 End of Message oce acest vas ak a axxo e ava a xR Eon RR Y P Eo DREN GRE a SAVE RN RE RAXR FER TYRE EAR Edu 5 21 FIV OOK Terminal ETT TIT 5 21 Selecting the Appropriate Communication POLrt ccicciciiiiiiiiiiiiiii 5 24 Multichannel Address Setting cccccceeceecccceceeesseeeceeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeseeeeeeessaagees 5 25 Remote Interface Addressing esses nennen 5 26 Multichannel Commands Explained ccccccccssseeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseaeseeeeeeeeeeaaas 5 27 Status Reporting INS OP seriene 0202006 Po
13. eee ee eee eee eee eee eee eee teet teet e teet eee tete ee eeee 2 14 FIGURE 2 5 REMOTE SENSE CONNECTION ccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccscsceeees 2 15 FIGURE 3 1 9 POSITION MODE CONTROL ccsssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssees 3 2 FIGURE 3 2 FRONT PANEL MENU SYSTEM ccocccco0o000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 3 8 FIGURE 323 OPERATING MODES senine 3 15 FIGURE 3 4 SPLIT SUPPLY OPERATION eessscecsseccssecccsececcsececssccccsecccosceccsecccsscecsseecsseeesse 3 46 FIGURE 3 5 SERIES OPERATION scceicsesccshecesecedsesdeteadcvacwedcoadssideceaacedceadeteneceedeeicved sathaceeess 3 48 FIGURE 3 6 LOAD CONNECTIONS IN REMOTE SENSING MODE ccccssssssssssssssssssssees 3 49 FIGURE 3 7 LOAD CONNECTIONS IN LOCAL SENSING MODE ccccsssssssssssssssssssssseees 3 52 FIGURE 3 8 LOAD CONNECTIONS IN REMOTE SENSING MODE PARALLEL CONTROL METHOD urnis aiT 3 53 FIGURE 4 1 APG CONNECTOR TERMINALS ccccsssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssesess 4 5 XIV M370430 01 Rev C FIGURE 4 2 FIGURE 4 3 FIGURE 4 4 FIGURE 4 5 FIGURE 4 6 FIGURE 4 7 FIGURE 4 8 FIGURE 4 9 FIGURE 4 10 FIGURE 4 11 FIGURE 4 12 FIGURE 4 13 FIGURE 4 14 FIGURE 4 15 FIGURE 4 16 FIGURE 5 1 FIGURE 5 2 FIGURE 5 3 FIGURE 5 4 FIGURE 5 5 FIGURE 5 6 FIGURE 5 7 FIGURE 5 8 FIGURE 5 9 FIGURE 5 10 FIGURE 5 11 FIGURE 5 12 FIGURE 5 13 FIGURE 5 14 FIGURE 5 15 FIGURE 5 16 FIGURE
14. 18 746in 444 23mm 17 488in 504 24mm 18 852in r E 3mDpBBBDBBDIILL a a e TESORO BRREDAND C 1 717in Figure C 9 XG850 Low Voltage Model Dimensions Top Side and Rear C 18 M370430 01 Rev C Specifications 482 60mm FEES 19 000in 28 34mm i il H Tein E a 455 20mm 17 496in 17 921in J T TIL rr T d a eee 3 nanppann M iii M e ule 1 717in 08 Figure C 10 XG850 Medium and High Voltage Models Dimensions Top and Rear M370430 01 Rev C C 19 Specifications 482 60mm 19 000in 28 34mm 1 116in 444 40mm 17 496in I 18 80mm 740in 495 78mm 18 519in ee EE i lt ce 29 58mm 447 40mm 1 165in 17 814in Figure C 11 XG850 with Front Panel Output Voltage Option Top Side and Rear Please contact Factory to special order this option C 20 M370430 01 Rev C Rack Mount Options and Installation Instructions Appendix D provides information on rack mount kit options and instructions for XG XTR half rack and full rack mounting Rack Mount Options and Installation Instructions Rack Mount Kit Options Table 7 1describes the options available for rack mounting the power supply and provides the part numbers for each option Table 7 1 Rack Mount Options Unit Option A Rack Mount with Rails Option B Rack Mount with Slides XG Single RM S XG2 Fig D 1 left and RM XG2 RM S XG2
15. AMETEK PROGRAMMABLE POWER Sorensen XG and XTR Family Programmable DC Power Supply Operating Manual firmware v 2 0 and higher 670 Watts 1700 Watts 6 V to 600 V Models M370430 01 Rev C www programmablepower com About AMETEK AMETEK Programmable Power Inc a Division of AMETEK Inc is a global leader in the design and manufacture of precision programmable power supplies for R amp D test and measurement process control power bus simulation and power conditioning applications across diverse industrial segments From bench top supplies to rack mounted industrial power subsystems AMETEK Programmable Power is the proud manufacturer of Elgar Sorensen California Instruments and Power Ten brand power supplies AMETEK Inc is a leading global manufacturer of electronic instruments and electromechanical devices with annualized sales of 2 5 billion The Company has over 11 000 colleagues working at more than 80 manufacturing facilities and more than 80 sales and service centers in the United States and around the world Trademarks AMETEK is a registered trademark of AMETEK Inc Sorensen is a trademark owned by AMETEK Inc Other trademarks registered trademarks and product names are the property of their respective owners and are used herein for identification purposes only Notice of Copyright XG and XTR Family Programmable DC Power Supply Operating Manual firmware v 2 0 and higher 2008 2013 AMETE
16. ON OFF interlock 2 STATE state of the Interlock System functionality Table A 12 Auto Sequence Commands Function __ s a Parameter and Range Delete all PROGram channel DELete ALL Erases the sequence N A sequences currently in memory Change Auto PROGram lt channel gt STATe Access to the run state of RUN STOP PAUSE Yes Sequence the Sequence operating state Program PROGram schannel REPeat Sets the number of times to Repeat count 1 selected repeat the sequence 65534 INFinity sequence end action 929U9J9J8H puguliulO2 dOS 9ev o 9eH L0 0 Tv0ZE IN Table A 12 Auto Sequence Commandas Continued Begin Recording Auto Sequence Program Stop Recording Auto Sequence Program Set the Program Command Execution Delay Time Read the current contents of the Autosequence programming buffer PROGram channel RECord STARt Start recording new sequence overwrites old sequence PROGram channel RECord STOP Stop recording the auto sequence program Sequence ready to run PROGram channel STEP DWEL1 Sets the amount of time to lt Dwell time in delay between commands seconds in a Sequence PROGram channel READback Read the current contents of the Autosequence programming buffer 99U9J9JOH PUBPWILWWOD dOS Error Messages Appendix B Error Messages provides information on the error messages which
17. Remote Operation o 1 O rA 1 RX Fa 2 3 3 TX Z O 5 O 6 O GND 7 e 2 t dii 8 DB 9 connector on PC RJ 45 plug RS 232 Communication Cable with DB 9 Pinout RS 232 Communication Cable with RJ 45 to DB 25 M370430 01 Rev C Communication control cable with DB 25 pinout male on the PC side and RJ 45 shielded connector on the power supply The cable length should be 9 84 feet 3 m or longer Figure 5 3 Table 5 4 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 9 DB 25 Pinout DB 25 Pinouts Name Description C No connection Transmit data pan TT NC No connection GND Ground NC No connection 5 5 Remote Operation J O Vi N O O O O O O O O O O O O Figure 5 4 RS 232 Communication Cable with DB 25 Pinout Completing the Setup To complete the setup 9 Configure the XG XTR to use the 232 remote interface and set up the terminal that will be used on the connected PC See the sections entitled Selecting the Appropriate Communication Port on page 5 24 and Terminal Configuration on page 5 21 for more details 9 5 6 M370430 01 Rev C Configuring Remote Control Using RS 485 RS 485 Communication Cable with RJ 45 to DB 9 Remote Operation Communication control cable with DB 9 pinout female on the PC side see Figure 5 2 and RJ 45 shielded connector on the power supply AN CAUTION Equipment damage Figure 5 5 example of wiring for NI RS485 communication cable with DB 9 Ref
18. Table A 2 Readback Commands Perform unit Self Test Pass 0 Wait to continue command N A Parameter and Command Description Range Query Read Output MEASure lt channel gt Current or Read Output Voltage DCIS Read APG Input Voltage MEASurement SCALar APRogram VOLTagellsbc Read Isolated APG Input Vo Itage jMEASurement SCALar APRogram VOLTage ISOLated DC Read APG Input Voltage MEASurement SCALar APRogram CURRent DC Read APG MEASurement Input Voltage l 5CALar APRogram CURRent ISOLated DC SCALar CURRent MEASure lt channel gt SCALar VOLTage Measure and readback output current at the output terminals Measure and readback output voltage at the output terminals Measure and readback the voltage being input to the non isolated voltage analog programming input pin BEEN BEEN ENEME Measure and readback the Yes voltage being input to the isolated voltage analog programming input pin of Measure and readback the voltage being input to the non isolated current analog programming input pin Measure and readback the voltage being input to the isolated current analog programming input pin 39U3131J34 PUBPWILWWOD dOS o 8H L0 0 T0Z IN LEV Table A 3 SCPI Commands for Output Control Parameter and Command Description Range Query Set Current SOURce lt channel gt COMBine CSHare Set the unit to ope
19. 9 9 o A8Y L0 0 T0Z IN Electrical Specifications for XG XTR Family 1700 W Table C 3 XG 1700 Watt Electrical Specifications for 6 V to 600 V Models Models Output Ratings Output Voltage Output Current Output Power Line Regulation Voltage 0 005 of rated output voltage 2 mV Current 0 01 of rated output current 2 mA Load Regulation Voltage 0 005 of rated output voltage 2 mV Current 0 02 of rated output current 5 mA Output Ripple rms 300 kHz Voltage Current Output Noise p p 20 MHz Voltage Maximum Recommended Remote Sense Line Drop Compensation per Line Up prog Response Time 0 Vmax Down prog Response Time Full Load Down prog Response Time No Load Over Voltage Trip Point 6 220 8 200 12 140 20 84 33 50 40 42 60 28 80 21 100 17 150 11 2 300 5 6 600 2 8 6V 8 V 12 V 20 V 33 V 40 V 60 V 80 V 100 V 600 V 220 A 200 A 140 A 84 A 50A 42A 28 A 21A 17 A 2 8 A 1330 W 1610 W 1690 W 11690W 1660W 1690W 1690 W 1690 W 1710 W 1690 W BOO 3 lt 2 3 mV 2 4 mV 2 6 mV 3 0 mV 13 7 mV 4 mV 5 mV 7 mV 9 5 mV 17 mV 32 mV 24 mA 22 mA 16 mA 10 4 mA 7 mA 6 2 mA 4 8 mA 3 7 mA 3 12 mA 2 56 mA 2 28 mA 2 3 mV 2 4 mV 2 6 mV 3 0mV 13 7 mV 4 mV 5 mV 6 mV 7 mV 9 5 mV 17 mV 32 mV 49 mA 45 mA 33 mA 22 mA 15 mA 13 mA 10 6 mA 9 2 mA 8 4 mA 7 2 mA 6 1 mA 5 6 mA 8 mV 8 mV 8 mV 8 mV 8 mV 8 mV 8 mV 8 mV 8 mV 10 mV 25 mV 50 mV 400 mA 340 mA 240mA 150mA 120mA 90mA 70mA 50
20. CP Mode Operation version 2 21 and higher If the output is enabled the voltage and current start to rise The unit will continue to increase the current until one of thefollowing occurs e The programmable power set point has been reached e The voltage set point has been reached in which case the unit will regulate the voltage in order to maintain the voltage set point e The current set point has been reached in which case the unit will regulate the current in order to maintain the current set point Constant 100 Max e Power Set Point Voltage E Q x t T Current 100 M370430 01 Rev C 3 13 Local Operation Automatic Mode Crossover 3 14 Mode crossover occurs when the unit makes the switch between operating modes Crossover can occur from CV to CC or vice versa depending on how the attached load resistance changes Figure 3 3 shows the relationships between the variables For example if the unit was initially operating in CV mode with the output voltage at the voltage set point and the load current below the Isgr and the attached load resistance began to decrease the current would rise to meet this change in the load The load current will increase in proportion to the decrease in the load resistance until the load current drawn reaches the current set point At this point further decreases in load resistance increased load current requirements will cause the unit to cross over into CC mode where the
21. Chapter 4 Analog Programming APG and Isolated Analog Programming ISOL provides information and procedures for analog and isolated analog programming of the power supply Analog Programming APG and Isolated Analog Programming ISOL Introduction The rear panel connectors J1 and J3 provide an option to control and monitor the output of the power supply with analog signals Connector J1 provides a non isolated analog interface where all signals are referenced to the negative output terminal of the power supply Connector J3 is an isolated interface and also provides an isolated auxiliary voltage output to aid analog programming Analog Programming APG of Output Voltage and Output Current 4 2 Analog programming allows control of the power supply s output voltage output current or both to be controlled from analog input sources As the programming source is varied within the configured analog programming range 2 10 volts kQ max the power supply s output varies proportionally over its output range For example if you set the programming scale to 10 V voltage source and apply 5 V to the programming pins the power supply will be programmed to 50 of the output capability for your power supply While analog programming mode is configured you will not be able to make adjustments to the set points from the front panel or through the remote interfaces The front panel will display AnPr in the output current display when the 9
22. Chassis NRFD Return Chassis NDACReturn Chassis IFC Return Chassis SRQReturn Chassis ATNRetum Chassis Signal Ground Chassis Communication with Your Device M370430 01 Rev C This section provides information on selecting the GPIB interface as the communication port used on the XTR and it also provides an example of how commands can be sent and received The details of the IEEE 488 2 and SCPI status reporting register structures and a complete list of commands available can be found later in this section 9 15 Remote Operation Selecting a Communication Port 5 16 To select the GPIB as the communication port l Turn the 9 position Mode control to PGM pE is displayed in the output voltage display Turn the rotary Adjust Enter control to select the 6PIb communication port Press the rotary Adjust Enter control AAAP is displayed on the output voltage display Turn the rotary Adjust Enter control to select the desired address between 1 to 30 For the purpose of this example 10 will be selected Press the rotary Adjust Enter control to commit the new address Click Scan For Instruments on the GPIB Explorer toolbar so that the power supply will be found see Figure 5 13 Important This section uses the National Instruments MAX program to communicate with the XTR This is for demonstration purposes only Any software that is capable of addressing a GPIB device and s
23. Enter control to commit the change The display will return to the normal display Deactivating APG Current Mode To deactivate the APG current mode l Turn the 9 position mode control to the CAP position or press the rotary Adjust Enter control if the mode control is already at the CAP position XAIIp is displayed on the output voltage display Turn the rotary Adjust Enter control to select nanE Press the rotary Adjust Enter control to commit the change The display will return to the normal display M370430 01 Rev C Analog Programming APG and Isolated Analog Programming ISOL Query for Analog Current Input Level To query for analog current input level from non isolated input 1 Turn the 9 position mode control to the CAP position or press the rotary Adjust Enter control if the mode control is already at the CAP position LAPr is displayed on the output voltage display 2 Ifthe mode is currently nanE then select any other APG mode If this step is done be sure to restore the APG setting to nanE when the operation is complete Otherwise do not rotate the rotary Adjust Enter control to keep the current APG mode 3 Press the rotary Adjust Enter control to select the APG mode The output voltage display should read LE L and the output current display will display APG level 4 Press the rotary Adjust Enter control to return to normal mode 5 Ifthe APG mode was modified in step 2 execute the procedur
24. Figure 6 40 Port Forwarding Looking at the Status tab you should be able to find the router s address Now you should be able to connect to the power supply from the original PC the one not behind the router using the router s address Socket Port Number M370430 01 Rev C Now that a connection has been verified you can develop your application code If you are using one of the Microsoft environments the Winsock protocol which is part of the Windows operating system can be used Similar capabilities are supported on other operating systems To use Winsock your will have to specify the port number of the power source s LAN interface The port number determines the 6 59 Communications Options protocol for the communication The XG XTR power source uses ASCII characters and instrument SCPI commands for remote control The IANA registered Port number for the Instrument SCPI interface is 5025 TCP Remote port 5025 The socket number can be changed on the power source using the SYST COMM LAN PORT command Refer to the SYSTEM COMMANDS section that follows Instrument Drivers and Application Software 6 60 Instrument drivers for National Instruments LabWindows CVI and LabView are generally available for download from the AMETEK Programmable Power Web site at www programmablepower com Also available are ready to use interactive graphical user interface GUI programs for download M370430 01 Rev C Communicati
25. Half Rack and Dual Full Rack eeseeeeeesssesssss D 2 Focation REGUIFEMGCIIS tuos veds Dee tete Dav exuviae renin erate a eR Eo DERE eee D 3 MOUNTING OPTION A 1U RAILS ret eE up cici PE sd a UB ala Ret E E EE bu ta Us D 4 Tools and Materials Required sees D 4 Installation Procedures sessesseennm nennen nnne nnn nnns D 4 MOUNTING OPTION B MANUFACTURED SLIDES FROM JONATHAN ENGINEERED SOLUTIONS T D 6 INDEX debo MM RETE INDEX 1 Figures FIGURE 1 1 XGIXTR FRONT PANELS ccccccco000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 1 5 FIGURE 1 2 FRONT PANEL DISPLAY AND CONTROL G ccccossssccssssccssscccssscccssscccssscoescces 1 6 FIGURE 1 3 XG XTR 850 WATT UNITS 6 V TO 40 V MODELL cccsssssssssssssssssseess 1 7 FIGURE 1 4 XG XTR 850 WATT UNITS 60 V TO 150 V MODELS eee eee eene 1 7 FIGURE 1 5 XG XTR 850 WATT UNITS 300 V TO 600 V MODELS e eee eere ne 1 7 FIGURE 1 6 XG XTR 1500 AND 1700 WATT UNITS 6 V TO 40 V MODELS 1 9 FIGURE 1 7 XG XTR 1500 AND 1700 WATT UNITS 60 V TO 600 V MODELS 1 10 FIGURE 2 1 1500 AND 1700 WATT AC INPUT COVER AND STRAIN RELIEF 2 6 FIGURE 2 2 MAXIMUM LOAD WIRE LENGTH FOR 1 V LINE DROP eee 2 9 EIGURE2 3 DIODE PLACEMENT adio te ee ate A 2 13 FIGURE 2 4 CONNECTING SINGLE LOADS
26. M370430 01 Rev C Calibration and Troubleshooting Emergency Shutdown In an emergency carry out these steps l 2 3 Shut the power supply OFF immediately Disconnect the mains supply Disconnect the power supply from the load Unusual or Erratic Operation If the power supply displays any unusual or erratic operation follow these steps l PA 2 Shut the power supply OFF immediately Disconnect the power supply from the load and external programming Test the power supply with no load running the tests in Step 5 Performing Functional Tests on page 2 10 If the tests show that the power supply is functioning normally check all load programming and monitoring connections and circuits Check the AC input for correct voltage and frequency If the problem is not solved after you have followed this procedure or if the unit fails to operate correctly upon retesting call your service technician M370430 01 Rev C 1 21 Calibration and Troubleshooting Troubleshooting for Operators Refer to Table 6 1 to ensure that the power supply is configured and connected for normal operation If you require any further troubleshooting assistance call your service technician See Contact Information on page 1 Table 7 1 Troubleshooting Symptom Check Further Checks and Corrections The power supply is not Flash memory check sum error Do a reset See page 3 43 operating FLA FAI L is displa
27. Measured Value Programmed Value Programmed Value Figure 7 3 Calibration Step 2 Offset Calibration Adjust the offset so that the real and ideal lines intersect at a programmed value of 10 7 4 M370430 01 Rev C Calibration and Troubleshooting Step 3 Recalibrate Gain 3 gt S gt RS dt 3 RA 4 gt P gt P 9 e B e 5 XI 2 S 2 2 D 90 90 Programmed Value Programmed Value Figure 7 4 Calibration Step 3 Recalibrate Gain Repeat Step 1 for best results M370430 01 Rev C Calibration and Troubleshooting Calibrating the Output Voltage Gain calibration of the power supply has the greatest effect on the accuracy in the high voltage range Offset calibration has the greatest affect on accuracy of the power supply at low voltages The same calibration command is used for the gain and offset calibrations The type of calibration is determined internally by the instrument depending on if the set point is above 10 of the maximum output voltage value or not If it is above 10 of the maximum voltage the calibration is a gain calibration 1f is below 10 it is an offset calibration Gain Calibration To perform gain calibration l 2 3 4 n Offset Calibration Disconnect the power supply from the load Connect the output terminals to a precision voltmeter Turn both the power supply and the voltmeter to On Set the current set point to maximum Set the supply output to 90 of the nominal
28. OUTPut AUXilliary PON STAT MEASure SCALar VOLTage DC qonly MEASure SCALar CURRent DC qonly MEASure SCALar APRogram VOLTage DC qonly SCALar APRogram VOLTage ISOLated DC 2 Ea E Es ed Ea Ea MEASure qonly MEASure SCALar APRogram CURRent DC qonly MEASure SCALar APRogram CURRent ISOLated DC gonly INITiate IMMediate nquery CALibration RESTore nquery gt CALibration VOLTage PROTection OVER DATA nquer y CALibration OUTPut VOLTage DATA nguery CALibration OUTPut CURRent DATA nquery CALibration OUTPut ANALog VOLTage DATA nquery CALibration OUTPut ANALog VOLTage ISOLated DATA nquery 5 60 M370430 01 Rev C Remote Operation Querying Help for Legacy Command Headers M370430 01 Rev C The SYSTem lt channel gt HELP LEgacy query is essentially the same as the SYSTem lt channel gt HELP HEADers query but it lists legacy commands If executed it returns all legacy commands and queries implemented The response shall be on a page by page basis No single line will be longer than 80 characters and each page will be 23 lines long The full path for every command and query shall be returned separated by line feeds After a full page of headers has been displayed you will be prompted to press any key to continue or the ESC key to stop any further listing of the com
29. Recycle Bin Rename Enable Status Properties gt modem configuration settings Y View or change settings For this connection such as adapter protocol Figure 6 7 Configuring the Network Connection of the Computer 2 Right click on the mouse button and click on Properties The Local Area Connection Properties window appears See Figure 6 8 6 6 M370430 01 Rev C Communications Options Local Area Connection Properties General Authentication Advanced Connect using B SiS 900 PCI Fast Ethernet Adapter This connection uses the following items dal QoS Packet Scheduler Network Monitor Driver Internet Protocol TCP IP i Description Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks Show icon in notification area when connected Figure 6 8 LAN Properties Dialog Box 3 Click the Internet Protocol TCP IP check box and click Properties See Figure 6 8 The Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties Dialog Box appears See Figure 6 9 M370430 01 Rev C 6 7 Communications Options Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties General You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings O Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP
30. Table 7 2 page D 7 XG Dual RM D XG2 Fig D 1 right and RM XG2 RM D XG2 Table 7 2 page D 7 XTR Single RM S XTR2 Fig D 1 left and RM XTR2 RM S XTR2 Table 7 2 page D 7 XTR Dual RM D XTR2 Fig D 1 right and RM XTR2 RM D XTR2 Table 7 2 page D 7 XG XTR Single Half Rack and Dual Full Rack Figure shows the rack mount kit options for installing the XG XTR into a half rack and a full rack Note that the 850 Watt units are the only units that can be installed in either all other units can be installed in the half rack only Figure D 1 Single left and Dual right Half Rack Mount Kit Options D 2 M370430 01 Rev C Rack Mount Options and Installation Instructions Figure D 2 Full Rack Mount Kit Option Location Requirements Install the power supply in a location that meets the following requirements Condition Description Clean The power supply should not be exposed to metal filings or any other form of conductive contamination Cool The ambient air temperature should be between 0 C 50 C 32 F 122 F for best performance Ventilated Whether operating the power supply in a rack or on a bench allow air to reach the ventilation inlets on the front and rear of the unit for cooling The direction of airflow is from the front to the back of the unit Ventilation space at the top bottom or sides of the power supply is not required WARNING Shock hazard Ensure that any mounting screws do not pe
31. The active network interface on this computer is using an Auto IP address Please refer to Windows help For configuring network settings an this computer Dacian eee Figure 6 14 Auto IP Address Message Important Auto IP mode is acceptable only for the single computer and single power supply configuration To assign an IP address to the power supply unit 1 Click OK to dismiss the Auto IP warning message If you are not intending on using an Auto IP debug your network connection at this time The Lantronix DevicelInstaller window appears See Figure 6 15 2 Click Search to get a list of all the XG XTR devices that can be reached from the network adaptor that you previously selected If your XG XTR unit s are powered up they should appear in this list 6 12 M370430 01 Rev C Communications Options L Lantronix DeviceInstaller 4 1 0 9 El x File Edit View Device Tools Help p Search Assign IP Name Grup IPAddress Hardware Address Status amp gi Local Area Connection 172 16 21 129 SA XPort 03 172 16 21 51 00 20 44 99 83 40 Online E Sa Lantronix Devices 1 device s r Ready 7 Figure 6 15 Searching for Power Supply IP Address After a short delay your power supply will be found See Figure 6 15 If the power supply is not found or the found device is not reachable contact your network administrator for details about network settings 3 Ifthe IP address shown and the me
32. These commands are equivalent to the procedure on Voltage Controlled Voltage APG Setup on page 4 10 and Voltage Controlled Current APG Setup on page 4 12 5 72 M370430 01 Rev C M370430 01 Rev C Remote Operation Commands SYSTem lt channel gt REMote SOURce VOLTage LOCal AVOLtage ARESistive SYSTem channel REMote SOURCe CURRent LOCal AVOLtage ARESistive Where LOCal indicates the value is controlled by the set point AVOLtage is used to set the output to be controlled by an analog voltage input ARESistive is used to set the output to be controlled by a resistor circuit IA Voltage is used to set the output to be controlled by the isolated analog voltage input IAResistive is used to set the output to be controlled by the isolated analog resistor circuit 5 73 Remote Operation Protection Mask Enable Alarms The protection mask allows for the different alarms to be masked completely disabling them This means that the SCPI status and operations registers will not detect the alarms You will have no way of knowing the current operation state of the alarm The protection mask is a feature that is only accessible using the SCPI command noted below Command SYSTem lt channel gt PROTection MASK 1 lt mask gt Where lt mask gt is the bit mask for disabling the alarms See Table 5 19 for details Table 5 19 Alarms Bit Mask ps AC Fail Not used Always 1
33. cable specifications 5 15 error messages execution errors B 4 execution errors list of B 4 F foldback disabling 3 24 resetting activated 3 25 setting delay time 3 24 setting protection 3 24 foldback mode defined 3 24 Front panel display 7 segment font 3 9 illustrated 1 5 G gain calibration effect of 6 6 gain error described 6 3 Index 1 Index IEEE GPIB cable 5 15 Std 488 1 1987 A 2 Std 488 1999 2 17 1 2 5 52 Std 488 2 1992 A 2 Std 488 2 1999 12 5 2 5 52 Std 488 2 1999 12 5 3 5 52 Std 488 2 Register Model 5 27 Std 488 2 registers 5 27 Std 488 2 syntax error 5 33 inactivity timeout default 3 7 described 3 7 L local lockout described 3 12 local operation coarse adjustment mode 3 3 fine adjustment mode 3 3 menu system navigating 3 2 3 5 select and set model procedure 3 5 setting VOL and CUR modes 3 5 N Normal display mode described 3 7 O offset calibration effect of 6 6 offset error described 6 3 P parameter types A 7 boolean A 7 discrete A 7 numeric A 7 string A 7 parameters units of measure and multipliers A 2 S Index 2 SCPI A 4 command hierarchy A 3 command structure A 3 command summary A 14 command tree A 8 common commands A 6 conformance information A 2 described A 3 minimum and maximum A 6 parameter types A 7 requirements A 2 terminating characters A 6 using queries A 5 select and set
34. lt channel gt SYSTem lt channel gt SYSTem channel SYSTem channel ERROE CODE RESet WAIT TEST IDENtify SAVE RECall ERRor NEXT NEXT Query device ID string device ID string Save sl user preset values Setting Index 3 E Select any slot from 0 3 Load the user preset values Setting Index 0 3 gt No Select any slot from 0 3 Returns the next error in the instrument s error queue Returns the error code only for the next error in the instrument s error queue 929U9J9JOH PUBPWILWWOD dOS o 8H L0 0 T0Z IN Go V Table A 9 System Commands Continued Query the Error Queue for the number of entries Select Voltage Analog Programming Input Voltage Input Level Range Select Current Analog Programming Input Voltage Input Level Range Select the address to communicate with Setup the Voltage control APG source 1SYSTem lt channel gt ERRor COUN t SYSTem lt channel gt COMMunicate gram LEVel VOLTage ISOLated SYSTem lt channel gt COMMunicate gram LEVel CURRent ISOLated SYSTem lt channel gt COMMunicate MCHannel ADDRess 1SYSTem lt channel gt sREMore SOURCE VOLTage Returns the number of errors currently in the error queue Select level for Voltage Level 2 APG Level can be between 10 MA Ximum MI 2 10 volts Nimum Select level fo
35. 01 Rev C Calibration and Troubleshooting Over Voltage Protection Calibration Important The Voltage Calibration must be done before performing this procedure If this is not done the OVP calibration will be inaccurate To calibrate the over voltage protection l 2 3 Turn on the power supply Select the VAP mode to be Off Set the voltage set point to be 90 of the model voltage and the current to be 10 of the model current Turn on the main power output Execute the OVP calibration SCPI command CAL PROT The power supply will enter into self calibration mode The output voltage display blinks OVP CAL After several seconds the calibration will complete and the display will return to normal operation with output off Calibration of the power supply is complete Important The output main voltage must be precalibrated The SCPI command s for these instructions are CALibration VOLTage PROTection M370430 01 Rev C 7 9 Calibration and Troubleshooting Non isolated Analog Programming Calibration Prior to this the main output must be calibrated first Important In calibration commands when or keys are expected any other key will exit from the calibration mode Non isolated Voltage Monitoring Calibration Important For maximum accuracy at a specific APG level follow the calibration procedure again but use the intended operating voltage level in steps 3 and 8 To calibrate the non
36. 01 Rev C Important Safety Instructions WARNING High energy and high voltage Exercise caution when using a power supply High energy levels can be stored at the output voltage terminals on a power supply in normal operation In addition potentially lethal voltages exist in the power circuit and on the output and sense connectors of a power supply with a rated output greater than 40 V Filter capacitors store potentially dangerous energy for some time after power is removed N WARNING Fire hazard Operate the power supply in an environment free of flammable gases or fumes To ensure that the power supply s safety features are not compromised use the power supply as specified in this Manual and do not substitute parts or make any unauthorized modifications If service is necessary please return the power supply to the Authorized Service Center See the Warranty on page 11 N WARNING Limitations on use The XG and XTR Family Programmable DC Power Supply is not intended for use in connection with life support systems or other medical equipment or devices N CAUTION For use as a battery charger When you are using a power supply for battery charging applications it is essential to provide an appropriately sized fuse or circuit breaker in series between the power supply output and the battery Installation of a protector fuse or DC circuit breaker rated for about 11596 of the maximum current rating of the power supply and
37. 20 M370430 01 Rev C Communications Options The Properties dialog box appears See Figure 6 25 ENET Properties _ O Figure 6 25 XTR ENET Properties Dialog Box 3 Click the ASCII Setup button The ASCII Setup dialog box will appear as shown in Figure 6 26 4 Verify that the ASCII Sending and ASCII Receiving boxes are checked as shown in Figure 6 26 M370430 01 Rev C 6 21 Communications Options ASCII Setup m ASCH Sending gt Send line ends with line feeds v Echo typed characters locally Line delay o milliseconds Character delay fo milliseconds ASCII Receiving v Append line feeds to incoming line ends Force incoming data to 7 bit ASCII v Wrap lines that exceed terminal width Cancel Figure 6 26 ASCII Setup Dialog Box 5 Click OK Establishing Communication with the Power Supply To establish communication with the power supply 1 Inthe main HyperTerminal window click Call See Figure 6 27 2 To verify that the XG XTR unit is connected and functioning type the following command ADR lt gt IDN where the lt gt should be replaced by the address assigned to the power supply in the Selecting ENET as the Communication Port on page 6 16 3 Verify that the XTR unit responds with the ID string 4 To save your session for future use click File gt Save As See Figure 6 28 6 22
38. 32 xj D lo gl nDalem E Connect To Settings I DN AMETEK XG 600 2 8 SN 1002004518 2 12 01 10 11 Ds creer Change con Enter details for the host that you want to call Host address 192 168 1 116 Port number 5025 Connect using TceAP Winsock Connected 0 03 51 s Auto detect TCP IP SCROLL kas NUM Capre Pintedo Z Figure 6 32 System with Two Connected Devices Figure 6 32 shows a system with two connected devices Important In this system configuration every power supply needs a unique IP address whereas the address defined from front panel power supply s own address may be arbitrary Network Topology 2 ENET and RS 485 Bus M370430 01 Rev C Up to 30 units may be connected to the RS 485 bus The first unit connects to the controller via ENET and the other units are connected with the RS 485 bus 6 27 Communications Options Figure 6 33 shows the system of a unit with the ENET option and several units connected via the RS 485 bus Each power supply must have its own address defined from the front panel Only one IP address is required for your network excluding computers and only one controlling program is required one per unit with ENET option as noted in Network Topology 1 Simple LAN on page 6 24 C Local Computer IN OUT IN OUT Power Supply 1 Power Supply 2 Power Supply 30 Figure 6 33 ENET and RS 485 Bus XTR ENET HyperTermi
39. 5 17 FIGURE 5 18 Contents INSERTING SCREWDRIVER INTO SPRING TERMINAL BLOCK 4 7 APG AND DC OUTPUT CONNECTOR eee eee eee oon etes esos ss eee eteeeeeeono 4 7 PROGRAMMING OUTPUT VOLTAGE USING AN EXTERNAL VOLTAGE SOURCE MC 4 9 PROGRAMMING OUTPUT CURRENT USING AN EXTERNAL VOLTAGE SS OUI T6 Uer E 4 9 PROGRAMMING OUTPUT VOLTAGE USING AN EXTERNAL RESISTOR 4 14 PROGRAMMING OUTPUT CURRENT USING AN EXTERNAL RESISTOR 4 14 VOLTAGE READBACK USING APG CONNECTOR J1 4 19 CURRENT READBACK USING APG CONNECTOR dl 4 19 AUX OUTPUT AND ISOL CONNECTOR PINOUT ecce eee esee eee een eauun 4 20 PROGRAMMING OUTPUT VOLTAGE USING AN ISOLATED EXTERNAL VOLTAGE SOURCE 25 eere eH eere e eda eee la ossa bie sa A Oat 4 22 PROGRAMMING OUTPUT CURRENT USING AN ISOLATED EXTERNAL VOLTAGE SOURCE scicca itono a oaaae poser eot dites feto E esie ea eere eee 4 22 PROGRAMMING OUTPUT VOLTAGE USING AN ISOLATED EXTERNAL FRESIS VOR eee M 4 27 PROGRAMMING OUTPUT CURRENT USING AN ISOLATED EXTERNAL RESISTOR 5 282 ona ic diee I acu AR 4 27 ISOLATED VOLTAGE MONITORING cccossssssssssscccccccccsssccccccccecccssscsscccees 4 32 ISOLATED CURRENT MONITORING ccccssssssssssscccccccccssscsscccccccccssssscscoees 4 32 REMOTE CONTROL CONNECTORS ccccsscccccssccssccscccccccccccsccsscccccscccssccsssscees 5 3 RS 232
40. 51 Local Operation Setting Foldback Protection Foldback protection is only available on the master units as the slaves operate in constant current mode They should never crossover into constant voltage mode If foldback is triggered on the master unit when its output shuts down it will program the slave unit s output to zero volts Connecting to the Load in Local Sensing Mode Parallel Control Method Connect the power supplies in parallel to obtain a single output supply with a higher output current set point Set all of the outputs to the same voltage before connecting the positive and negative terminals in parallel The total current available is the sum of the maximum currents of each power supply sted Pair xo ji Soo ES T J1 1 J1 2 SNS LS MASTER PSU Shielded To other slaves Figure 3 7 Load Connections in Local Sensing Mode 3 52 M370430 01 Rev C Local Operation Connecting to the Load in Remote Sensing Mode Parallel Control Method SNS DE OX 2 9 a c ai Exi J41 42 J1 5 J16 SNS LS IS SNS MASTER PSU J1 47 J1 16 SNS REF CSH To other slaves J1 17 J1 16 REF J CSH SLAVE PSU 41 4 J1 2 J1 5 J1 6 SNS LS LS SNS SNS X XX 2 SNS Figure 3 8 Load Connections in Remote Sensing Mode Parallel Control Method M370430 01 Rev C 3 53 Local Operation 3 54 M370430 01 Rev C Analog Programming APG and Isolated Analog Programming ISOL
41. 63 bytes 32 time lt ims Ping statistics for 100 10 1 63 Packets Sent 4 Received 4 Lost 0 0 loss Approximate round trip times in milli seconds Minimum Oms Maximum Oms Average Oms CONNECTING TO A NETWORK There are two basic situations to deal with in communicating with the power supply from a PC They depend on whether or not the PC is on the same side of a router as the power supply 6 54 M370430 01 Rev C Communications Options Connecting with PC on Same Side of Router as Power Supply WAN Address 10 11 27 86 Router IP Address 192 168 1 1 PC Power Supply IP Address 192 168 1 100 IP Address 192 168 1 101 Gateway Address 192 168 1 1 Gateway Address 192 168 1 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Figure 6 35 PC on Same Side of Router as Power Supply The simplest case is when they are both on the same side as in Figure 6 35 In the example of Figure 6 the router has assigned addresses to the power supply and to the PC using DHCP For this case the router has assigned an address of 192 168 1 100 to the PC and an address of 192 168 1 101 To connect to the power supply by a Web browser simply enter the power supply s address of 192 168 1 101 into the Web browser s address bar This will open up the power supply s Home page It should appear similar to Figure 6 36 Please note that the Web page requires Java to be installed on the Web browser for it to display pro
42. 7 6 CALIBRATING THE OUTPUT CURRENT eeeeeeen nennen nnn nnn nnnn nnns nnn ann 7 7 SUE AN AUN oT CCP 7 7 ONSEt Gallbrati0 Ncs M MCN UN 7 8 OVER VOLTAGE PROTECTION CALIBRATION eee eene nnne nnn neas 1 9 NON ISOLATED ANALOG PROGRAMMING CALIBRATION cene 7 10 Non isolated Voltage Monitoring Calibration cccccccceesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseaes 7 10 Non isolated Current Monitoring Calibration ccccccecesseeseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeaaes 7 10 M370430 01 Rev C Contents Non isolated Voltage Programming of Voltage Calibration 7 12 Non isolated Resistive Programming of Voltage Calibration 7 13 Non isolated Voltage Programming of Current Calibration 7 14 Non isolated Resistive Programming of Current Calibration 7 15 CALIBRATION PROCEDURE FOR ISOLATED MODES enR e 7 16 Isolated Voltage Monitoring Calibration cccccccccsssseeceeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeess 7 16 Isolated Current Monitoring Calibration cccccccssseeeeceeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeesaeneeeeeeees 7 17 Isolated Voltage Programming of Voltage Calibration 7 18 Isolated Resistive Programming of Voltage Calibration 7 19 Isolated Voltage Programming of Current Calibration
43. 9 position mode control to the PGM position or press the rotary Adjust Enter control if the control knob is already at the PGM position The display will show rE in the output voltage display and the selected remote interface in the output current display Turn the rotary Adjust Enter control until the display shows LULL OFF Press the rotary Adjust Enter control Local lockout will be disabled after power cycling the power supply The SCPI command s for these instructions are SYSTem lt channel s gt sREMote STATe 3 42 M370430 01 Rev C Local Operation Resetting the Power Supply The reset is used to clear the parameters to the factory default values Soft Reset M370430 01 Rev C The soft reset is used to set the parameters see Table 3 9 to the default values but it does not reset the calibration constants To perform a soft reset l Turn the power supply to Off then On When the unit is powering on BEBE BBBB is displayed on the output voltage and current displays Press the key combination of both OUTPUT ENABLE Main button and OUTPUT ENABLE Aux button and hold continuously for 3 seconds in order to execute If the flash fail alarm triggers it is also possible to reset the power supply The front panel should display P5U 5 r5 Once a reset has been triggered the output voltage display shows P5U Cir for 1 second The model number will be displayed for 1 second and then return to norm
44. Available MAV This bit is TRUE whenever the power supply is ready to accept a request by the Digital Programming Interface to output data bytes This message is FALSE when the output queue is empty Standard Event Status Summary ESB This bit is TRUE when a bit is set in the Standard Event Status Register Master Summary Status MSS This is caused by one of the following Status Byte bit 0 AND Service Request Enable Register bit 0 Status Byte bit 1 AND Service Request Enable Register bit 1 Status Byte bit 2 AND Service Request Enable Register bit 2 Status Byte bit 3 AND Service Request Enable Register bit 3 Status Byte bit 4 AND Service Request Enable Register bit 4 Status Byte bit 5 AND Service Request Enable Register bit 5 Status Byte bit 7 AND Service Request Enable Register bit 7 Request Service RQS RQS is TRUE if the Service Request Enable Register has a bit set and there is a corresponding bit within the Status Byte M370430 01 Rev C 9 33 Remote Operation Operation Status Register Summary OSR This bit is TRUE when a bit in the Operation Event Status Register is set and its corresponding bit in the Operation Status Enable Register is set Service Request Enable Register The Service Request Enable Register allows you to select the reasons for the power supply to issue a service request The Service Request Enable Register allows you to select which summary messages in the Status Byte Register may cause
45. Connecting AC Input Power WARNING Shock hazard Disconnect AC power from the unit before removing the cover Even with the front panel power switch in the Off position live line voltages are exposed when the cover is removed Repairs must be made by an Authorized Service Center N WARNING Shock hazard There is a potential shock hazard if the power supply chassis and cover are not connected to an electrical ground via the safety ground in the AC input connector Ensure that the power supply is connected to a grounded AC outlet with the recommended AC input cord configured for the available line voltage as described in this section N WARNING Shock hazard The AC input cord is the disconnect device for the power supply The plug must be a non locking plug which is readily identifiable by and accessible to the operator The input cord must be no longer than 9 84 feet 3 m XG XTR 850 Watt AC Input Connector On the 850 Watt models the AC input connector is a standard IEC 16 A 250 V male connector located on the rear panel of the power supply The AC input cord provided is rated for 30 A 300 V and appropriate for use in any country M370430 01 Rev C 2 5 Installation XG XTR 1500 and 1700 Watt AC Input Connector On the XG XTR family 1U full 19 inch rack models the AC input connector is a 3 terminal wire clamp located on the rear panel of the power supply Figure 2 1 1500 and 1700 Watt AC Inp
46. Current Ranges Model 6 110 8 100 12 70 20 42 33 25 40 21 60 14 80 10 5 100 8 5 150 5 6 300 2 8 600 1 4 Output Voltage 0 6 V 0 8 V 0 12 V 0 20 V 0 33 V 0 40 V 0 60 V 0 80 V 0 100 V 0 150 V 0 300 V 0 600 V Output Current 0 110 A 0 100 A 0 70 A 0 2 A 0 25 A 0 21 A 0 14 A 0 10 5 A 0 8 5 A 0 5 6 A 0 2 8 A 0 1 4 A 1 3 Introduction Table 1 2 lists the models in the XG XTR 1500 Watt series covered by this Manual Table 1 2 XG XTR 1500 Watt Series Voltage and Current Ranges Model Output Voltage Output Current 6 220 0 6 V 0 220 A 8 187 5 0 8 V 0 187 5 A 12 5 120 0 12 5 V 0 120 A 20 76 0 20 V 0 76 A 30 50 0 30 V 0 50 A 40 38 0 40 V 0 38 A 60 25 0 60 V 0 25 A 80 19 0 80 V 0 19A 100 15 0 100 V 0 15 A 150 10 0 150 V 0 10 A 300 5 0 300 V 0 5 A 600 2 6 0 600 V 0 2 6 A Table 1 3 lists the models in the XG XTR 1700 Watt series covered by this Manual Table 1 3 XG XTR 1700 Watt Series Voltage and Current Ranges 1 4 Model Output Voltage Output Current 6 220 0 6 V 0 220 A 8 200 0 8 V 0 200 A 12 140 0 12 V 0 140 A 20 84 0 20 V 0 84 A 33 50 0 33 V 0 50 A 40 42 0 40 V 0 42 A 60 28 0 60 V 0 28 A 80 21 0 80 V 0 21 A 100 17 0 100 V 0 17 A 150 11 2 0 150 V 0 11 2 A 300 5 6 0 300 V 0 5 6A 600 2 8 0 600 V 0 2 8 A M370430 01 Rev C Introduction Front Panel Figure 1 1 XG XTR Front Panels Half Rack above Full Rack below not to scale Item Description 1 Front panel power switc
47. Figure 6 10 Devicelnstaller Setup Wizard M370430 01 Rev C 6 9 Communications Options 2 Click Next to open the Select Installation Folder window The Select Installation Folder window prompts for a destination folder for the installation F Lantronix DeviceInstaller Select Installation Folder The installer will install Lantronix Deviceinstaller to the following folder To install in this folder click Next To install to a different folder enter it below or click Browse Folder C Program Files Lantroni Devicelnstaller Browse Install Lantronix D evicelnstaller for yourself or for anyone who uses this computer s Everyone C Justme Figure 6 11 Select Installation Folder Window 3 Click Next to begin the installation The Installation Complete window displays when the installation is finished 4 Click Close to exit Configuring the Device Using Devicelnstaller The DevicelInstaller displays a list of the XG XTR units with the ENET option that are on the network When the DevicelInstaller initially starts the device list is empty Devices may be added by performing a search for the devices on the network or by adding them manually Selecting a Network Adapter After the installation of DeviceInstaller to your PC you must select which network adaptor you wish the DevicelInstaller to use for all its network communications 6 10 M370430 01 Rev C Communications Options
48. Figure 6 38 In this case the PC cannot see the power supply Instead it only sees the router at its address of 10 11 27 86 this address is given as an example only WAN Address 10 11 27 86 Router IP Address 192 168 1 1 PC Power Supply IP Address 10 11 27 87 IP Address 192 168 1 101 Gateway Address 10 11 1 1 Gateway Address 192 168 1 1 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Figure 6 38 Power Supply Hidden Behind a Router In order to send messages from the PC to the power supply it is necessary to instruct the router to perform port forwarding This will instruct the router to forward messages it sees on a certain port to another address In this case the other address will be the power supply s address This example will show how to perform port forwarding for a Linksys router M370430 01 Rev C 6 57 Communications Options LINKSYS A Division of Cisco Systems Ine Setup internet Setup Internet Connection Type Optional Settings required by some ISPs Network Setup Router IP Network Address Server Settings DHCP Time Setting 6 58 Setup Wireless Security Consult your router s documentation if you have another router Connect to your router s home page If you have a PC connected on the same side of the router as the power supply then you can usually do this by pointing your Web browser to the address of 192 168 1 1 Most Linksys routers use this address for the router
49. Five ports are available for remote digital programming and readback e RS 232 e RS 485 e USB e GPIB optional e ENET optional To select a communication port 1 Turn the 9 position mode control to PGM rE is displayed in the output voltage display 2 Turn the rotary Adjust Enter control to select one of the communication ports 232 485 gPI b USb LAn LOCL LOC is also an available option which lets you lock the front panel to prevent the settings from being changed Important The remote interface that was previously configured when the local lock setting was activated will still be available for remote control while the front panel is locked Data Rate Setting Kbps The data rate setting is available for RS 232 and RS 485 protocols only Five optional rates are possible 1 2 2 4 4 8 9 6 default 19 2 38 4 and 57 6 kilo bits per second Kbps To select the desired rate 1 Turn the 9 position mode control to PGM rE is displayed in the output voltage display 2 Turn the rotary Adjust Enter control to select 232 RS 232 or 485 RS 485 communication ports 3 Press the rotary Adjust Enter control HpII2 is displayed on the output voltage display and the currently set data rate is displayed on the output current display 4 Turn the rotary Adjust Enter control to select the desired data rate 5 Press enter to commit the new data rate The multichannel address setting will now be configured 5 24
50. M370430 01 Rev C Communications Options IDN RMETEK XG 600 2 8 SNH10028004518 2 12 01 10 11 Figure 6 27 Main HyperTerminal Window Figure 6 28 Saving Session 5 Type the name of the session It is recommended that you include the IP in your naming convention so that it 1s clear which power supply you are connecting to 6 Click Save M370430 01 Rev C 6 23 Communications Options My Recent Documents Desktop My Documents r eu My Computer E LT My Netwo Places Save as type Session files hf Figure 6 29 Saved Session Se TR ENET_10 10 10 54 ht m Cancel p Congratulations Your network is installed and functioning properly Advanced Section The advanced section describes the setup and connection for various network topologies involving multiple power supplies Network Topology 1 Simple LAN The simple LAN topology is the most common configuration for setting up the ENET option on the XG XTR The topology follows the typical star topology provided by a HUB and multiple XGs XTRs with the ENET option and one or more computers Figure 6 30 shows this configuration 6 24 M370430 01 Rev C Communications Options Local Computer 1 Local Computer 2 H H ENET ENET H Power Supply 1 Pply ENET Power Supply 30 Power Supply 2 Figure 6 30 Multiple Power Supplies and Two Computers All devices connect via the HUB Every device must have
51. M370430 01 Rev C Remote Operation Multichannel Address Setting The power supply multichannel address can be set to any address between to 30 All units that are connected together via the RS 232 or RS 485 connector must have a unique multichannel address M370430 01 Rev C To set the address l Select the appropriate communication port as described Selecting the Appropriate Communication Port on page 5 24 If more than one unit has the same multichannel address when connected through the RS 485 connector then collisions are possible resulting in garbled responses to queries Press the rotary Adjust Enter control Hddr is displayed on the output voltage display Turn the rotary Adjust Enter control to select the desired multichannel address between 1 to 30 Press the rotary Adjust Enter control to commit the new address 9 25 Remote Operation Remote Interface Addressing 9 26 All commands must be issued with a multichannel address or the device must be selected using the adr or SYST lt channel gt COMM MCH ADDR commands Once a device is selected all commands sent without a multichannel address will be handled by the selected device The use of multichannel addresses supersedes the selected device as the destination for a message For more details on how multichannel addresses affect responses see Table 5 8 To change the selected device simply issue the adr or SYST lt channel gt C
52. Operation Figure 5 20 summarizes the Standard Event Status Register SESR Status Byte MSS Standard Event Summary Register Summary Status Register Bit Bit Not Used m Not Used ca w Operation Complete ge Error Event Queue Status idm Bn Not Used LS Flag Query Error gt 2 VPN QUEStionable Status 4 p Device Dependent Error gt 3 m Neg J Summary Bit 2 meos Execution Error gt 4 7 78 NotUsed 6 CL Command Error gt 5 2 OPERation Status gt _ Not Used6 6 Power On 7 Figure 5 20 Summary of Standard Event Status Register Table 5 10 Standard Event Status Register Bit Bit Weight Bit Name Description 0 Operation Complete Set if OPC command has been received and all OPC pending operations have been completed Request Control RQC Not implemented Always set to 0 2 Query Error QYE Not implemented 16 Device Dependent Error Set if there is a device specific error DDE See Device Specific Error List on page B 5 for a list possible error codes and descriptions Execution Error EXE Set if a program data element following a header was evaluated by the power supply as outside of its legal input range or is otherwise inconsistent with the power supply s capabilities Suggests that a valid program message could not be properly executed due to some power supply condition See Execution Error List on page B 4 for a list of possible error codes a
53. Programming ISOL Table 4 3 APG Pins and Functions J1 Pin Reference Function J1 9 VOL PR Analog Voltage Programming Input J1 10 CUR PR Analog Current Programming Input J1 11 VOL RES PR Voltage Resistive Programming Input J1 12 CUR RES PR Current Resistive Programming Input J1 13 VOL MON Voltage Monitor The scale of this output is set by the APG voltage input range selected see Important note below J1 14 CUR MON Current Monitor The scale of this output is set by the APG current input range selected see Important note below J1 15 EXT CC CV External CC CV Indicates the state of the operate mode When in output Logic is TTL CMOS compatible CV mode logic high is output and when in CC mode logic low is J1 16 CSH Current Share Used to hook up units for current sharing Output from master unit Slave units should be left open J1 17 REF I Current Reference Input Slave input from current share output on the master unit J1 18 NC 1 Important Non isolated monitor lines are only valid in local control digital remote and non isolated analog programming modes for the respective voltage and current control If isolated analog programming is used the isolated monitor lines should be used as the non isolated monitoring lines will not accurately reflect the output state of the power supply 4 6 M370430 01 Rev C Analog Programming APG and Isolated Analog Programming ISOL Making Control Connections
54. Remote Operation describes the remote operation of the XG XTR power supply via the communication ports Remote Operation Introduction In addition to the front panel interface the XG XTR can be remotely controlled through the various remote interfaces The XG XTR implements the SCPI standard as its command line interface for remotely controlling the power supply Additionally a small subset of legacy commands has been provided for ease of use and backwards compatibility All of the remote interfaces use the same command line interface This chapter is divided into two parts e Hardware and Connection Setup provides information on how to setup a connection to the different remote interfaces available on the XG XTR The remote interfaces covered include RS 232 RS 485 USB and GPIB The LAN ENET option is set up differently between the XG XTR 850 Watt models and the 1500 and 1700 Watt models See either SETTING UP XG XTR 850 WATT MODELS or SETTING UP XG XTR 1500 and 1700 WATT MODELS in Section 6 Communications Options as applicable e Command Line Interface and SCPI explains how to send commands to the power supply using the SCPI commands and the theory behind SCPI Hardware and Connection Setup This section provides information on setting up the hardware and is organized into setup for each hardware type Once the setup has been successfully completed data can be sent to and responses received from the power supply Selec
55. Rev C 5 65 Remote Operation 4 From the Hyper Terminal or any other terminal program select the Transfer gt Send Text File 5 Navigate to and select the text file that was previously stored Click the Open button 6 Execute the program recording stop command PROG STOP 7 Execute the readback command to verify the entire program was transferred correctly PROG READ Set the data rate back to the original speed 9 Close the connection to the HyperTerminal program and configure the connection data rate to be the original speed Running an Auto Sequence Program Once an auto sequence program has been stored there are a few commands that can be used to run the program Once a program begins running it will continue running until completion and then repeat the number of times specified by the repeat command The default at power on is to have repeat set to 1 Commands ERG INITiate lt channel gt IMMediate PROGram lt channel gt STATe RUN STOP PAUSe Where RUN causes the program to begin execution STOP causes the program to stop execution PAUSe causes the program to stop executing at the current command If a subsequent run is sent the program will resume executing with the next command in the program For Example PROG STAR IDN IDN j PROGIISTOP 5 66 M370430 01 Rev C Remote Operation PROG STAT RUN The output after the last command might be as follows AMETEK XG
56. STATus lt channel gt QUEStionable Questionable TEMPerature NTRansition Status Temperature Negative Transition Register Set STATus channel QUEStionable Questionable TEMPerature PTRansition Status Temperature Positive Transition Register Query Le STATuS channel QUEStionabile Questionable VOLTage CONDition Status Voltage Condition Register Set STATus channel QUEStionable Questionable VOLTage ENABle Status Voltage Enable Register Query the Questionable Temp Event Register See Table 5 15 on page 5 49 Access the Questionable Transition Flags Temp Negative Trans Filter 0 65535 Register See Table 5 15 on page 5 49 Access the Questionable Transition Flags Temp Positive Trans Filter 0 65535 gt Register See Table 5 15 on page 5 49 See Table 5 15 on page 5 49 Query the Questionable Voltage Condition Register Access the Questionable Volt Enable Flags Enable Register See Table 0 65535 gt 5 15 on page 5 49 929U9J9J8OH pugululO2 dOS VE V o eH L0 0 Tv0Z IN Table A 10 Status Commands Continued Query Questionable Status Voltage Event Register Set Questionable Status Voltage Negative Transition Register Set Questionable Status Voltage Positive Transition Register Query the Standard Event register ESR Enable the Standard Event register ESE ESE STATus lt channel gt
57. Sequence Program on page 5 65 for details Readback and Troubleshooting an Auto Sequence Program 5 64 Since the Auto Sequence programming function records the commands at program time without verifying the syntax it can be difficult to spot an error in the sequence for example if a typo was made when entering a command during the record phase A readback command has been provided to output the stored auto sequence program currently in memory M370430 01 Rev C Remote Operation Another benefit to the readback command is it allows the auto sequence program to be captured and stored on the client side for reloading when the program is to persist beyond power cycles Command PROGram channel READback For Example PROG START CLS VOLT 544 CURR 0 25 IDN PROG STOP PROG READ Response CLS VOLT 5 4 CURR 0 25 IDN PROG STOP Reloading an Auto Sequence Program The following procedure will demonstrate how to store a command beyond a power cycle of the unit Important This functionality is only available through USB RS 232 and RS 485 It is not possible to reload an auto sequence program over the GPIB and ENET cards To reload Auto Sequence program from file 1 Set the data rate of the device to be 1200 bps 2 Close the connection to the hyperterminal program and configure the connection data rate to be 1200 bps 3 Execute the program recording command PROG START M370430 01
58. To select the network adaptor 1 Start DevicelInstaller by clicking Start gt All Programs gt Lantronix gt DevicelInstaller gt DevicelInstaller 2 If this is the first time you have started the program after installing it and there are more than one network adaptors on the PC you might be prompted to select the network adaptor as seen in Figure 6 12 If this prompt does not appear click Tools gt Options to bring up the Options window shown in Figure 6 13 3 Verify that the network adaptor that is connected to the network that you are running your XG XTR unit s on 1s selected Important Only network adaptors that are enabled and have an Ethernet cable connected will be shown in this list If one of your networks adaptors is not shown in this list verify that it is enabled and has a network cable connected to it 4 Click the OK button Multiple network adapters present Multiple network adapters are present on this system Do you want to select which adapter to use Figure 6 12 Multiple Network Adapters M370430 01 Rev C 6 11 Communications Options Options Use the Following network adapter v Wireless Network Connection 10 10 9 226 O Local Area Connection 10 10 9 132 9 c _ amy Figure 6 13 Selecting Network Adapter Assigning an IP Address to the Power Supply Unit If your system is auto IP configured the following warning message is displayed Network configuration
59. VOLTage EVENt STATus channel VOLTage NTRansition STATus channel 5 VOLTage PTRansition STATus channel STATus lt channel gt STATus lt channel gt QUEStionable QUEStionable QUEStionable STANdard EVENt STANdard ENABle SBYTe EVENt Query the Questionable Volt Yes Event Register See Table 5 15 on page 5 49 Access the Questionable lt Transition Flags Yes Voltage Negative Trans Filter 0 65535 gt Register See Table 5 15 on page 5 49 Access the Questionable lt Transition Flags Yes Voltage Positive Trans Filter 0 65535 gt Register See Table 5 15 on page 5 49 See Table 5 10 on 5 37 Same Query the Standard Yes Event Status Register SERS Access the Standard Event lt Enable Flags Yes Status Register SERS 0 2255 Enable Flags See Table 5 10 on page 5 37 Same as ESE Query the Status Byte See Yes Table 5 10 on page 5 37 99U9J9JoH PUBPWILWOD dOS o 8H L0 0 T0Z IN GeV Table A 10 Status Commands Continued Service STATus channel SREQuest ENABle Access Service Request Enable Flags Request Enable Command 0 255 gt Enable SRE p S5 EE STAIUuS Sohannel SoLESI Clears all the Status Data Structures Table A 11 Protection Commands Parameter and i Command Description Range Query Enable the SENSe channel PROTection INTerlo Control the Enable Disable
60. XTR 150 5 6 SN E00123456 1 00 Build LOV 247 11252005 AME TER XG of XTR L50 5 0 SNF EB OIZ234506 1 00 Build bos Zig 1172005 5 68 M370430 01 Rev C Remote Operation Configure Other Protection Mechanisms Foldback Protection Foldback protection causes the output of the power supply to shut down if the selected regulation mode is entered and the configured delay time expires A delay time may be specified as well The only way to clear foldback is by pressing the rotary Adjust Enter control for 3 seconds and executing the Clear command Command OUTPut lt channel gt PROTection CLEar Setting the Foldback Mode The following command will set the foldback mode The mode selected by the character mnemonic sent will indicate which mode will trigger the foldback alarm to begin counting For example if the command is sent with the CV mnemonic and the output is enabled with no load attached open circuit the unit will operate in constant voltage mode and the foldback counter will begin counting If the CC mode was set and the output was enabled with no load connected the unit will operate in CV mode and the foldback counter will not trigger To set the foldback mode send the command Command OUTPut lt channel gt PROTection FOLDback CC CV NONE Where NONE indicates foldback protection is disabled CC indicates the supply will shut down due to constant current condition CV indicates the supply wil
61. address IP address 169 254 117 119 Subnet mask 255 255 0 0 Default gateway Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DNS server Alternate DNS server Figure 6 9 Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties Dialog Box 4 Click on Use the following IP address option and type the appropriate IP address in the box or select the Obtain an IP address automatically setting 1f your network is configured using DHCP 5 Click OK Software Installations To set up the ENET option card the Lantronix DevicelInstaller program needs to be installed on your PC DevicelInstaller is an all in one utility for setting up various Lantronix devices on a network Device Installer auto detects any devices on the network and allows for configuration of network settings As a management tool the DevicelInstaller allows for device monitoring and status verification of the ENET option card 6 8 M370430 01 Rev C Communications Options To install the DeviceInstaller 1 Insert the DeviceInstaller CD into the CD ROM drive The CD should launch automatically If you need to manually launch the CD click the Start button on the Task Bar and select Run Enter the CD drive letter for example D Launch exe The DeviceInstaller Setup Wizard opens to guide the installation process See Figure 6 10 ie Lantronix DeviceInstaller Welcome to the Lantronix Devicelnstaller Setup Wizard
62. adjust the set point Note that there is an activity time out see Normal Display Mode and Inactivity Timeout on page 3 7 The adjustments you make to the set point affect the opposing output value voltage when in AMPS mode or current when in VOLTS mode which will update in the non blinking display Press the rotary Adjust Enter control to enter fine adjust tracking mode The set point blinks faster when the unit is in fine adjust tracking mode Use the rotary Adjust Enter control to fine tune the set point Once the set point has been selected press the rotary Adjust Enter control to exit tracking mode and return to normal display mode To access the select and set entry mode for the voltage and current set points Li 3 6 Select VOLTS or AMPS position on the 9 position mode control Press the rotary Adjust Enter control three times in succession to enter coarse Pre Set Adjustment Press the rotary Adjust Enter control one more time to enter fine Pre Set Adjustment Press the rotary Adjust Enter control once again to set the value The units can also timeout adjustable to exit the menu Once Pre Set Mode is entered ypmy and ovzy will appear in the voltage display M370430 01 Rev C Local Operation Normal Display Mode and Inactivity Timeout M370430 01 Rev C Normal display mode appears on the output voltage and current displays when the configuration changes from the front panel have been comple
63. alarm automatically clears the output voltage and current displays will return to normal but the ALARM LED will remain illuminated to indicate that an alarm has occurred If an automatic alarm is triggered the normal alarm clearing procedure still applies To clear the ALARM LED after an automatic alarm has cleared use one of the following methods Send the SCPI Clear Alarm command e Press the OUTPUT ENABLE Main button to reenable the output The ALARM LED will no longer be illuminated For example if one of the fans in the XG XTR was temporarily blocked causing a Fan alarm then the blockage was cleared and the fans restarted the alarm would clear The output voltage and current displays would be in normal mode but the ALARM LED would be illuminated See Front Panel ALARM LED on page 3 23 for information on other events that affect the ALARM LED Alarms status 1s tracked in the SCPI status registers For more details on how and where the alarms are tracked see Standard SCPI Register Structure on page 5 38 Front Panel ALARM LED M370430 01 Rev C The Alarm LED will illuminate due to one or more of the following events occurring e OTP has been tripped e A fan has stopped e OVP has tripped e OCP has tripped e UVP has tripped e Interlock is open circuit e AC power falls out of range Foldback has tripped e Persistent storage checksum is wrong Flash Fail alarm Internal malfunction of
64. be set from the Protection menu under the SLP entry The sleep hold off delay can be set from 1 to 24 hours To disable the Sleep Mode Set the sleep hold off delay value to zero 0 This is also the default state for the Sleep Mode feature Thus unless set from the front panel or remotely using a SCPI command Sleep Mode is off Once enabled set to a value from 1 to 24 it will be enabled If the set time elapses without any activity on the power supply it will enter Sleep Mode Note that after issuing a RST command the power supply will revert to factory default settings which means Sleep Mode will be turned off Command SYSTem lt channel gt PROTection SLEep sleep time Query Format SYSTem channel PROTection SLEep 9 5 Remote Operation 5 76 M370430 01 Rev C Communications Options Chapter 6 Communications Options contains information and procedures for setting up and programming XG XTR 850 Watt power supply models with the MEA option for LAN Ethernet Interface and for XG XTR 1500 Watt and 1700 Watt power supply models with the MEB option for LAN Ethernet Interface Communications Options INTRODUCTION This chapter contains setup and programming information for the XG XTR Series power supply for operation through a LAN Ethernet connection Although the MEA option is no longer available instructions for 850 Watt models with the MEA option including Troubleshooting are presented her
65. designed specifically to interrupt the DC voltage of the battery will provide adequate current protection Where several power supplies are in parallel it is best to fuse each power supply rather than use one fuse at the battery Power Supply Safety Markings NS Alternating Current On Supply d Earth Ground Terminal Off Supply D Protective Conductor Terminal Caution Check the Manualfor N additional information M370430 01 Rev C Safety Standard Warnings WARNING Keep these instructions This chapter contains important safety and operating instructions Read and keep this Operating Manual for future reference 1 Before installing and using the XG and XTR Family Programmable DC Power Supply read all instructions and cautionary markings on the instrument and all appropriate sections of this Manual 2 This instrument is for indoor use only Do not expose the instrument to moisture To reduce risk of fire hazard do not cover or obstruct the ventilation openings Be sure to install the instrument in a compartment which allows air to reach the ventilation inlets on the front and rear of the unit to prevent overheating For more information see Ventilation on page 2 4 3 To avoid a risk of fire and electric shock make sure that the existing wiring is in good condition and the wire is not undersized Do not operate the instrument with damaged or substandard wiring 4 Do not operate the instrument if i
66. eee eee ead 3 31 OVER CURRENT PROTECTION OGP 2 dnas tud avid ve a te E 3 31 USING OVER TEMPERATURE PROTECTION LOCK OTP eseeeeese 3 32 Befining the OMP MOS mer s 3 32 miz i inebisdzireenjeo mr 2051042675 Ate 3 32 USING THE EXTERNAL SHUTDOWN FUNCTION sixcisccivsiclantaiesivieiivosteeindesiterenmabedd 3 33 Activating the External Shutdown Function cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeasseeeeeess 3 33 Controlling the External Shutdown FUNCTION icccccciiiciiciiiiiiiii ciii 3 33 Defining the Polarity of the External Shutdown Signal s lt 3 34 LOOP PROTEC TION c 3 34 Setting UP LOOP Proteco ies netsh tote otia Sete duse Lose Net recae edad 3 35 INTEREOCKFUNCTION s ei 2202422360 2004 20022054 a cette eis epics DI EO tte laced 3 36 M370430 01 Rev C 4 Contents Defining the Interlock Mode ccccccsssseeeccesseeeeecceeeeeeesceeaeeceeseaeuseeeesseaneeeessaaaes 3 36 OUTRUN PROTECTION is c 3 36 Programming Voltage Output PreSet ccccccccccccesssseeeceeeeeeeseeseeeeeeesseaeeseeeeeeess 3 36 Programming Current Output Preset ccccccccssesseeceeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseaas 3 37 Poweron Statis oignal aeren a yaccvaie toe eaveceteest adage nee Saves RE LLE SANE C Ceni 3 38 HARDWARE MALFUNCTION ALARMS ccccccccecceseececeeseesueeeusauseeeueeeuaueueeueausaes 3 38 CURRENT CONFIGURATIO
67. etes esee esee eese eese e esee esses eese eese esee esee esee ee 6 59 FIGURE 7 1 OFFSET INTERCEPT ERROR AND GAIN SLOPE ERROR 7 3 FIGURE 7 2 CALIBRATION STEP 1 GAIN CALIBRATION ccccsssccccssssccccsscccccsscccsessscees 7 4 FIGURE 7 3 CALIBRATION STEP 2 OFFSET CALIBRATION sssccccsssssccccsssccccsscccccssscees 7 4 FIGURE 7 4 CALIBRATION STEP 3 RECALIBRATE GAIN cccsssssssssssssssssssssssssscssssssseess 7 5 FIGURE C 1 XG XTR 850 WATT MECHANICAL DIMENSIONS 6 TO 40 V MODELS C 11 FIGURE C 2 XG XTR 850 WATT MECHANICAL DIMENSIONS 60 V TO 600 V MODELS 0 icone e b DE E ates eae ene C 12 FIGURE C 3 XG XTR IN FULL RACK MECHANICAL DIMENSIONS 6 V TO 40 V MODEL ET e M C 13 FIGURE C 4 XG XTR IN FULL RACK MECHANICAL DIMENSIONS 6 V TO 40 V MODELS DC OUTPUT COVER 5 5 eoa erae e eroe eoe oa ve Eo Eee ono a cbe ub eoe seg E eoe ue UeG C 14 FIGURE C 5 XG XTR IN FULL RACK MECHANICAL DIMENSIONS 60 V TO 600 V MODELS I NL C 15 FIGURE C 6 XG XTR IN FULL RACK MECHANICAL DIMENSIONS 60 V TO 600 V MODELS W DC OUTPUT COVER ccccsssscccsssscccssscsccssscccceccsccceccccceeeccees C 16 FIGURE C 7 XG850 WITH FULL RACK AND FOOT OPTIONS FRONT SIDE AND REAR VIEN S Goat ha davis Qu tavi sese uei so m d E IEEE C 17 FIGURE C 8 XG850 STANDARD IN FULL RACK OPTION cccsssscccssssccccsssscccsssccceeess C 17 FIGURE C 9 XG850 LOW VOLTAGE MODEL DIMENSIONS TOP SIDE AND REAR C 18 FIGURE C 10 XG
68. for devices that cannot detect more specific errors This code indicates only that an Execution Error as defined in IEEE 488 2 11 5 1 1 5 has occurred Command protected Indicates that a legal password protected program command or query could not be executed because the command was disabled Check the calibration state Parameter error Indicates that a program data element related error has occurred Setting conflict Indicates that a legal program data element was parsed but could not be executed due to the current power supply state The following list is not exhaustive but does cover some of the more common conditions that may contribute to this error e OVP UVP Set Points The OVP and UVP limit the setting of the voltage set point so that you cannot accidentally trigger these alarms by changing the set point outside of their range Conversely setting the OVP set point to be less than the voltage set point will also trigger this error Changing the Set Point while in APG mode The user will be unable to change the set point while APG is being used to control that parameter voltage or current e Autosequence Programming Various conflicts can occur while using Autosequence programming for example using the trigger command while the program is running will result in this error Calibration mode When in calibration mode certain settings will cause an error M370430 01 Rev C Error Messages Table B 2 Executi
69. intended for the user who is familiar with electronic power supplies Constant Voltage Constant Current and or Constant Power operating modes and the control of output power The user should be familiar with practicing safe techniques while making supply or pin connections Conventions Used M370430 01 Rev C The following conventions are used in this guide WARNING Warnings identify conditions or practices that could result in personal injury or loss of life CAUTION Cautions identify conditions or practices that could result in damage to the unit or other equipment Important Important notes provide information that is important for you to know They are not as serious as Warnings or Cautions About This Manual Related Information Acronyms More information about AMETEK Programmable as well as its products and services is available at www programmablepower com Acronym APG AUX ENET FGA ISOL OCP OTP OVP PSU TVS UVP Font Conventions This Manual uses the following typographical conventions Definition Analog Programming Auxiliary Ethernet Finished Goods Assembly Isolated Analog Programming Over Current Protection Over Temperature Protection Over Voltage Protection Power Supply Unit Transient Voltage Suppressor Under Voltage Protection 7 Xeyuevt For display and readback information on the output voltage and current displays Command body text Represents SCPI commands M370430
70. is already at the CAP position LAPr is displayed on the output voltage display 2 Ifthe mode is currently nont then select any other ISOL mode If this step 1s done be sure to restore the ISOL setting to nanE when the operation is complete Otherwise do not rotate the rotary Adjust Enter control to keep the current ISOL mode 3 Press the rotary adjust Enter control to select the ISOL mode The output voltage display should read LE L and the output current display will display ISOL level 4 Pressthe rotary adjust Enter control to return to normal mode If the ISOL mode was modified in step 2 execute the procedure to deactivate the ISOL voltage mode The SCPI command for these instructions are 1SYSTem lt channel gt REMote SOURce CURRent lt LOCal AVOLtage IAVoltage ARESistive IAResistive gt SYSTem channel COMMunicate APRogram LEVel CURRent ISOlated MEASure channel SCALar APRogram CURRent TSOlated DC M370430 01 Rev C Analog Programming APG and Isolated Analog Programming ISOL Analog Programming With External Resistor The pin numbers are described in Table 4 4 on page 4 21 ISOL Connector Figure 4 13 Programming Output Voltage using an Isolated External Resistor ISOL Connector Figure 4 14 Programming Output Current using an Isolated External Resistor M370430 01 Rev C 4 27 Analog Programming APG and Isolated Analog Programming ISOL Resistive
71. lt SRD gt SYSTem COMMunicate LAN GWADdress This command will set the LAN Gateway address The query format returns the Gateway address set To query the actual gateway address used by the LAN interface in case the IP address is not static but assigned by a DHCP server the NCON parameter Network Connection Setting must be added to the query The default value is 0 0 0 0 Command Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate LAN GWADddress lt NRF gt Parameters ddd ddd ddd ddd lt Gateway address gt Example SYST COMM LAN GWAD 255 255 255 0 Query Syntax SYST COMM LAN GWAD SYST COMM LAN GWAD NCON Returned Parameters lt CRD gt 6 62 M370430 01 RevC Communications Options SYSTem COMMunicate LAN HOST This command will set the Host name The name is limited to 16 characters Command Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate LAN HOST lt SRD gt Parameters lt SRD gt Example SYST COMM LAN HOST ACS Query Syntax SYST COMM LAN HOST Returned Parameters lt SRD gt SYSTem COMMunicate LAN PASSword This command will set the user password The password is used to access to LAN configuration screen from the Web page The default password is admin The description is limited to 8 characters Command Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate LAN PASSword lt SRD gt Parameters lt SRD gt Example SYST COMM LAN PASS admin Query Syntax SYST COMM LAN PASS Returned Parameters lt SRD gt SYSTem COMMunicate LAN PORT This command will set the so
72. mode described 3 5 standard operation described 3 12 T TIA EIA 232 F A 2 tracking mode described 3 5 U user setting memory locations 1 2 described 3 7 3 16 number available 3 36 stored values 3 36 M370430 01 Rev B
73. mode of operation SuOI e91J10a8dsS v O o A8Y L0 0 T0Z IN Electrical Specifications for XG XTR Family 1500 W Table C 2 XG XTHR 1500 Watt Electrical Specifications for 6 V to 600 V Models Models Output Ratings Output Voltage Output Current Output Power Line Regulation Voltage 0 005 of rated output voltage 2 mV Current 0 01 of rated output current 2 mA Load Regulation Voltage 0 005 of rated output voltage 2 mV Current 0 02 of rated output current 5 mA Output Ripple rms 300 kHz Voltage Current Output Noise p p 20 MHz Voltage Maximum Recommended Remote Sense Line Drop Compensation per Line Up prog Response Time 0 Vmax Down prog Response Time Full Load Down prog Response Time No Load Over Voltage Trip Point 6 220 8 187 5 12 5 120 20 76 30 50 40 38 60 25 80 19 100 15 150 10 300 5 600 2 6 20 V 30V 40 V 60 V 80 V 100 V 150 V 300 V 600 V 76 A 50A 38 A 25A 19A ISA 10 A 5A 2 6 A 1520W 1500W 1520W 1500 W 1520 W 1500 W 1500 W 1500 W 1560 W 6V 8 V 220 A 187 5 A 1320W 1500 W 2 3 mV 2 4 mV 2 62 mV 3 0mV 13 5 mV 4 mV 5 mV 6 mV 7 mV 9 5 mV 17 mV 32 mV 24mA 20 7mA 14mA 9 6mA 7mA 5 8mA 4 5mA 3 9mA 3 5mA 3mA 2 5mA 2 26A 2 3 mV 2 4 mV 2 62 mV 13 0 mV 13 5 mV 4 mV 5 mV 6 mV 7 mV 9 5 mV 17 mV 32 mV 49 mA 42 5 mA 29 mA 20 2 mA 15 mA 12 6mA 10mA 8 8 mA 8 mA 7 mA 5 5 mA 8 mV 8 mV 8 mV 8 mV 8 mV 8 mV 8 mV 8 mV 8 mV 10 mV 25 mV 50 mV 400mA 319mA
74. of the slave units should be programmed to maximum value During parallel operation the slave units operate as a controlled current source following the controller unit s output current All slave units must be configured with the SCPI command to enable current sharing or use the following instructions to program front panel current share setup 1 With the 9 position mode control at the PGM position press the rotary Adjust Enter control r is displayed on the output voltage display ecl 1 14 2 Turn the Adjust Enter conrol to select CUrrShAr and press the Adjust Enter control L5hr is displayed on the output voltage display 3 Turn the rotary Adjust Enter control to select 5 in the output current display 4 Press the rotary Adjust Enter control to commit the setting The SCPI command s for these instructions are SOURce channel COMBine CSHare MODE Important The slave unit discussed here is not the same as the remote interface slave described in chapter 5 Setting Over Voltage Protection OVP The master unit s OVP should be programmed to the desired OVP level The OVP of the slave units should be programmed to a higher value than the master OVP When the controller unit shuts down it will program the outputs of the slave units to zero volts If a slave unit shuts down only that unit would shut down and the remaining slave units would supply all the load current if possible M370430 01 Rev C 3
75. output voltage will vary with changing load resistance and the load current will remain at the IgpT value M370430 01 Rev C Local Operation The reverse operating mode change can also occur if the load resistance is increased to the point that the required load current drops below the Isgr value At that point the power supply would crossover to CV mode and the load current would be free to vary as the load resistance changed CV mode CV mode LI msi Crossover point Load current V Load current A Iset Load current _ Load voltage 0 Load resistance Q CO Figure 3 3 Operating Modes To set the voltage set point VSET 1 Turn the 9 position mode control to the VOLTS position or press the rotary Adjust Enter control if the 9 position mode control is already at the VOLTS position The voltage set point is blinking in the output voltage display The output current will be displayed in the output current display 2 Setthe desired voltage value using the rotary Adjust Enter control Important If you can t get the set point to the desired level you may need to change the set points for OVP 3 Press the rotary Adjust Enter control to transition to Fine Adjust mode The set point will blink faster to indicate fine adjust tracking mode 4 Set the desired voltage value using the rotary Adjust Enter control M370430 01 Rev C 3 15 Local O
76. position mode control is turned to VOLTS or AMPS positions for the parameter s that are configured to be controlled by analog programming If an adjustment of a parameter controlled by APG 1s attempted using a SCPI command a 221 Settings Conflict error will be pushed onto the error queue Using analog programming requires that you make connections to the Isolated Analog Programming Connector or Analog Programming Connector on the rear panel of the power supply Depending on your model see Rear Panel Connectors on 850 Watt Models on page 1 7 or Rear Panel Connectors on 1500 and 1700 Watt Models on page 1 9 M370430 01 Rev C Analog Programming APG and Isolated Analog Programming ISOL Remote Programming Options Analog Monitor Signals There are four monitor lines for analog programming the pin name and the related APG mode which are listed in Table 4 1 All of these lines are provided to give analog feedback The output from these monitor lines is a value scaled to the Analog Programming level set for the corresponding analog programming type For example the voltage monitor and isolated voltage monitor lines are both scaled to the analog programming level that is set in the VAP mode Table 4 1 Monitor Lines Related APG Mode Reference Line Connector Name Non Isolated Voltage Analog Programming VOL MON J1 13 Isolated Voltage Analog Programming IS MON VOL J3 5 Non Isolated Current Analog Programming CUR MO
77. power supply without shutting off the power supply or for using the power supply as part of a larger test system in which digital or analog control is required Activating the External Shutdown Function To activate the external shutdown function use the AUX output supply provided on the Analog Programming Connector J3 This input has a user selectable polarity with logic low input from 0 0V to 1 2V and logic high from 2 0V to 15V The control signal for this input must be capable of sinking 10mA minimum This input is also compatible with the use of dry contacts where a short is logic low and an open is logic high The input lines of the shutdown circuit are fully optically isolated See page C 8for specifications Once the External Shutdown has been triggered the display will blink the 5d PUL Controlling the External Shutdown Function The external shutdown circuit accepts a voltage or dry contact control high or low logic level to enable or disable the power supply output Make connections for the signals at the AUX Output and Isolated Analog Programming Connector on the rear panel See AUX Output and Isolated Analog Programming ISOL Connector on page 4 20 for more information To activate the shutdown function Connect the control signal source to the Shutdown pin J3 12 on the Aux Output and Isolated Analog Programming Connector with the control circuit ground connected to Isolated Ground pin J3 6 The External S
78. restored to its pre alarm state either enabled or disabled The interlock function can only be enabled or disabled defined using a SCPI command cannot be masked or latched through the alarm protection mechanisms Common applications include an emergency shutoff switch or a door switch Connect the switch between pins J3 14 and J3 15 on the AUX Output and Isolated Analog Programming Connector Defining the Interlock Mode The Interlock mode is controlled via SCPI commands There is no front panel access for enabling or disabling the Interlock functionality See Interlock Enable Disable on page 5 70 The SCPI command for setting the Interlock mode to On or Off is SENSe lt channel gt PROTection INTerlock STATe Output Protection The output voltage and the output current can be programmed preset to automatically start at zero Volts and zero Amps upon power up and upon output enable Also each can be reprogrammed to disable the autotmatic reset to zero Note With the M10 Option the power supply voltage output is preset to 0 Volts Programming Voltage Output Preset To Enable Disable automatic reset to 0 Volts 1 Turn the rotary Adjust Enter control to PRT and press n nm 2 Turn again until Pr B GU P is displayed 3 Press to display GU P UBL 3 36 M370430 01 Rev C Local Operation 4 Turn to display VOL On or UOL GFF 5 Press to commit the selected setting Important This single front pane
79. source and the PC will have to be connected to the same network through a hub or to each other using a crossover network cable local network Setting LAN Parameters via Serial or USB Port Set the parameters using SCPI commands refer to Chapter 5 ofthe User s Manual for Remote Operation M370430 01 Rev C 6 49 Communications Options To use the CONFIGURATION menu press the MENU and use the up down error keys to display the CONFIGURATION entry Place the pointer on CONFIGURATION and press the ENTER key Then scroll down until you see LANetwork and press ENTER again The following fields are available in the LANetwork menu Setting LAN Parameters via Web Interface Follow the instructions in the section on CONNECTING TO A NETWORK in this chapter to reach the Web page interface Click on the Configuration tab This should bring up the following page Home Product Support Contact Us AMETEK DC Power Supplies PROGRAMMABLE POWER Sorensen Programmable Power Products By default the user name and password are both admin Entering admin in both fields will bring up the IP Address Configuration page see next 6 50 M370430 01 Rev C Communications Options Home Product Support Contact Us AMETEK DC Power Supplies PROGRAMMABLE POWER Sorensen Programmable Power Products LXI IP Address Configuration Obtain IP address automatically DHCP Enable Disable AutolP Enable Disable DHCP
80. switch to Off and then On again If the OTP is activated the main output will turn off and PrO OP over temperature protection will blink on the display The OTP alarm is an alarm that will auto recover when the temperature falls back into normal bounds Defining the OTP Mode To define the OTP lock 1 Turn the 9 position mode control to the PRT position PrO OUP is displayed 2 Turn the rotary Adjust Enter control until P O iP is displayed 3 Press the rotary Adjust Enter control to display UIP Bn or DFF 4 Turn the rotary Adjust Enter control to change to On or Off 5 Press the rotary Adjust Enter control The SCPI command s for these instructions are SYSTem channel s PROTection LATCh Resetting in Latch Mode To reset the power supply if the OTP alarm is tripped and the OTP mode is set to On latching enabled press and hold the rotary Adjust Enter control for approximately 3 seconds The SCPI command s for these instructions are OUTPut channel s PROTection CLEar SYSTem channel s PROTection LATCh 3 32 M370430 01 Rev C Local Operation Using the External Shutdown Function Use the external shutdown function to enable or disable the output of the power supply via a logic level signal When the external shutdown is triggered the power supply will display SD POL on the output voltage and current displays The external shutdown is useful for making adjustments to either the load or the
81. the voltmeter to the non isolated current monitoring output lines J1 12 J1 7 Set the Current APG level to 4 V Send the SCPI command SYST COMM APR LEV CURR 4 Set the input source as Local The SCPI command is SYST REM SOUR CURR LOC Set the main output voltage to 100 by sending the command SOUR VOLT lt ModelVolt gt or use the rotary adjust Enter control Turn the main output On by pressing the OUTPUT ENABLE Main button on the front panel or send the command OUTP ON The OUTPUT ENABLE Main button will illuminate Enter interactive calibration mode by sending SCPI command CAL MON CURR Press on the terminal keys or to reduce or increase the monitoring value Adjust the monitoring value displayed on the voltmeter that was set up in Step 1 to read as close as possible to 4 000 V Press any key other than the or keys to exit from interactive calibration mode Calibration and Troubleshooting Non isolated Voltage Programming of Voltage Calibration Important For maximum accuracy at a specific APG level follow the calibration procedure again but use the intended operating voltage level in steps 3 and 4 To calibrate the non isolated voltage programming of voltage l 2 Disconnect the load and connect the voltmeter to the output Connect the input voltage source to the non isolated connector voltage programming J1 9 J1 7 Set the Voltage APG level to 4 V Send the SCPI command SYST
82. this folder or dick Change to install to a different folder Install AMETEK LXI Discovery Browser to C Program Files x86 VAMETEK Programmable Power WV XI Discovery Browser InstallShield M370430 01 Rev C 6 37 Communications Options 9 Inthe Setup Type window choose Typical and click Next Choose the setup type that best suits your needs All program features will be installed Requires the most disk space Minimum required features will be installed Choose which program features you want installed and where they will be installed Recommended for advanced users InstallShield 6 38 M370430 01 Rev C Communications Options 10 Check that your Settings are correct and then click Install The wizard is ready to begin installation If you want to review or change any of your installation settings dick Back Click Cancel to Current Settings Destination Folder C Program Files x86 AMETEK Programmable Power LXI Discovery Browser User Information Name customer Company Ametek InstallShield M370430 01 Rev C 6 39 Communications Options 11 If the installation was successful a window similar to the following will appear 72 AMETEK LXI Dis The InstallShield Wizard has successfully installed AMETEK LXI Discovery Browser Click Finish to exit the wizard Launch the program Show the readme file lt Back Cancel 6 40 M370430 01 Rev C Comm
83. using any of the monitoring methods front panel display user monitor lines or SCPI measure commands of each unit master or slave will provide individual unit status not system status Important If current sharing is not being used the unit must be configured as a controller Failure to do so will result in unpredictable operation Setting up the Controller Unit Set the output voltage of the master unit to the desired voltage Program the current set point of the master unit to the desired load current set point divided by the number of parallel units During operation the master unit operates in Constant Voltage mode regulating the load voltage at the programmed output voltage Send the Current share SCPI command or use the following instructions to program front panel current share setup 1 With the 9 position mode control at the PGM position press the rotary Adjust Enter control rE is displayed on the output voltage display 2 Turn the rotary Adjust Enter control to select LUrrShAr and press the Adjust Enter control L5hr is displayed on the output voltage display 3 Turn the rotary Adjust Enter control to select Lan in the output current display 3 50 M370430 01 Rev C Local Operation 4 Press the rotary Adjust Enter control to commit the setting The SCPI command s for these instructions are SOURce channel COMBine CSHare MODE Setting up the Slave Units The output voltage and current
84. voltage level Turn on the output power Read the voltage value on voltmeter display Type the SCPI command with voltage value as parameter data For example type CAL OUTP 138 3 if you had an XG or XTR 150 5 6 calibrating with the voltage set point set to 135 V and the voltmeter was reading 138 3 volts To perform offset calibration l 7 6 After performing gain calibration set the programmed voltage 10 from nominal Read the voltage value on the voltmeter display Type the SCPI command with voltage value as parameter data For example you would type CAL OUT P12 3 if you had an XG or XTR 150 5 6 calibration with the voltage set point set to 10V and the voltmeter was reading 12 3 volts M370430 01 Rev C Calibration and Troubleshooting After performing offset calibration it is recommended that you repeat gain calibration Important For best results both calibrations may be repeated several times The SCPI Command s for these instructions are CALibration lt channel gt OUTPut VOLTage lt voltmeter reading in volts gt Calibrating the Output Current Gain Calibration To perform gain calibration l 2 e pes A deu S M370430 01 Rev C Disconnect the power supply from the load Connect the output terminals to a load representing a short circuit using a precision ammeter Turn both the power supply and the load On Set the voltage set point to maximum Set the s
85. voltage of the power supply If possible one end of the shield of the sense lines should be attached to the chassis ground of the power supply Pin J1 6 on APG connector Pin J1 1 on APG connector Output terminals on power supply hassis ground stud Figure 2 5 Remote Sense Connection To connect the remote sense wires 1 Ensure that the front panel power switch is in the Off position 2 Using a small flat blade screwdriver remove the two sense jumpers from pins J1 1 and J1 2 and from pins J1 5 and J1 6 on the APG Connector See Figure 4 1 APG Connector Terminals on page 4 5 M370430 01 Rev C 2 15 Installation 2 16 3 Connect one end of the shield of the twisted pair wire to the chassis ground point on the power supply 4 Connect the positive sense line SNS from the positive regulation point as close as possible to the load terminals to pin J1 1 5 Connect the negative sense line SNS from the return of the load to pin J1 6 To compensate for losses in power leads connected to the output the power supply provides sense connections beside the output terminals With remote sense leads in place the power supply regulates to the displayed voltage at the point where the sense lines are connected to the output leads With the sense lines disconnected the power supply regulates the voltage at the output terminals CAUTION Equipment damage Do not operate the power supply with sense
86. volts from the voltmeter Offset calibration of the power supply provides the best accuracy in low range input voltage To perform offset calibration Set the voltage source attached to the non isolated Voltage APG input to 10 of the nominal voltage level in this case 0 400 V Turn on the output power Read the input voltage value from the voltmeter connected in step 1 of the gain calibration Type SCPI input Voltage calibration command with voltage noted in step 3 as the parameter data M370430 01 Rev C Calibration and Troubleshooting For example you would type CAL INP ANAL CURR 0 4 3 1f you read 0 43 volts from the voltmeter After performing offset calibration it is highly recommended that you repeat gain calibration SCPI Command CALibration lt channel gt INPut ANALog VOLTage lt voltmeter reading in volts gt Calibrating the Input Current APG Signal The input voltage APG calibration is necessary to ensure accurate measurements when using the MEAS APR and MEAS APR ISOL SCPI command queries to monitor the APG input signal Gain Calibration To calibrate the CAP APG input gain calibration s 2 10 M370430 01 Rev C Connect a short across the power supply output Connect a voltmeter and a DC voltage source to the non isolated current APG input lines J1 10 and J1 7 Turn the power supply On Set the Current APG level to 4 V Send the SCPI command
87. you do not select a COM port which is already in use This selection is particularly useful for programs such as HyperTerminal which only work with COMI through to COMA M370430 01 Rev C 9 13 Remote Operation Complete the Setup To complete the setup 9 Configure the XG XTR to use the USB remote interface and set up the terminal that will be used on the connected PC See Selecting the Appropriate Communication Port on page 5 24 and Terminal Configuration on page 5 21 for more details 5 14 M370430 01 Rev C Remote Operation GPIB Connector Optional The power supply can be programmed from a remote terminal using a General Purpose Interface Bus GPIB interface The GPIB interface is an 8 bit parallel data bus having a host of bus commands for synchronization and up to one megabyte data transfer rate Use standard IEEE 486 26 AWG GPIB cable up to 3 m length GPIB Pin Description The GPIB port is a 21 pin special GPIB female connector Table 5 8 identifies the pin names and describes the pin functions Table 5 8 GPIB Pin Description J2 Pin CO ON Qi B Go bo Re NIN TN TN TN m m Reto AIIN I O WOl oO N NA Mn OUN ejo Name Function Note Data Data Data Data Control Data Valid Handshake NRFD Not Ready for Data Handshake NDAC No Data Accepted Handshake Control Control Control Shield Chassis Data Data Data Data Control DAVReturn
88. 01 Rev C Specifications 482 6mm 19 00in 459 6mm 17 941n F NS oP oP BN omm AXD 20in CO J QODDODO 200BB0D 473 8mm 1 Ps In pu a 114 6mm cer m eomm 98in LA EM 0000000200000000 o N0000 BE D wy AD wW Figure C 3 XG XTR in Full Rack Mechanical Dimensions 6 V to 40 V Models M370430 01 Rev C C 13 Specifications c8 mm else na F AA 2E E 4 2 mm JE ics 473 8mm 18 651n 484 4 mm 19 07 ad B 1 U y DODDODL 69 7mm E ol 184 mm 2 Fin 114 6mm VET Um
89. 2 Remote Programming Options Control of Programming Scale info Output voltage 2 10 V Voltage source adjustable See page 4 10 Current set point 2 10 V Voltage source adjustable See page 4 12 Output voltage 2 10 kQ Resistive source adjustable See page 4 15 Current set point 2 10 kQ Resistive source adjustable See page 4 17 l The resolution can be adjusted in increments of 0 1 volts M370430 01 Rev C Analog Programming APG and Isolated Analog Programming ISOL Analog Programming APG Connector J1 The APG connector is an 18 pin connector See Figure 4 1 SNS COM VOL_PR CUR_PR The APG connector provides access to the following functions e Sense control e Analog programming and monitoring Jumper Jumper yd UU QOO OUO UU 0 Q O 0 O 9 O O OOOO 9 9 9 9 Figure 4 1 APG Connector Terminals Table 4 3 APG Pins and Functions J1 Pin J1 1 J1 2 J1 3 J1 4 J1 5 41 7 J1 8 Reference Function SNS Positive Sense 7 Jumper Factory default condition LS Positive Local Sense NC NC LS Negative Local Sense Jumper Factory default condition J1 6 SNS Negative Sense COM Analog Common Same as power supply negative sense SNS COM Analog Common Same as power supply negative sense SNS M370430 01 Rev C REF CSH EXT CC CV CUR MON VOL MON CUR RES PR VOL RES PR 4 5 Analog Programming APG and Isolated Analog
90. 206mA 136mA 120mA 81mA 63mA 45mA 35mA 29mA 18mA 11mA T d t ni i ulli ms udi ms udi ms di ms udi ms ms ui ms ual ms 250 ms ui ni NN ni Tl 0 5 7 5 V 0 5 10 V 115V 124V 2 36V 2 44V 5 66 V 5 88 V 5 110 V 5 165 V 5 330 V 5 660 V Z ding suoneoyioedg o 8H L0 0 T0Z IN g O Table C 2 XG XTR 1500 Watt Electrical Specifications for 6 V to 600 V Models Models 6 220 8 187 5 12 5 120 20 76 30 50 40 38 60 25 80 19 100 15 150 10 300 5 600 2 6 Efficiency 75 77 77 80 79 57 82 8599 183 86 83 87 6 83 879 83 87 83 87 83 87 83 87 83 87 82 5 1 Maximum output voltage is guaranteed to be lt 0 1 of the rated voltage at zero output setting using the front panel or digital remote programming modes 2 Maximum output current is guaranteed to be lt 0 2 of the rated current at zero output setting using the front panel or digital remote programming modes and when measured with rated load resistance 3 Total output power doesn t include AUX1 Output Voltage 5 V and AUX1 Output Current 0 5 A and AUX2 Output Voltage 15 V and AUX2 Output Current 0 5 A 4 From 90 132 Vac or 170 265 Vac constant load 5 From 90 132 Vac or 170 265 Vac constant load 6 From no load to full load constant input voltage 7 For load voltage change equal to the unit voltage rating constant input voltage 8 For 6 V models the current ripple is measured at 2 6 V output voltage and full output current For all other mo
91. 313J34Y PUPLWULWOD dOS 8c V o eH L0 0 Tv0Z IN Table A 10 Status Commands Continued Set Operation STATus lt channel gt OPERation Status Positive ition Transition Register Query STATus channel OPERation Operation wh CONDition Status Shutdown Condition Register Set Operation STATus channel OPERation Status wn ENAB1e Shutdown Enable Register Query STATus channel OPERation Operation wn EVENt Status Shutdown Event Register Set Operation STATus channel OPERation Status SHUTdown NTRansition Shutdown Negative Transition Register PTRans Roy sl Beka SOHU TAO SHUTdo Access the Operation Positive Trans Filter Register See Table 5 11 on page 5 40 See Table 5 12 on page 5 41 Access the Operation Shutdown Enable Register See Table 5 12 on page 5 41 See Table 5 12 on page 5 41 See Table 5 12 on page 5 41 lt Transition Flags 0 65535 gt Query the Operation Shutdown Condition Register Enable Flags 0 65535 Query the Operation Shutdown Event Register lt Transition Flags 0 65535 99U9J9JOH PUBPWILWWOD dOS o 8H L0 0 T0Z IN 6cV Table A 10 Status Commands Continued Set Operation STATus channel OPERation Status SHUT Gown PT Ransition Shutdown Positive Transition Register Query STATus channel OPERation Operation SHUTdown PROTecti
92. 45 cross cable see Figure 6 2 Figure 6 1 Computer or HUB Plug mmy ih k n _ h Figure 6 2 Power Supply Plug Figure 6 3 RJ 45 Plug Table 2 1 Description of Pins on RJ 45 Plug Pin Name Description l TX Transmit data 2 TX Transmit data 3 Receive data 4 Gnd Ground 5 Gnd Ground 6 Receive data 7 Gnd Ground 8 Gnd Ground 6 3 Communications Options coo J O 01 P O ND O J O 01 P O ND Figure 6 4 Scheme of ENET Cross Cable ENET Connector The XPort ENET connector is located on the rear panel of the power supply See Figure 6 5 At the top left corner is the link LED and at the top right corner of the connector is the activity LED See Table 6 2 for a description of their colors and what each indicates Figure 6 5 XPort ENET Connector and LEDs XPort LEDs The device contains two bi color LEDs built into the front of the XPort connector See Figure 6 5 Table 6 2 Description of LEDs LED Color Description Link LED Left side Off No link 100 Mbps Activity LED Right side No activity Half duplex Full duplex 6 4 M370430 01 RevC Communications Options Network Topology and Connection The following section describes the network topology for the single computer and single XG XTR power supply unit The other possible network topologies will be discussed later in the Advanced Section on page 6 24 The additional topologies build on the co
93. 5 CONFIGURING THE NETWORK CONNECTION OF THE COMPUTER 6 6 LAN PROPERTIES DIALOG BOX cci e eere e deer e na ee eaae ee e aen o aUe nega o dove naue erar aun en 6 7 INTERNET PROTOCOL TCP IP PROPERTIES DIALOG BOX 6 8 DEVICEINSTAELER SETUP WIZARD 44 eet essa eee sees eoa eae rae v vo e eva eov eei ee eee hae 6 9 SELECT INSTALLATION FOLDER WINDOW scccccsssscccssssccccsscccccsssccccesecs 6 10 MULTIPLE NETWORK ADAPTERS eee reet ease se eX esee eae sonare e Saee eee kal n ua EN EUER Y 6 11 SELECTING NETWORK ADAPTER cccccocccoooccc0000000000000000000000000000000000000000 6 12 AUTO IP ADDRESS MESSAGE i e oee ete eee eee e e RRVo Eee a aUe e ee Pa eee oa P eU Pd Pa ERR ve e Rena 6 12 SEARCHING FOR POWER SUPPLY IP ADDRESS ee eee ee eee ee eroe ee en ooe 6 13 IP ADDRESS DETAILS WINDOW scccccssssccccsssccccssssccccsssccccssscccccsscccccssscces 6 14 ENTERING THE LANTRONIX INTERFACE eee eee eee eee eee eee o eee eo e eeeooe 6 14 LANTRONIX XPORT INTERFACE cccccccccccooccc00o0c000000000000000000000000000000000 6 15 ASSIGNING IP SETTINGS 22 5 58a eve e teo um e c ed e NEUES 6 15 HYPERTERMINAL CONNECTION 3 7 1255 64462054 E EET Fa 06460544 664004 OF EO Eo RE Ces gin ds ele 6 17 CONNECTION DESCRIPTION WINDOW ccccccccccccccsccsccccccccccccccccccccccccessees 6 18 NEW CONNECTION DIALOG BOX ccsssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssseess 6 20 MAIN TERMINAL W
94. 75 mA 60 mA 45 mA 35 mA 25 mA 20 mA 16 mA 10 mA i E udi i ul i uidi i mE i ul 50 ms 50 ms nam sui _ endi _ a ni ut i Tl 5 660 V 0 5 7 5 V 0 5 10 V 115V 124V 2 39V 2 44V 3 66 V 3 95 V 3 125 V 3 180 V 5 330 V suoneoyioedg o 8H L0 0 T0Z IN O Table C 1 XG XTR 850 Watt Electrical Specifications for 6 V to 600 V Models Models 6 110 8 100 12 70 20 42 33 25 40 21 60 14 80 10 5 100 8 5 150 5 6 300 2 8 600 1 4 Efficiency 75 77 77 80 79 57 82 8596 183 86 83 87 83 879 83 87 83 87 83 87 83 87 83 87 82 5 1 Maximum output voltage is guaranteed to be lt 0 2 of the rated voltage at zero output setting using the front panel or digital remote programming modes 2 Maximum output current is guaranteed to be lt 0 4 of the rated current at zero output setting using the front panel or digital remote programming modes and when measured with rated load resistance 3 Total output power is also based on AUX1 Output Voltage 5 V and AUX1 Output Current 0 5 A and AUX2 Output Voltage 15 V and AUX2 Output Current 0 5 A 4 From 85 132 Vac or 170 265 Vac constant load 5 From 85 132 Vac or 170 265 Vac constant load 6 From no load to full load constant input voltage 7 For load voltage change equal to the unit voltage rating constant input voltage 8 For 6 V models the current ripple is measured at 2 6 V output voltage and full output current For all other models the current ri
95. 850 MEDIUM AND HIGHT VOLTAGE MODELS DIMENSIONS TOP ANDREAR S gib n vn die Rd it tanta C 19 FIGURE C 11 XG850 WITH FRONT PANEL OUTPUT VOLTAGE OPTION TOP SIDE AND REAR 0 25 men RT EH TIEN C 20 FIGURE D 1 SINGLE LEFT AND DUAL RIGHT HALF RACK MOUNT KIT OPTIONS D 2 FIGURE D 2 FULL RACK MOUNT KIT OPTION e eee eee eee eee e eee eee ones ees tees e sete ee eos D 3 FIGURE D 3 RM XG2 RM XTR2 RACK RAILS ecce eee eee eee eee eee ee eee e o etes eret eene teen D 5 FIGURE D 4 FINDING RACK DEPTH ccccccccocccccoocccooooco00e0e0000e00000e00000000000000000000000000000 D 6 FIGURE D 5 SELECTING A RAIL TYPE wsscisiessteiiseresavessteleieicssssiessteliadisseiavesstehiiesesednieess D 7 FIGURE D 6 MODIFYING REAR BRACKET ssecccssccccsecccssecccseccccssecccseeeccsseeccsececsseecssseosse D 8 FIGURE D 7 REMOVING CHASSIS MEMBER FROM SLIDES esseesseccsecccseccsecccceccseeccseecoceee D 8 FIGURE D 8 ATTACHING FRONT AND REAR BRACKET TO CABINET SECTION D 9 M370430 01 Rev C xvii Contents FIGURE D 9 FIGURE D 10 Tables TABLE 1 1 TABLE 1 2 TABLE 1 3 TABLE 2 1 TABLE 2 2 TABLE 2 3 TABLE 3 1 TABLE 3 2 TABLE 3 3 TABLE 3 4 TABLE 3 5 TABLE 3 6 TABLE 3 7 TABLE 3 8 TABLE 3 9 TABLE 4 1 TABLE 4 2 TABLE 4 3 TABLE 4 4 TABLE 5 1 TABLE 5 2 TABLE 5 3 TABLE 5 4 TABLE 5 5 TABLE 5 6 TABLE 5 7 TABLE 5 8 TABLE 5 9 TABLE 5 10 TABLE 5 11 TABLE 5 12 TABLE 5 13 XVIII MOUNTING CABINET SECTION INTO
96. A POLarity POWer STATe PowerON STATe AUXilliary STATE PowerON STATe PROGram READback STATe RECord ISTART 5 T QE DBLete ALL REPEAT rS LER DWELI SOURce COMBine LCDHare MODE VOLTage hE VEL IMMediate AMPLitude PROTection OVERvoltage LEVel UNDer LEVel CURRent A 10 M370430 01 Rev B bE VEL IMMediate AMPLitude SENSe PROTection INTerlock STATe IBMPeragture LATCH STATus PRESet QUEStionable Im VIENI I ENABle CONDition PTRansition NTRansition VOLTage EVENt 2 gt ENABle CONDITION PTRansition NTRansition TEMPerature EVENt gt ENABle CONDITION PTRansition NTRansition OPERation EVENt ENABle CONDITION PTRansition M370430 01 Rev C SCPI Command Reference SCPI Command Reference NTRansition tC OHe re EVENt gt ENABle CONDICION PTRansition NTRansition SHUTdown LEVIN G2 ENABle CONDition PTRansition NTRansition PROTection EVENt ENABle CONDIEXONEZ PTRansition NTRansition STANdard EVENt gt ENABle CLEA SBYTe EVENt SSREQUEC ST ENABLle SYSTem FPANel TIMeout PROTection LATCh MASK RESet WAIT M370430 01 Rev B DUET RESet IDENtify REMote STATe C SOUREEe VOLTage CURRent COMMunicate SAPROgEIGm LEVel VOLTa
97. A CN 49 A era Se e ePept AT A 27 PROTECTION COMMANDS ecccceccccccccccccccsssosssossssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssseuss A 35 AUTO SEQUENCE COMMAND ccssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssess A 35 COMMAND ERROR LIS Pisssshsctescndessdssubectessadsbadosaboctessedensdosubscbesescsoadesesectecese B 3 EXECUTION ERROR LIS ereat B 4 DEVICE SPECIFIC ERROR LIST onn aieo d o Ere B 5 QUERY ERROR LIST iiio iadii icc ten diets tera dE Need D Ec OcvE A T daa nA B 6 XG XTR 850 WATT ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR 6 V TO 600 V MODELS m C 2 XG XTR 1500 WATT ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR 6 V TO 600 V MODELS eH NUI 220 OA HIN A 2 02 E aoe C 4 XG 1700 WATT ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR 6 V TO 600 V MODET Seress s ETEEN 02 222 00 EEE EEE 2 E02 LEPE C 6 REMOTE OPERATION i i inre Uva vele Neo CUL VES NOH VL VETE VERD QU Ne RR NEGRA EUM C 8 M370430 01 Rev C xix Contents XX M370430 01 Rev C Introduction Chapter 1 Introduction describes the features of the XG XTR Family Programmable DC Power Supply Introduction Features and Options The XG XTR Family Programmable DC Power Supply provides stable variable output voltage and current for a broad range of development and system requirements The power supplies have a high power density and numerous industry standard interfaces 1 2 RS 232 RS 485 analog programming APG and USB built in ports Optional GPIB or Ethernet ENET isolated ana
98. A N A factory defaults CALibration lt channel gt DEFault Restores the default N A No calibration for all variables Unit gain and zero offset protection ROTection OVER Volts gt Enter Output Voltage Data age Enter Output Current Data ent Calibrate the t CAhlIbrdtron schannel MONaZtor Calibrate the voltage monitor NRI nothing Yes Voltage VOLTage signal system for interactive mode controlled Non Isolated Voltage APG feature Calibrate the 1 controlled Isolated Voltage APG feature CALibration lt channel gt VOLTage P Calibrate the over voltage lt OVP Voltage Set in CALibration lt channel gt OUTPut VOLT Sets the voltage output lt Voltage set in No calibration level volts gt CALibration lt channel gt OUTPut CURR Sets the current output lt Current set in No calibration level amps gt CALibration channel MONitor Calibrate the isolated voltage NRI nothing Yes Voltage VOLTage ISOLated monitor signal system for interactive mode 929U9J9JOH PUBPWILWWOD dOS o 8H L0 0 T0Z IN 6L V Table A 4 SCPI Commands for Calibration Continued Calibrate the s OCALJ3bration schanmel lsMONEiCtof f Voltage Rent controlled Non Isolated Current APG feature Calibrate the CALibration lt channel gt MONitor Voltage Rent I1SOLated controlled Isolated Current APG feature CUR Calibrate the CALibr
99. ATus channel QUEStionable EVENt Query Questionable Status Register Condition SCPI command STATus channel QUEStionable CONDition Enable Questionable Status Register SCPI command STATus channel QUEStionable ENABle status enable Query Format STATus channel QUEStionable ENABle Set Questionable Status Positive Transition Filter SCPI command STATus channel QUEStionable PTRansition status enable Query Format STATus channel QUEStionable PTRansition Set Questionable Status Negative Transition Filter SCPI command STATus channel QUEStionable NTRansition status enable Query Format STATus channel QUEStionable NTRansition M370430 01 Rev C 5 51 Remote Operation Voltage Status Register Commands Query Voltage Status Register Event SCPI command STATus lt channel gt QUEStionable VOLTage EVENt Query Voltage Status Register Condition SCPI command STATus lt channel gt QUEStionable VOLTage Enable Voltage Status Register SCPI command STATus channel QUEStionable VOLTage status enable Query Format STATus channel QUEStionable VOLTage Set Voltage Status Positive Transition Filter SCPI command STATus channel QUEStionable VOLTage status enable Query Format STATus channel QUEStionable VOLTage Set Voltage Status Negative Transition Filter SCPI comma
100. C Input Connector IEC Type Chassis Ground Stud Analog Programming APG Connector For pin information see page 4 5 AUX Output and Isolated Analog Programming ISOL Connector For pin information see page 4 20 USB Connector RS 485 Connector Multichannel Port Ethernet LAN option Connector Fan Exhaust Vents M370430 01 Rev C Introduction Rear Panel Connectors on 1500 and 1700 Watt Models NS fe ae yer FE i j T d M E A RS D FIN FS eo TO HHH eee ee TN F UUUUUUUUUUUUUUU UUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUULH LUUDJUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUUU HT Gc O O O QO O O O O O O OM O O O F gt Y A N27 S OTH ey adir es o AN BJ DARDARAARDADARNDADAD op U Nw Ul mmmmnnn OOOOO0O0000 Y f n NLN M OQOnnnanonmnQossonnnonmnnanl HIT THEE J gt _ gt P JUUUUDUUUDUDUUUU OWN IL D E P ER LLL TEL yo UUUUUU EBBOEBOBOBaHPEBOER I eese L gt Y prva SO A PPA dm OOS Ue PB OP ee ig UKL JUUU a NSN Nb M M FX Dre e 3 90000 L gt 4 YEYOV COVEY OC VOC T VN
101. C cable Insert the stripped wires through the strain relief base until the outer cable jacket is flush with the edge of the base Tighten the body to the base while holding the cable in place The cable is now securely fastened inside the strain relief Route the AC wires to the input connector terminals as required For AC input terminal locations see lower inset in Figure 2 1 To connect the wiring loosen the terminal screw insert the stripped wire into the terminal and tighten the screw securely Route the wires inside the cover to prevent pinching Fasten the AC cover shown below in kit provided to the unit using the screw provided See Figure 2 1 100 240 Vac 47 63 Hz 12 23A 2 7 Installation Step 4 Selecting Load Wires This section provides recommendations for selecting minimum load wire sizes Load Wiring To select the wiring for connecting the load to the power supply consider the following factors Insulation rating of the wire Current carrying capacity of the wire e Maximum load wiring length for operation with remote sense lines e Electrical noise and impedance effects of the load lines Insulation Rating Use load wiring with a minimum insulation rating equivalent to the maximum output voltage of the power supply Current Carrying Capacity The load wiring must have a current carrying capacity greater than the output rating of the power supply to ensure that the load wiring will not be dam
102. COMM APR LEV 4 Set input source voltage to 4 000 V Set the input source as Voltage Non Isolated for Voltage Programming The SCPI command is SYST REM SOUR AVOL Turn the main output to On by pressing the OUTPUT ENABLE Main button on the front panel or send the command OUTP ON The OUTPUT ENABLE Main button will illuminate Enter the interactive calibration mode by sending the SCPI command CAL OUTP ANAL Press the terminal keys or to reduce or increase the main output voltage value Adjust the main output voltage to 100 measured on the external voltmeter on the output Press any key other than the or keys to exit from interactive calibration mode M370430 01 Rev C Calibration and Troubleshooting Non isolated Resistive Programming of Voltage Calibration Important For maximum accuracy at a specific APG level follow the calibration procedure again but use the intended operating resistance level in steps 2 and 3 To calibrate the non isolated resistive programming of voltage l 2 M370430 01 Rev C Disconnect the load and connect the voltmeter to the output Connect the 4 000kQ resistor to the non isolated connector resistive programming of voltage and voltage programming J1 9 J1 11 and J1 7 Set the resistive APG level to 4kQ The SCPI command is SYST COMM APR LEV 4 Set the input source as Resistive Non Isolated for Voltage Programming The SCPI command is SYST REM SOUR ARES Turn
103. COMMUNICATION CABLE WITH DB 9 PINOUT ccccccsssccssccesees 5 5 DBZ SPUN OU 25ioniceteratsensielre treo a De tecta ves oreevede tes Cevde b ee escaso 5 5 RS 232 COMMUNICATION CABLE WITH DB 25 PINOUT e ee 5 6 RS 485 COMMUNICATION CABLE WITH DB 9 ccc0000000000000000000000000 5 7 RS 485 COMMUNICATION CABLE FROM MASTER TO SLAVE UNIT 5 8 FOUND NEW HARDWARE WIZARD scccccssscccssscccsssccssscccesscccssscccsscccessscess 5 10 INSTALL HARDWARE DEVICE DRIVERS ee eee ee eee eee ee eee o eee eerte eeoos 5 10 COMPLETING THE NEW HARDWARE WIZARD ccccssssccsscccssccessccsssccescees 5 11 DEVICE MANAGER 31 3 Ideo eee e Roto uc 5 12 COMMUNICATIONS PORT COM1 PROPERTIES eee eee e e e eene 5 13 COMPLETING THE NEW HARDWARE WIZARD cccccssssccsscccsscccssccessccescoes 5 13 SCANNING FOR INSTRUMENTIS ee eee eee eene enn teo ette eese sss e eee eee sees esse eee eeee 5 17 INSTRUMENT PROPERTIES d teo eee caeso dee Re 5 18 MULTI POWER SUPPLY CONNECTION TO RS 485 BUS ee 5 19 USB SEPLEINGS uiisten oco io satus E ce Feed i Ses tccs oett eoe ccs eed EU 5 22 ASCIL SETUP 2 2 celestis tne ce aac Batt aces aie ethan ces e 5 23 SCPI STATUS REPORTING MODEL eee eee eee eene nnn teet etes esas aee e ee eeee 5 30 M370430 01 Rev C XV Contents FIGURE 5 19 FIGURE 5 18 FIGURE 5 19 FIGURE 5 20 FIGURE 5 21 FIGURE 5 22 FIGURE 5 23 FIGU
104. CTING LOADS 2 225 itor aee uelis 48052 e Ic Od ECT me dede 2 12 DG Output GonneclolS nasi doen n ted diera ou onu d EL Dg gd 2 12 Inductive Loads and Batteries ceisde A 2 13 Gonnecting omgie Loads 235i aee Ui de oie Meet cheats tad decet tela 2 14 Connecting Multiple Loads ssseeeesessseseeeeeernnnnnennnnnnn nnne 2 14 STEP 7 CONNECTING REMOTE SENSINQG eene se eren ne nennen menta kenn sana aan 2 15 M370430 01 Rev C vii Contents 3 viii LOCAL OPERBATIODUss intact dissasa uva cEAEuMFSa E mea uso aTCa in t cane anche CNCARO 3 1 INTRODUCTION m 3 2 CONFIGURING SETTINGS FROM THE FRONT PANEL ccee eene 3 2 Using the 9 Position Mode Control ccccccccceeccseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseaas 3 2 Using the Rotary Adjust Enter Control sese 3 2 Coarse and Fine Adjustment Modes ssseesessssseeeeeeeeenneennnnnnnnnnns 3 3 NAVIGATING THE MENU SYSTEM cccccccecceececeeesceeeeeeeeueeeueeeseseueeueeuueueeeueneeeeaees 3 5 Setting VOLTS and AMPS Modes 1 esee a a Taie 3 5 Normal Display Mode and Inactivity Timeout eseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeene 3 7 DISPLAY MESSAGES ON THE FRONT PANEL eeenen mener 3 9 STANDARD LOCALE OPERATION biis baci ox tene ert b b E Robb Pest vex Ed cas Moved Eun 3 12 Operating MOS sceasctesaedtiiudcens qme oe aoctor sucede ose
105. Controlled Voltage ISOL Setup Activating ISOL Programming Voltage Mode To activate ISOL programming voltage mode using an external resistor 1 Turn the 9 position mode control to the VAP position or press the rotary adjust Enter control if the control knob 1s already at the VAP position URPr is displayed on the output voltage display 2 Turn the rotary Adjust Enter control to select r 5 resistor source from isolated connector 3 Press the rotary adjust Enter control to commit the selected mode LE U is displayed on the output voltage display 4 Select the input source level using the rotary adjust Enter control 5 Once the desired level has been selected press the rotary Adjust Enter control to commit the change The display will return to the normal display Deactivating ISOL Voltage Mode To deactivate the ISOL voltage mode 1 Turn the 9 position mode control to the VAP position or press the rotary Adjust Enter control if the control knob is already at the VAP position 2 URFr is displayed on the output voltage display 3 Turn the rotary Adjust Enter control to select nanE 4 Press the rotary adjust Enter control to commit the change The display will return to the normal display 4 28 M370430 01 Rev C Analog Programming APG and Isolated Analog Programming ISOL Query for ISOL Voltage Input Level To query for ISOL voltage input level from non isolated input 1 Turn the 9 position mode con
106. Device Desi Wib Configueation Telnet Configustion e Local fras Corsi 172 16 21 1291 E Poi _ oisi AY aenn YS Qo eeoa Se 17216 27 51 Hone XPort Device Server Configuration Manager Version 1 3 0 0 Figure 6 18 Lantronix XPort Interface 8 At the top of the sidebar menu click Network See Figure 6 19 Lorber Dee cien di i Loc dera Convencion 172 D 71 128 Por as XPot 00 reve vi TOU munem T Obin IF addiuss aubomalicall ag Confiqurapos Memogs GOOT Enade Desahla DHCP 8 Enae C Dehe iat E Enosis Datis OCF Hoel Mane Fle the tolewing P canfigartian Paces 1721621 174 gt Subnet Mask 7 Detaut Gateway 000 Eemol Configug gon R auto Nepetate Speer P ij uae tibga Da 8 Fan C Hail Figure 6 19 Assigning IP Settings M370430 01 Rev C 6 15 Communications Options 9 Inthe IP Configuration section click the radio button next to Use the following IP configuration Important If you are working within a network system please contact the network administrator for the appropriate information to complete the IP Address Subnet Mask and Default Gateway fields 10 Click OK at the bottom of the page to complete the task 11 Repeat this procedure for every power supply Every device must have a unique fixed IP address Selecting ENET as the Communication Port Once the XG XTR unit with the ENET option has the option card configured y
107. E when the operation is complete Otherwise do not rotate the rotary Adjust Enter control to keep the current ISOL mode 3 Press the rotary Adjust Enter control to select the ISOL mode The output voltage display should read LE L and the output current display will display ISOL level 4 Press the rotary Adjust Enter control to return to normal mode 5 Ifthe ISOL mode was modified in step 2 execute the procedure to deactivate the ISOL voltage mode Quick Tip Remote The SCPI command for these instructions are operation uses these SCPI commands See SYSTem lt channel gt REMote SOURce CURRent LOCal page 5 1 AVOLtage IAVoltage ARESistive IAResistive gt SYSTem channel COMMunicate APRogram LEVel CURRent ISOlated MEASure lt channel gt SCALar APRogram CURRent TSOlated DC M370430 01 Rev C 4 31 Analog Programming APG and Isolated Analog Programming ISOL Voltage and Current Readback Isolated The pin numbers are described in Table 4 4 on page 4 21 ISOL Connector Figure 4 15 Isolated Voltage Monitoring ISOL Connector Figure 4 16 Isolated Current Monitoring Query Remote Control Source State Quick Tip Remote The SCPI command for these instructions are operation uses these SCPI commands See SYSTem channel REMote SOURce VOLTage page 5 1 SYSTem lt channel gt REMote SOURce CURRent 4 32 M370430 01 Rev C Remote Operation Chapter 5
108. EVENt STATus channel CSHare ENABIe STATus lt channel gt CSHare CONDition STATus channel CSHare PTRansition STATus lt channel gt CSHare NTRansition OPERation OPERation OPERation OPERation Access the Operation lt Transition Flags Shutdown Protection Positive 0 65535 gt Trans Filter Register See Table 5 12 on page 5 41 Query the Operations Event Register See Table 5 11 on page 5 40 Query the Operations Condition Register See Table 5 11 on page 5 40 lt Transition Flags 0 65535 gt Access the Operation Positive Trans Filter Register SeeTable 5 11 on page 5 40 lt Transition Flags 0 65535 gt Access the Operation Negative Trans Filter Register See Table 5 11 on page 5 40 39U313J34Y PUewuwo09 1d9S o 8H L0 0 T0Z IN LE V Table A 10 Status Commands Continued Preset Enable STATus lt channel gt PRESet Positive Transition and Negative Transition Status Registers Query STATus lt channel gt QUEStionable Questionable EVENt Status Register Set STATus lt channel gt QUEStionable Questionable ENABle status enable Status Enable Register Query STATus lt channel gt QUEStionable Questionable CONDition Status Condition Register Set STATus lt channel gt QUEStionable Questionable NTRansition Status Negative Transition Regist
109. Frob et to vacan up uo sieur utat cone tence 5 29 STATUS REGISTERS MODEL FROM IEEE 488 2 eese 5 31 STATUS BYTE 29722227 r E E27 2 0 r 5 32 Enor Event Queue BRE Uo tote itai abend E SUE co cUm IRSE RRR 5 32 Questionable Status Register Summary QSR euuuuuue 5 32 Message Available MAN 2 2222 0694 123 4a 066 0656 Sa d ath de octavi eere Fieri ede rue e Yo ctet eu dete teri tee 5 33 Standard Event Status Summary ESB ccccccccccseseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeessaaeaeses 5 33 Master Summary Status MSS aiia a esese bG a CB 5 33 Heguesp SEMIcCe AOS Ln ae MUI AI a 5 33 Operation Status Register Summary OSR cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeaeeneeeeees 5 34 Standard Event Status Register SESR cccccccccccscseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeessaaeeeees 5 35 STANDARD SCPI REGISTER STRUCTURE ccccccscssseeecescesseeeecescesseeeeesseceeeeees 5 38 OPERATION STATUS REGISTER tixebed aet Id SAM i PuR Republ Nds aux eda Rer bu atf 5 39 CURRENT SHARE SUB REGISTER z iccsi vni tee ba brevitate s HV FUIT Le dO td 5 42 Operation Status Register COMMANAS cccccccccceeeeaeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeesaaaaeeees 5 43 Current Sharing Sub Register Commands eese 5 44 Shutdown Sub Register Commands cccccsseeeeececeeeeecaeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeeeessaeeeeees 5 45 Protection Sub Register Commands cccccccceecceeeeeeseeeeeeeee
110. Host Name LAN Use the following IP configuration IP Address 192 168 1 101 Subnet Mask 255 2 5 255 Default Gateway 192 168 1 1 DNS Server 0 0 0 0 Description XG Power Supply Apply Settings From this page the various LAN parameters can be set The following table provides a list of the LAN parameters and their descriptions M370430 01 Rev C 6 51 Communications Options Table 6 1 LAN Setting Screens IP Address Use the SYST COMM LAN ADDRess command from a terminal to change the address To set a fixed ip address i e 192 168 1 100 enter SYST COMM LAN ADDR 192 168 1 100 Note that the IP address is placed in quotes To set the unit for DHCP mode enter SYST COMM LAN ADDR 0 0 0 0 Note that this setting will not be made until either the power is cycled or the SYST COMM LAN APPY command is entered MAC Address This is the Media Access Control address It is a 16 digit hexadecimal value This number is unique to each device and may not be changed by the user It is visible as a serial tag which is placed on the rear of the unit The MAC address may be displayed with the query command SYST COMM LAN MACA Note If the MAC Address displayed is corrupted or does not match the serial tag there may have been a problem retrieving the LAN port settings This can happen if a static IP was set that conflicts with another device on the network To recover turn on power to the unit while hol
111. IN NC VEN TA JUUUUUU HM E SE dio MM PAIN OR OVO SESS RN Dj n Kin FN U NA NU 7 dJuuludiuluduediutk UH ddldueil 13 5 IS X 34 gx OCOSSsoeVvsP seoOoooesdIlo Postive LIVE J o Hf 0000000 o 00000010 gt Negative LI nri Aam 6 V 40 V Figure 1 6 XG XTR 1500 and 1700 Watt Units 6 V to 40 V Models M370430 01 Rev C 1 9 Introduction O C C C C 2 e o h o
112. INDOW ecceeecccccccccccccccccccccccccssossssscsssossssssssssessssssssusuuues 6 20 ENE F PROPERTIES WINDOW 569 5 500 US IUU EIE PEDIS E Fere DIU p EUN HUS ERE OER 6 20 XTR ENET PROPERTIES DIALOG BOX eee eee eee e eee eee eee ee eee eoneee 6 21 ASCILSETUP DIALOG BOX iode t a R 6 22 MAIN HYPERTERMINAL WINDOW ccsccccccsssscccssssccccssssccccsssccccsssccccssssees 6 23 SAVING SESSION alaa a 6 23 SAVED SESSION adi cm ivre Duct dues Doa ec udUn 6 24 MULTIPLE POWER SUPPLIES AND TWO COMPUTERS ee eee ee eee eone 6 25 HYPERTERMINAL SESSION 4 tier Ce oU RES AIRE RC UCET IR Cha CURT EME YER EA ee Ru 6 26 M370430 01 Rev C Contents FIGURE 6 32 SYSTEM WITH TWO CONNECTED DEVICES cccssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssessees 6 27 FIGURE 6 33 ENET AND RS 485 BUS oi nir ERE ES REPE 6 28 FIGURE 6 34 HYPERTERMINAL WINDOW cscccccssssccccssssccccsssccccsssccccssscccccssscccsssscccessess 6 28 FIGURE 6 35 PC ON SAME SIDE OF ROUTER AS POWER SUPPLY eee eee ee eee ee eee ne 6 55 FIGURE 6 36 HOME PAGE 4 5 noir ree ebd eie voee eec be eie iai 6 56 FIGURE 6 37 AMETEK LXI DISCOVERY BROWSER eee eee esee ee eee eoo eese eoe eee esset eoo 6 56 FIGURE 6 38 POWER SUPPLY HIDDEN BEHIND A ROUTER e eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eeeeeeee 6 57 FIGURE 6 39 ROUTER HOME PAGE 5 pei ed0 tonion nnee 64 06 C0000030 6 ee bea ee eese REA 6 58 FIGURE 6 40 PORT FORWARDING eee eeeeeeee eese eese
113. Installing Chassis M370430 01 Rev C D 11 Rack Mount Options and Installation Instructions D 12 M370430 01 Rev C Index Numerics 7 segment font use of vi 9 position mode control knob illustrated 3 2 positions described 3 3 A AC input connector defined 2 5 illustrated 1 6 1 8 active power factor correction 1 2 alarm conditions 3 19 ALARM LED clearing 3 21 illuminated 3 21 latched 3 16 alarm output latching defined 3 23 alarm masked defined 3 22 analog programming defined 4 2 lines 4 3 approvals EMC C 6 safety C 6 automatic mode crossover described 3 13 C calibration exiting the mode 6 10 items 6 2 loading parameters 6 25 performing via SCPI commands 6 2 restoring factory calibration 6 26 saving parameters in a text file 6 25 storing parameters 6 25 command string punctuation not sent A 5 command string punctuation blank spaces A 4 colons A 4 commas A 4 semicolons A 4 M370430 01 Rev C constant current mode described 3 13 constant voltage mode described 3 13 current configuration memory settings 3 35 current share command 3 46 current sharing defined 3 42 D DC output connector illustrated 4 7 short circuit protection of 1 2 DC output connectors hole diameter 1 7 1 8 display behavior of 2 8 font 3 2 front panel 1 5 output current 1 2 output current illustrated 1 5 output voltage 1 2 output voltage illustrated 1 5 E ENET
114. K Programmable Power Inc All rights reserved Exclusion for Documentation UNLESS SPECIFICALLY AGREED TO IN WRITING AMETEK PROGRAMMABLE POWER INC AMETEK a MAKES NO WARRANTY AS TO THE ACCURACY SUFFICIENCY OR SUITABILITY OF ANY TECHNICAL OR OTHER INFORMATION PROVIDED IN ITS MANUALS OR OTHER DOCUMENTATION b ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY FOR LOSSES DAMAGES COSTS OR EXPENSES WHETHER SPECIAL DIRECT INDIRECT CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL WHICH MIGHT ARISE OUT OF THE USE OF SUCH INFORMATION THE USE OF ANY SUCH INFORMATION WILL BE ENTIRELY AT THE USER S RISK AND c REMINDS YOU THAT IF THIS MANUAL IS IN ANY LANGUAGE OTHER THAN ENGLISH ALTHOUGH STEPS HAVE BEEN TAKEN TO MAINTAIN THE ACCURACY OF THE TRANSLATION THE ACCURACY CANNOT BE GUARANTEED APPROVED AMETEK CONTENT IS CONTAINED WITH THE ENGLISH LANGUAGE VERSION WHICH IS POSTED AT WWW PROGRAMMABLEPOWER COM Date and Revision November 2013 Revision C Part Number M370430 01 Contact Information Telephone 800 733 5427 toll free in North America 858 450 0085 direct Fax 858 458 0267 Email sales programmablepower com service programmablepower com Web www programmablepower com M370430 01 Rev C i Product Family XG and XTR Family Programmable DC Power Supply Warranty Period Five Years WARRANTY TERMS AMETEK Programmable Power Inc AMETEK provides this written warranty covering the Product stated above and if the Buyer discovers an
115. L settang location Or SYSTem lt channel gt RECall setting location Three user setting memory locations are available and one user setting memory location is saved automatically before AC power shutdown This user setting memory location will be loaded after AC power is restored M370430 01 Rev C 3 41 Local Operation Local Lockout Local lockout 1s a feature that allows the front panel to be locked so that accidental button presses are ignored This feature is often used to lockout the front panel when you are controlling the power supply from a remote location When in local lockout mode the front panel will ala display LULL Loc whenever a button is pressed or a knob is turned Enabling Local Lockout To enable local lockout I Turn the 9 position mode control to the PGM position or press the rotary Adjust Enter control if the control knob is already at the PGM position The display will show rE in the output voltage display and the selected remote interface in the output current display Turn the rotary Adjust Enter control until the display shows LULLLoc Press the rotary Adjust Enter control Turn the rotary Adjust Enter control until the display shows 1m ri LULL UNM Press the rotary Adjust Enter control Local lockout has been enabled The SCPI command s for these instructions are 1SYSTem REMote STATE Disabling Local Lockout To disable local lockout l Turn the
116. L Query for ISOL Voltage Input Level Quick Tip Remote operation uses these SCPI commands See page 5 1 4 24 To query for ISOL voltage input level from non isolated input le Turn the 9 position mode control to the VAP position or press the rotary Adjust Enter control if the control knob 1s already at the VAP position UHPr is displayed on the output voltage display If the mode is currently nanE then select any other ISOL mode If this step 1s done be sure to restore the ISOL setting to nanE when the operation is complete Otherwise do not rotate the rotary Adjust Enter control to keep the current ISOL mode Press the rotary Adjust Enter control to select the ISOL mode The output voltage display should read LE U and the output current display will display ISOL level Press the rotary Adjust Enter control to return to normal mode If the ISOL mode was modified in step 2 execute the procedure to deactivate the ISOL voltage mode The SCPI command for these instructions are SYSTem lt channel gt REMote SOURce VOLTage lt LOCal AVOLtage ITAVoltage ARESistive IAResistive gt SYSTem channel COMMunicate APRogram LEVel VOLTage ISOlated MEASure channel SCALar APRogram VOLTage ISOI ated DC M370430 01 Rev C Analog Programming APG and Isolated Analog Programming ISOL Voltage Controlled Current ISOL Setup Activating ISOL Programming Current Mode 1 Turn the 9
117. LAN option is installed specified at the time of order The ENET LAN interface which operates with auto detection supports 10Base T 100Base T and 1000Base T Using LAN allows remote communication with the instrument it is fast simple and the LAN from your PC does not require any additional proprietary software or cards Media Access Control MAC Address Each power source with the LAN option installed has a unique network address known as the MAC address a unique hexadecimal address which is listed on a rear panel label of the power source To operate the power source on a network this MAC address needs to be assigned to a TCP IP address which will be used to address the device on the network Communication Configuration LAN Connection Presented here are three connection choices for remote control of the instrument e through a local area network LAN e direct to a PC through a private network Each requires an IP address the LAN also requires a Gateway address The addresses can be set automatically through a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP server or set manually with a static IP address Connect the instrument directly to a network Ethernet port with a LAN cable and allow the DHCP server to automatically assign a dynamic IP and Gateway address If DHCP is not enabled see the section on SETTING LAN PARAMETERS in this chapter or contact your network administrator M370430 01 Rev C Communications O
118. LE A 8 TABLE A 9 TABLE A 10 TABLE A 11 TABLE A 12 TABLE B 1 TABLE B 2 TABLE B 3 TABLE B 4 TABLE C 1 TABLE C 2 TABLE C 3 TABLE C 4 Contents OPERATION CSHARE STATUS REGISTER eee ee eee eee eee eee eee eeeooeeee 5 42 QUESTIONABLE STATUS REGISTER ccocccooooc000000000000000000000000000000000000000 5 49 QUESTIONABLE VOLTAGE STATUS REGISTER e eee eee ee ee eee eee eoce 5 50 QUESTIONABLE TEMPERATURE STATUS REGISTER eee eee eee ecce 5 50 PRESET VALUES OF USER CONFIGURABLE REGISTERS e eene 5 58 ALARMS BIT MAS K nicae piii t idi 5 73 TROUBLESHOOTING uisi vie ve uel vv V VU TENET NN 7 28 IEEE 488 2 COMMANDS 2456002004 5460403 0666009435060604 aae aR EE Po VENCER a A 14 READBACK COMMANDS ee eere erret tette se eese esee nnn ooos A 16 SCPI COMMANDS FOR OUTPUT CONTROL ecce eese eee e sees sees esee eeeee A 17 SCPI COMMANDS FOR CALIBRATION ccccoccscsssscscsssccccccccccccccccccccccccecsees A 18 SCPI COMMANDS TO CLEAR ALL PROTECTION MECHANISMS A 21 SCPI COMMANDS FOR FOLDBACK PROTECTION e eee eee eee eee eoe cece A 22 SCPI COMMANDS FOR POWER ecce eese ee eee e eee sees eee ee sees e esee esee esee eee ee A 23 SCPI COMMANDS FOR TRIGGERING eeeeeeeeeee esee esee eese eese e eese e esee eee A 23 SYSTEM COMMANDS acid teo ob eod Doo UNE E Cte rec eO A EDI tice A 24 STATUS COMMANDS sns 0606 4
119. Local Operation Table 3 1 Select and Set from the Front Panel cont d 9 Positions on the Mode Turning the rotary Adjust Enter Pressing the rotary Adjust Control Knob control lets you Enter control lets you CAP Current Analog Select the programming source and Set the value selected and cycle Programming select the range to the next setting VAP Voltage Analog Select the programming source and Set the value selected and cycle Programming select the range to the next setting PGM Programming Options Select the remote interface to be used Select interface Option and for control local lockout or current cycle to the next setting sharing 3 4 M370430 01 Rev C Local Operation Navigating the Menu System The menu system of the XG XTR follows a select and set model with the exception of the VOLTS and AMPS modes See Setting VOLTS and AMPS Modes The general procedure for setting up the features in the select and set model is 1 To select a mode rotate the 9 position Mode control to the desired mode or press the rotary Adjust Enter control once to activate the current selection on the mode control knob See Figure 3 3 2 To select the feature or setting rotate the rotary Adjust Enter control to scroll through the different available settings of that mode The settings appear on the output current display 3 Press the rotary Adjust Enter control to select the feature or setting 4 Set each
120. N J1 14 Isolated Current Analog Programming IS MON CUR J3 10 Important Analog control monitor lines will reflect the output of the power supply even when the unit is not set to operate in analog programming mode Important Isolated monitor lines are only valid when isolated analog programming modes are used for the respective voltage and current control If local front panel control is used or non isolated APG 1s used these values will be inaccurate and should not be used for monitoring Conversely if isolated APG is used the non isolated monitor lines will be inaccurate M370430 01 Rev C 4 3 Analog Programming APG and Isolated Analog Programming ISOL Auxiliary Outputs 4 4 The auxiliary outputs are an additional isolated source The auxiliary output has two outputs 5 V output on J3 9 and a 15 V output on J3 11 The auxiliary output operates independently of the main output It is enabled or disabled from the front panel by pressing the OUTPUT ENABLE Aux button When the Aux output is enabled the OUTPUT ENABLE Aux button is illuminated Like the main output of the power supply the Aux also has the ability to Autostart at power up See Output Auto Start Mode Auto Restart on page 3 18 and Auxiliary Auto Start Mode on page 3 19 for details on controlling this feature Table 4 2 provides a summary of the options available for programming output voltage and current set point using an analog source Table 4
121. N MEMORY SETTINGS sees 3 39 USER SETTING MEMORY LOCATIONS tic ccavorcisycrtnseisntudscavintensesaiawiedohimidaxevedseveneds 3 40 Saving User Setting Memory Locations eeeeeeeesssssseeeeeerneennnennnnn 3 40 Recalling User Setting Memory Locations eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 3 41 LOCA ILO CK 0I TET 3 42 Enabling Local Lockout sees 3 42 Disabling Local Lockout sees mnes 3 42 RESETTING THE POWER SUPPLY 0ccccceeseeceeseeseeseeseeseeeeueeeeeueeueeeveueeueeaeeueeaeens 3 43 USING MULTIPLE POWER SUPPLIES eene nennen nnne nennen an 3 45 Configuring Multiple Supplies for Series Operation ssssseesssss 3 47 Configuring Multiple Supplies for Current Sharing Operation APG Method 3 50 Connecting to the Load in Local Sensing Mode Parallel Control Methoo 3 52 Connecting to the Load in Remote Sensing Mode Parallel Control Method 3 53 ANALOG PROGRAMMING APG AND ISOLATED ANALOG PROGRAMMING ISOL 14 111 oer e eren rene rna nnn nnn uuu uan ranas 4 1 INTRODUCTION M RR 4 2 Analog Programming APG of Output Voltage and Output Current 4 2 Remote Programming Options 3 5 5 ciao cdd t esed rede d oppo ai 4 3 Analog Programming APG Connector J1 seeeesseeseseeeesee 4 5 ANALOG PROGRAMMING MODE 0ccccceccecceceecec
122. OMM MCH ADDR command with a different multichannel address The previously selected device will be deselected and the new device will be selected From that point on all messages without a multichannel address will be destined for the newly selected device It is possible to deselect all devices by using the aforementioned commands with the broadcast address 0 The SCPI Commands for these instructions are SYXSTem CoMMunaicate MCHannel ADDRess address Or ADR lt addr ss gt Where address is the multichannel address of the device to be selected The address 1s an integer value from 1 to 30 M370430 01 Rev C Remote Operation Multichannel Commands Explained M370430 01 Rev C The use of multichannel addressing allows you to send messages to one device more than one device or to all devices Any of the remote interface types can be used to send a multichannel command through the device that 1s physically connected to the PC to all the devices provided that all other devices are connected to via the RS 485 bus In order to use multichannel addressing the setup of the wiring should be completed as described in Multiple Power Supply Connections to RS 485 Bus on page 5 19 All SCPI commands in the XG XTR support the use of multichannel addressing however only one device can respond to a message Responses will be sent according to the conditions set out in Table 5 8 Table 5 8 Rules for Multichannel Res
123. OTP Not used Not used Always 1 l A e Fan on the slave board cerea ead 500W and 1700W models only 4 16 OTP Slave Over Temperature protection on the slave board 1500W and 1700W models only E E Foldback Foldback protection 1024 Under Voltage protection See Alarms and Errors on page 3 21 5 74 M370430 01 Rev C Remote Operation Power Saving Control Sleep Mode XTR XG 1700 W Only M370430 01 Rev C The Sleep Mode supported by the XG XTR family of DC power supplies is an effective way to reduce overall power consumption when the power supply is not in use for a specified period of time If Sleep Mode is enabled the power supply will revert to a low power consumption mode with the following characteristics e Display will be blank e The internal cooling fans will run at the lowest possible speed for whisper quiet operation e Touching any button or one of the rotary knobs will immediately wake up the power supply to normal mode of operation All settings will be preserved during sleep mode and the power supply will return to the previously set state when it wakes up The following conditions must be met in order for Sleep Mode to engage The output of the power supply and auxiliary outputs must be off standby e The Sleep Mode must be enabled on To enable Sleep Mode Set a time delay for the duration of inactivity to elapse before entering Sleep Mode This time sleep hold off delay can
124. PONnOdIC Cleaning eM a T eet E ate 2 3 STEP 2 LOCATION AND MOUNTING Succus iul estaciaseeoiaeelineenccciesl LAGA 229030 teas 2 4 Rack MOUNUNO cce 2 4 PURCHASING Rack MODBIUIIES s ved cad oaa sarete ec Rae a deta Raw edo sam ctu hrec aat 2 4 NY HATING d END DE 2 4 STEP 3 CONNECTING AC INPUT POWER eee eene enne nnne nnne nnns 2 5 XG XTR 850 Watt AC Input Connector eeeeeesssseeeeeernneenenennnnnns 2 5 XG XTR 1500 and 1700 Watt AC Input Connector cccccecccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 6 XG XTR 1500 and 1700 Watt AC Input Wire seeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeen 2 6 XG XTR 1500 and 1700 Watt AC Input Wire Connection ssse 2 7 STEP 4 SELECTING LOAD WIRES eee IIR re renis 2 8 OAC WINN e rA 2 8 MSat allg severe ede CUevceust bobo ta pU vati Vae tero ot daugu Mov ee o dol Puede vdredne Pav d epe daria d 2 8 Ourrent Carrying Gapatcity uisum e pem bud esaet a Po peu tur e Cet N E 2 8 Maximum Load Wiring Length For Operation With Sense Lines 2 9 Noise and Impedance EITGCIS uu beoe Un tse liste sip ae bd Hd eu 2 9 STEP 5 PERFORMING FUNCTIONAL TESTS eee meer 2 10 Powering the Power Supply On Off seeeeeeeeesseseeeeeennnnnennnnnnnn nnns 2 10 Voltage and Current Mode Operation Checks cccccscseeeccceeeesseeeseeeeeeeesaeeeees 2 11 STEP 6 CONNE
125. Power Supply Load Terminal Local Sense Figure 2 4 Connecting Single Loads Connecting Multiple Loads The proper connection of distributed loads is an important aspect of power supply use The common method of connection is a radial load connection Power is connected to each load individually from a single pair of terminals designated as the positive and negative distribution terminals This pair of terminals may be the power supply output terminals the load terminals or a distinct set of terminals especially established for distribution use In this scheme there are no ground loops and the effect of one load upon another is minimized 2 14 M370430 01 Rev C Installation Step 7 Connecting Remote Sensing WARNING Shock hazard There is a potential shock hazard at the sense connectors when using a power supply at an output greater than 40 V Select wiring with a minimum insulation rating equivalent to the maximum output voltage of the power supply for use as local sense jumpers or for remote sense wires Ensure that connections at the load end are shielded to prevent contact with hazardous voltages Remote sensing permits you to shift the regulation point of the power supply from the output terminals to the load or other distribution terminals Use shielded twisted pair wiring of 20 to 26 AWG for best noise performance Make sure that the shielded twisted pair wiring insulation is rated higher than the maximum output
126. RACK ccccccccocccccoccccooooco000oc0000eeoee D 10 INSTALLING CHASSIS okeene ae D 11 XG XTR 850 WATT SERIES VOLTAGE AND CURRENT RANGES 1 3 XG XTR 1500 WATT SERIES VOLTAGE AND CURRENT RANGES 1 3 XG XTR 1700 WATT SERIES VOLTAGE AND CURRENT RANGES 1 4 BASIC SETUP PROCEDURE 4 5 nne WHERE IHE EH Tes THEN se GRN Ue 4 2 2 XG XTR 1500 AND 1700 WATT RECOMMENDED AC INPUT WIRE HIGHER POWER c natencusevesvtt eain e 449 even cepe NCA NEAR mt ipe ROGE 4 NOE OA 2 6 CURRENT CARRYING CAPACITY FOR LOAD WIRING eeeee eee eee eee eeu 2 8 SELECT AND SET FROM THE FRONT PANEL eee ee eee eee eee eee eoe esee oooeeeeoo 3 3 FRONT PANEL DISPLAY TEXT 5eiesed scevevoecteee ees abdeea teet ee e duea eeu te et eet sa esu eea eue 3 9 SHIPPED CONFIGURATION 5 iecet er etepepasee E sete p du pase eee eee deae 3 16 ALARM ORDER OF PRECEDENCE ccccccccoococo00000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 3 19 ALARM MASK BIT POSITIONS ee eee e eee eee eee t esee e esee nettes esee tese ee esee nose 3 22 ALARM LATCH BIT POSITIONS i5 esee eee see eeu a E exe SEE Ee ra RERO e CRa ee peru eve PUT Eee Res 3 23 POWER CYCLE SAVED RECALLED SETTINGS eee eee eee eee eee eee ooeeeeene 3 36 USER ACCESSIBLE SAVED RECALLED SETTINGS VOLTAGE SETPOINT 3 37 POWER SUPPLY DEFAULT SETTINGS eie tbis eese eueuee Gta e esee aves e aeo a E Ceu Vaene 3 40 MONITOR LINES a dnet tecveieb ev evi Uv ide vCO EXEAT
127. RE 6 1 FIGURE 6 2 FIGURE 6 3 FIGURE 6 4 FIGURE 6 5 FIGURE 6 6 FIGURE 6 7 FIGURE 6 8 FIGURE 6 9 FIGURE 6 10 FIGURE 6 11 FIGURE 6 12 FIGURE 6 13 FIGURE 6 14 FIGURE 6 15 FIGURE 6 16 FIGURE 6 17 FIGURE 6 18 FIGURE 6 19 FIGURE 6 20 FIGURE 6 21 FIGURE 6 22 FIGURE 6 23 FIGURE 6 24 FIGURE 6 25 FIGURE 6 26 FIGURE 6 27 FIGURE 6 28 FIGURE 6 29 FIGURE 6 30 FIGURE 6 31 XVI IEEE 488 2 REGISTER MODEL 5226245464 602423346 0430640486043664 0 664666000 EE EU eed T eee e vU EE 5 31 SUMMARIZES THE STANDARD EVENT STATUS REGISTER e eee 5 30 SCPI REGISTER MODE E 5 ten Ec SERAS RC ovv P SAN GASC D d P EDEN OO GN 5 31 SUMMARY OF STANDARD EVENT STATUS REGISTER eee eee ee eee eee eoe 5 36 SCPI REGISTER MODEE iiec itte tei tsena ipobeVe neue b eia bub cueva e Ve qo bep be vene eb eee us 5 38 OPERATION STATUS REGISTER FANOUT cccccccccoooocc00000000000000000000000000000 5 39 SCPI QUESTIONABLE REGISTERS FANOUT ccccsssscccssscccssscccssscccssscceees 5 48 COMPUTER OR HUB PLUG vesicacesescsatccssccbsctescucacdsaccscncedstencdcacccewteseueasddeccseee 6 3 POWER SUPPLY PLUG eie HE OH Aen 6 3 RIJ 45 PLUG AG dies AI di Ee EE TA CEU VETE Ee CINE EAE Ue E CHN EUR EDO UUUR 6 3 SCHEME OF ENET CROSS C ABLE eto e o oe ER Fa edet escart rs e NE e eroe sensisse 6 4 XPORT ENET CONNECTOR AND LEDS eere eere nnnnnn 6 4 SINGLE COMPUTER SINGLE POWER SUPPLY ccoec000000000000000000000000000000000 6
128. RQS MSS messages as defined in 488 1 You can read the status byte register using a 488 1 serial poll or the 488 2 STB common command The STB query causes the device to send the contents of the Status Byte Register and the Master Summary Status MSS summary message The STB query does not alter the status byte MSS or RQS Table 5 9 Status Byte Summary Register Bit Bit Weight Bit Name Description 2 Error Event Queue ERR Set if any errors are present in the Error Event queue 3 Questionable Status Set if any bits are set in the Questionable Status Event Register QSR register 4 16 Message Available Indicates whether the output queue is empty MAV is MAV TRUE if the device is ready to accept a request from the controller 5 32 Standard Event Status Bit A summary of the Standard Event Status Register Summary ESB 6 64 Request Service RQS Not Implemented MSS indicates that the device has at Master Status Summary least one reason for requesting service MSS 7 128 Operation Status Register Present if a bit is set in the Operation status register OSR Error Event Queue ERR This bit is TRUE if any errors are present in the Error Event Queue Questionable Status Register Summary QSR This bit is TRUE when a bit in the Questionable Event Status Register is set and its corresponding bit in the Questionable Status Enable Register is TRUE 9 32 M370430 01 RevC Remote Operation Message
129. SYST COMM APR LEV CURR 4 Set the input source as Voltage analog APG Send the SCPI command SYST REM SOUR CURR AVOL Set the voltage source attached to the non isolated current APG input to 90 of the nominal current level in this case 3 6 V Turn the output power on The power supply starts up in Constant Current mode Read the input voltage value from the voltmeter connected in step 2 Type the SCPI input current calibration command with voltage noted in step 9 as the parameter data For example you would type CAL INP ANAL CURR 3 49 if you were reading 3 49 volts from the voltmeter 23 Calibration and Troubleshooting Offset Calibration 1 24 Offset calibration of the power supply provides the best accuracy in low range input current To perform offset calibration E Set the voltage source attached to the non isolated current APG input to 10 of the nominal current level in this case 0 400 V Turn the output power on Read the input voltage value from the voltmeter connected in step 2 of the gain calibration Type SCPI input current calibration command with voltage noted in step 3 as the parameter data For example you would type CAL INP ANAL CURR 0 43 After performing offset calibration it is highly recommended that you repeat gain calibration SCPI Command CALibration lt channel gt INPut ANALog CURRent lt voltme ter reading in volts gt M370430 01 Rev C
130. SYSTem lt channel gt HELP HEADers SYSTem lt channel gt HELP LEGacy Querying Help for all Command Headers The SYSTem channel HELP HEADers query shall return all SCPI commands and queries and IEEE 488 2 common commands and common queries implemented No single line will be longer than 80 characters long The full path for every command and query shall be returned separated by line feeds A SCPI header is defined as It shall contain all the nodes from the root The SCPI program mnemonic gt contains the node in standard SCPI format The short form shall use uppercase characters while the additional characters for the long form shall be in lowercase characters Default nodes shall be surrounded by square brackets Command SYSTem channel HELP HEADers For example SYST1 HELP HEAD Might return 44513 TDN 7 Gon ly RST ngquery TOTO qonly OPC Maquery OPC qonly WAI nquery CLS nquery SEGE ESR ZGgonly7 M370430 01 Rev C 9 99 Remote Operation SORE SRE Gqonly STB Iqonkby7 SAV TIC TRG nquery ADE HELP qonly ERR comb SYSTem PROTection MASK SYSTemsbRROEX NBEXT dgonly 2 SvSTemtERRBODICODE NEXT Zqonly oYyoSTem bRROLPSCOUNEG7dgOonlyv OUTPut lt PROTect ron FOLDback MODE OUTPut PROTection FOLDback ODIPubsPOLlsr zity OUTPut POWer STATE OUTPut POWer PON STATe OUTPut AUXilliary STATe
131. TILIOJ Discrete parameters are used when program settings have a limited number of values If you query a discrete parameter the response will always be in the short form with all uppercase letters The following is an example of a command that uses discrete parameters TRIG SOUR BUS EXT IMM NONE Numeric parameters are number representations such as decimal points optional signs and scientific notation Values such as MINimum and MAXimum are accepted as substitutes for numbers When DEFault is provided as a parameter the machine selects the default value automatically No units suffix should be included with the parameter only support for defaults units is available In cases where specific numeric values are accepted the power unit will round the input parameters The following is an example of a command that uses numeric parameters VOLT PROT lt voltage gt MAX MIN String parameters are used when a series of ASCII characters is required Strings must be enclosed within single or double quotations The beginning and ending quotation marks must be matching Quote delimiters may be included in the string by typing the quotation marks twice without any characters in between The following is an example of a command that uses string parameters A 7 SCPI Command Reference SCPI Command Tree The SCPI commands are organized into a tree structure To illustrate the tree structure the following tree has been provided Each l
132. UVP Over Temperature Protection OTP Autostart OUTPUT ENABLE Main Autostart OUTPUT ENABLE Aux Foldback Mode Foldback Delay Shutdown Logic Voltage Analog Programming VAP Mode Voltage Analog Programming VAP Level Current Analog Programming CAP Mode Current Analog Programming CAP Level Remote Programming Interface Local Lock PSU Power Supply Address Data Rate BPS Alarm Latches Front Panel Timeout Constant Power Mode Constant Power Level Loop Protection Enable Line Drop Mode Settings version 2 21 and higher M370430 01 Rev C 3 39 Local Operation User Setting Memory Locations There are three user setting memory locations available for storing frequently used configurations These user setting memory locations help to facilitate multiple users of an XG XTR power supply who have different setups or when multiple loads are used that have different requirements Table 3 8 lists the values that are stored in each user setting memory location Table 3 8 User Accessible Saved Recalled Settings Voltage Setpoint Voltage Setpoint Current Setpoint Voltage Output Protection Current Output Protection Over Voltage Protection OVP Over Temperature Protection OTP Autostart OUTPUT ENABLE Main Autostart OUTPUT ENABLE Aux Foldback Mode Foldback Delay Shutdown Logic Voltage Analog Programming VAP Mode Voltage Analog Programming VAP Level Current Analog Programming CAP Mode Current Analog Progra
133. Used STATus OPE Ration Not Used Not Used D Ud CALibrating gt Not Used 1 Not Used obl deas 2 Not Used 3 M EASuring 4 W aiting for TRIGger 5 STATus OPE Ration CSH are Not U sed 6 Not U sed 7 To Status Not U sed 8 Byte Bit 7 MASTer SLAve SHUTdown Summary 9 Not Used Local Lock Current Share Summary Not Used Constant Current M ode Not Used Constant Voltage Mode Not Used PROGram Running Not Used Not Used Never Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Figure 5 22 Operation Status Register Fanout M370430 01 Rev C 5 39 Remote Operation Table 5 11 OPERation Status Register m pes O r 70070007 Indicates that the supply is in CALibration Mode Not implemented Not implemented 8 SWEeping Not implemented Not implemented Not implemented Not implemented 128 Not implemented 256 Not Used 512 SHUTdown Summary _ Reflects the summary of the SHUTdown Sub Register Front panel lockout Reflects the summary of the CSHare Sub Register Reflects the output mode of the supply Reflects the output mode of the supply 16384 Program Running Indicates 1f an Autosequence program is currently running The operation shutdown status register describes the cause of the power supply shutting down the output More than one bit may be active and multiple actions will be required to restart the unit The protection shutdown sub register indicates which protection mech
134. You should get a home page similar to the following Access Restrictions Basic Setup Automatic Configuration DHCP v Router Name WRTS4GX Host Name Domain Name MTU Auto E Size 1500 Local P Address 192 168 1 4 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 v DHCP Server Enable _ Disable Starting IP Address 192 168 1 100 Maximum Number of T DHCP Users Client Lease Time 0 minutes 0 means one day P Address Range 192 168 1 100 192 168 1 149 Static DNS 1 0 10 0 10 Static DNS 2 0 10 0 10 Time Zone GMT 08 00 Pacific Time USA amp Canada Y V Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving changes Figure 6 39 Router Home Page Firmware Version 1 02 15 WRT54GX Administration Status Automatic Configuration DHCP This setting is most commonly used by Cable operators Host Name Enter the host name provided by your ISP Domain Name Enter the domain name provided by your ISP More Local IP Address This is the address of the router Subnet Mask This is the subnet mask of the router DHCP Server Allows the router to manage your IP addresses Starting IP Address The address you would like to start with Maximum number of DHCP Users You may limit the number of addresses your router hands out More Time Setting You may choose Aulomaticaly if you wish to use a NTP server to keep the most accurate time More M370430 01 Rev C Communications Options
135. a pee m NEN m E pee CE Z ull ee M370430 01 Rev C 5 49 Remote Operation VOLTage Sub Register This shows whether the present voltage level is over or under the specified trip limit Table 5 16 QUEStionable VOLTage Status Register TEMPerature Sub Register This shows whether the temperature of critical components is near or over the maximum operating temperature Table 5 17 QUEStionable TEMPerature Status Register Reading Internal Temperature Measurements Internal temperatures are measured by the channels of a fan controller The XG XTR 850 has one fan controller FanO with two channels 0 and 1 that each control a fan and measure temperature The XG XTR 1700 has two fan controllers FanO with two channels 0 and 1 and Fanl with two channels 0 and 1 four fans total The SCPI command s for these readings are DIAGnostic MEMory FAN lt n gt READ h0 lt n gt Example to read the temperatures in the XG XTR 850 DIAG MEM FANO READ 4h00 this reads the Ist channel DIAG MEM FANO READ h01 this reads the 2nd channel To read temperatures in the XG XTR 1700 send either or both of the above example commands for the channel s of the first fan and input FAN1 in place of FANO to read the temperature measurements taken by the channel s of the second fan 5 50 M370430 01 Rev C Remote Operation Questionable Status Register Commands Query Questionable Status Register Event SCPI command ST
136. a Pre ome oH a 3 12 Shipped Configuration Local Operation cccccccceeccssseseeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeseaeaeeees 3 17 ENABEING THE OUT PU To 22222532 9900226 qe tubi vus buo d rede E Fuentes Duis SR Ino Due R EU teenies 3 17 ENABLING THE AUXILIARY OUTPUT eeeeeeee a nenne R A renes CAA R E ee an 3 18 OUTPUT AUTO START MODE AUTO RESTART cccssseeceeseeceeseecceuseecsaseeseaes 3 18 AUXILIARY AUTO START IVIODE ssssstulinsdesan i n trier 06 ute Gennep a duas pU Ear ENNE 3 19 GONSTANT POWER MODE disbuie eI HIE Melinda UU RIEN IR IM DU ERUIT 3 19 ALARMS AND ERRORS qedutese nire cieeds OE D RENE EEE EEA 3 21 GIEANING Alan TIS cese oeianitas od dotoxdoniquc a d dut edossacco costs ACS DEA BARRAN tetas 3 22 Front FanelALARM EED s sic tcotdsitscitent a hh a a a a n eain 3 23 Alarm MASKING e iveve i Qupe cosa vut a onde vlc o Uv vu Ev ACE E ag acea 3 24 Alarm ECIN ce asset teed toes Ueboedea i Doi sedioud eoe Ute e O0 Debe ies enda toe oboe tegere 3 25 SETTING FOLDBACK MODE qusitericeden ent dodo uoto EAC RA dr Mun Ud 3 26 Resetting Activated Foldback Protection cccccccseeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeesseeeeeeeeeas 3 27 USING OVER VOLTAGE PROTECTION OVP ccccscccceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeseeeeeauees 3 28 Defining the OVP Set PONU Teisines aedi piod deca tees pterea it tiui celdas tms 3 29 USING UNDER VOLTAGE PROTECTION UVP L c ccc cici cici cerier 3 30 Defining the UVP Set POIN oio o ceto E ead et ae eoo
137. a unique IP address for example Computer 1 169 254 117 231 Computer 2 169 254 117 232 Power supply 1 169 254 117 220 e Power supply 2 169 254 117 221 Power supply 3 169 254 117 222 Power supply 30 169 254 117 230 You must set up every device manually To set up for multiple power supplies and two computers M370430 01 Rev C 1 Setup your computer as described in Setting Up the Computer on page 6 5 Repeat the procedure for each computer hooked up to the system 2 Install the DeviceInstaller software on the PC you wish to use to configure the XG XTR unit s with See the instructions for Software Installations on page 6 8 3 Configure each XG XTR unit with an ENET option See the instructions for Configuring the Device Using DevicelInstaller on page 6 10 4 Create terminal connections for each of the XG XTR unit s with the ENET option that were configured in step 3 See the instructions for Terminal Configuration on page 6 16 5 Ifmore than one computer is going to be used copy the filename ht files saved in step 3 to a disk and copy them over 6 25 Communications Options to each computer that you will be using to access the XG XTR unit s over the Ethernet If copying the files is not possible repeat step 3 for each computer that you wish to use The configuration is complete You are now ready to use your system Controlling Your System For every connec
138. aeeeeeeeeeessaaaeeeeeenees 5 46 QUESTIONABLE STATUS REGISTER aindtezoi snlieiuriko tate unes ius puse cete EE ruu EAE d 5 47 VOL Tage oUb RHeglSlel uino eb ceeded tuve eaaet 5 50 TEMPerature Sub HRegister uaina a a a nennen 5 50 Questionable Status Register Commands ccccceeeeeeeesseneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseees 5 51 X M370430 01 Rev C Contents Voltage Status Register COMMANGCS ccceeeecccceeeesaeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeessaaeseees 5 52 Temperature Status Register COMMANAS sss 5 53 SGP ERROR EVENT QUEUE o tenae tia reto rette Ed eei eenteteltont ea Dese luti 5 54 PRESET Command REOR NO ODD EE 5 56 Clear All Staius RedlsSlerS c dosis eost ve Y eo Ee e tete e Yee 5 57 SCPIR set Status ME Tc 5 58 Command Line Help Sy Stem iets durus cetus us Dueh tutu ue tuu Du e idru DER TA ENNE 5 59 LOCKING AND UNLOCKING THE FRONT PANEL een eren nnns 5 62 Auto Sequence PrOGrAMMMING ccccccceccsseeseecceeeeceueeeeceeeeesseaeeseeeeeesessuaaeseeeeeees 5 62 CONFIGURE OTHER PROTECTION MECHANISMS cen eene 5 69 Foldback PIOle imo DRE EO E IE 5 69 Over Temperature ProtecliOniaiiiene iiec i obe a a a 5 70 Loop Protection Enable Disable cccccsssseeececesseceeceeeeeeeceeeaeeeeesseageseeessaaaes 5 70 Interlock Enable DIsable dett tis ee tos ee der o dura 5 70 Save and ROC aM RETI ce adie cee m 5 72 Set Analog Programming Level cccc
139. age sequences When a program is activated each command stored in the buffer is executed as if the operator had sent the command by typing it in A variable delay time called dwell is spent between commands The dwell time can range from 0 seconds to 180 seconds See Setting Dwell Time on page 5 63 The Auto Sequence program will be cleared after AC power is turned off however a procedure exists for storing it in a text file which can be reloaded at a later date 5 62 M370430 01 Rev C Remote Operation Setting Dwell Time The dwell time is the amount of time that is delayed between each command during the execution of an Auto Sequence program The dwell time can be from 0 to 180 seconds and can be changed during the program execution The dwell time has a minimum step size of 1 second Command PROGram channel STEP DWELl lt dwell time Where dwell time gt is an integer value from 0 to 180 For Example PROG DWEL 12 Results in 12 seconds of wait time after each command is executed Storing an Auto Sequence Program Loading a program into memory is done by using the PROGram lt channel gt RECord STARt command After the start command has been issued the XG XTR will record all subsequent commands into the auto sequence program buffer The commands will be recorded into the buffer until the PROGram lt channel gt RECord STOP command is issued Commands PROGram c
140. aged if the load is shorted Table 2 2 shows the maximum current rating for various gauges of wire rated for 105 C operation based on a maximum current density of 450 A cm Operating at the maximum current rating shown in Table 2 2 results in an approximately 30 C temperature rise for an appropriately sized load wire operating in free air Where load wiring must operate in areas with elevated ambient temperatures or bundles with other wiring use larger gauges or wiring rated for higher temperatures Table 2 3 Current Carrying Capacity for Load Wiring Wire Size Maximum Current Wire Size Maximum Current AWG Amps AWG Amps 20 25 6 jet 18 4 14 W 16 edd 14 19 11 192 12 1 0 247 10 2 0 303 8 36 2 8 M370430 01 Rev C Installation Maximum Load Wiring Length For Operation With Sense Lines WIRE GAUGE AWG 16 ai 12 za 8 5 4 5 ag e C D O A AA C A ATT TT F s LELLNALENN ATTA TTT wT NTA ae CENTS NE NI ROSSIN S COTATI NICS lt 4 LLLLLIUUENNL NNCNILUN SAAS 2 2 OAT A ELE NIE E ELLE oti COT CLE EH i o in 8 883883 gee g LOAD CURRENT AMPS Figure 2 2 Maximum Load Wire Length for 1 V Line Drop Noise and Impedance Effects M370430 01 Rev C To minimize noise pickup or radiation use shielded twisted pair wiring of the shortest possible length for load sense wires Connect the shield to the power supply chassis Where shielding is impossible or impractical simply twisting the wires toget
141. al mode After executing a reset the power supply s settings are restored to the default settings but retain the calibration data Table 3 9 lists the default settings Table 3 9 Power Supply Default Settings Parameter Setting Address l Data rate Kbps 9 6 Communication mode RS 232 Vout setting OV Iout setting 0A Output Off AUX Out Off Trigger Off Ext On Off Polarity Negative Auto start mode Off AUX Auto start mode Off OVP Maximum 3 43 Local Operation 3 44 Table 3 9 Power Supply Default Settings Parameter UVP Foldback trigger Foldback delay Current Share Mode Alarm Output Latches Alarms Mask Interlock Voltage Analog Programming Voltage APG Scale Current Analog Programming Current APG Scale Voltage Output Protection Current Output Protection Setting OV None 0 5 s Controller 263 O x 107 all latches enabled 2047 O x 7FF all enabled Disabled Off 10 V Off 10 V Off except M10 Option always On Off except M10 Option always On M370430 01 Rev C Local Operation Using Multiple Power Supplies WARNING Shock hazard There is a shock hazard at the load when using a power supply at an output of greater than 40V or a combined output of greater than 40V To protect personnel against accidental contact with hazardous voltages created by a series connection ensure that the load including connections has no live parts which are accessible Also ensure that the ins
142. al operation the Power On Status signal will be high If the output is disabled for any reason the Power On Status signal will go low The following conditions will set the Power On Status to a low level e AC fail e Current Loop Protection e Over Voltage Protection OVP e Under Voltage Protection UVP e Over Current Protection OCP Over Temperature Protection OTP e Foldback Protection Interlock e Output Off e Shutdown activated rear panel shutdown Internal hardware malfunction Fan failure Hardware Malfunction Alarms 3 38 The power supply will turn off the output An error message will be displayed in the event that e OVP trips e Voltage deviation in CV mode reaches more than 5 from the set level Current deviation in CC mode reaches more than 5 from the set level 1 These two forms of hardware malfunction are only monitored in the corresponding APG mode M370430 01 Rev C Local Operation Current Configuration Memory Settings The power supply will save the unit settings at the time of power down These settings will be loaded when the power is restored to the unit or the power supply is powered up again Table 3 7 lists the settings that are saved and recalled on a power cycle event Table 3 7 Power Cycle Saved Recalled Settings Voltage Setpoint Current Setpoint Voltage Output Protection Current Output Protection Over Voltage Protection OVP Under Voltage Protection
143. all AMETEK EnetTest Utility to C Program Files x86 AMETEK Programmable Power EnetTest Utility InstallShield M370430 01 Rev C 6 45 Communications Options 9 Inthe Setup Type window choose Typical and click Next All program features will be installed Requires the most disk space Minimum required features will be installed Choose which program features you want installed and where they d Recommended for advanced users 6 46 M370430 01 Rev C Communications Options 10 Check that your Settings are correct and then click Install The wizard is ready to begin installation If you want to review or change any of your installation settings dick Back Click Cancel to exit the wizard Current Settings Setup Type Tex Destination Folder C Program Files x86 VAMETEK Programmable Power EnetTest Utility User Information Mame customer Company Ametek InstallShield 11 After a brief installation process the utility should be available M370430 01 Rev C 6 47 Communications Options Using the AMETEK Ethernet Test Utility Manufacturer 192 168 1 101 AMETEK xG 33 0 50 0 Host Name tesla 6 48 In order to use the AMETEK Ethernet Test Utility its Host and Port fields need to be properly set The Host field should be set to the power supply s IP Address The Port field should be set to the power supply s port field unless the port has been changed it defaults to 5025 T
144. alog Programming ISOL Table 4 4 AUX Output and ISOL Connector Pins and Functions J3 Pin Reference Function J3 1 AUX ON OFF Auxiliary enable disable J3 2 COM ISOLATED Isolated Common Isolated from Main Output and Communication Return wire for 5 V 15 V Auxiliary Voltage J3 3 IS VOL PR VOL Isolated Analog Voltage Programming Input J3 4 IS VOL PR CUR Isolated Analog Current Programming Input J3 5 IS MON VOL Isolated Voltage Monitor Scaled to the value of the Voltage Analog Programming Level J3 6 COM ISOLATED Isolated Common Isolated from Main Output and Communication Return wire for control signals monitoring and programming J3 7 ISO CUR RES PR Isolated Current Resistive Programming J3 8 ISO VOL RES PR Isolated Voltage Resistive Programming gt gt C C lt lt Ns ES ME J3 9 5 V Isolated Output J3 10 IS MON CUR Isolated Current Monitor Scaled to the value of the Voltage Analog Programming Level J3 11 15 V Isolated Output J3 12 SD Shutdown Input to power supply to disable output This input has user selectable negative logic operation via front panel or remote digital input output J3 13 PS GOOD PS GOOD Power supply output enabled J3 14 INTER LOCK 1 Interlock Dry contact type Shorting pins J3 14 and J3 15 while the interlock functionality is enabled will enable the output of the power supply J3 15 INTER LOCK 2 Interlock 1 Important Isolated monitor lines are only valid when Isola
145. an Slide Bracket For Rail Types 1 2 3 Bracket for Rail Type 4 SEEDS From Rer Front Rear Less than 20 XG XTR Chassis will not fit within cabinet depth of unit 19 25 20 22 5 375QD 18 SPO 622 SPO 683 2 SPO 857 SPO 857 20 25 5 375QD 18 SPO 622 SPO 683 SPO 857 SPO 857 20 27 5 375QD 18 SPO 622 SPO 683 1 SPO 857 SPO 857 375QD 18 SPO 683 SPO 683 SPO 857 SPO 683 SPO 667 SPO 857 29 5 35 5 375QD 28 SPO 622 SPO 683 SPO 857 SPO 857 29 5 37 25 375QD 28 SPO 622 SPO 683 1 SPO 857 SPO 6832 M370430 01 Rev C D 7 Rack Mount Options and Installation Instructions al Cx r e DI eem L 5 i t TES e y Li d or ka i ici gt i E f i erts 7k nm j 4 E j i 3 CUT SHEAR OR BEND OFF TOP AND BOTTOM FLANGES Figure D 6 Modifying Rear Bracket 4 Remove the chassis member from the slides and assemble to the chassis using M5 x6mm pan head screw SST 6X which are not supplied See Figure D 7 3 T m E i i ue i P 2 ge F i jo Eh dc CAN L S L Et J S YEA or te ar lie ier RINT E z fy Tr Il PM d x i 1 Il pt E Ls Eh n LS L a ey a Wer silt ET 4 i 1 Ir il ipee ik Lj gt h F nis E m in 2a te e r Wh ta I L Figure D 7 Removing Chassis Member From Slides Important Figure 6 shows the chassis member for slide 375QD 18 The chassis member will be longer for Jonathan slide 375QD 26 28 5 Attach front and re
146. an the power Diodes supply s output voltage and have a current rating greater than or equal to the power supply s output rating Connect the cathode to the positive output and the anode to the return Where positive load transients such as back EMF from a motor may occur connect a Transient Voltage Suppressor TVS or a varistor across the output to protect the power supply The breakdown voltage rating for the TVS or varistor must be approximately 10 higher than the rated supply output Battery Application POWER SUPPLY 2 Freewheaing Diode Inductive Load Application Figure 2 3 Diode Placement For a detailed Application Note please go to www programmablepower com and click SUPPORT M370430 01 Rev C 2 13 Installation Connecting Single Loads Figure 2 3 shows the recommended load connections for a single load which is sensing its voltage locally Local sense lines shown are the default connections at the rear panel APG J1 connector see Figure 4 1 on page 4 5 The load lines should use the largest gauge and shortest length of wire possible to ensure optimal performance You do not need remote sensing for basic operation of your power supply However if you wish to correct any small drops in your load lines then use the remote sensing feature See Step 7 Connecting Remote Sensing on page 2 15 for more information 1 L J1 Local Sense W J1 2 Output LL 1 Terminal
147. and read back time Less than 300ms for the whole time loop from sending the command to getting the readback voltage and current data Isolation AC Input to Output 1500 Vac AC Input to Chassis 1500 Vac Output to Chassis 500 Vac 1 Current 0 51A minimum guaranteed 0 724 typically available Overcurrent protection each output is automatic non latching When OCP is tripped the aux voltage folds back and will recover to nominal condition when the over current condition is removed typ 0 2A To protect external circuits attached to the aux outputs it is recommended that customers use an appropriately rated fuse in series with the aux outputs being used 2 Time for the output voltage to recover within 0 5 at its rated output for a load change 10 90 of rated output current Output set point 10 100 3 For floating chassis ground applications please contact applications engineering for system design assistance 4 lt 3 mSec time for the output voltage to recover within 1 at its rated output for a load change 50 100 or 100 50 of rated output current 5 Time to provide data back to the controller using LAN interface option does not include A D conversion time 6 0 5 of actual output voltage or current 1 count floating display dot for ex XG150 5 6 model accuracy will be 0 75V for voltage and 0 025 for current in the appropriate measure range Contact factory for details regarding this mode of operation suoneoiyioedg O
148. anel operation or SCPI command as shown below The default value of Loop Protection is set to Disabled Important While Loop Protection is enabled set to ON the external shutdown function will be automatically set to low active When Loop Protection is disabled set to OFF the external shutdown function will be set to the user s last setting Commands OUTPut channel PROTection LOOP ON OFF Where ON enables the use of Loop protection Returns 1 OFF disables the use of Loop protection Returns 0 Interlock Enable Disable 5 70 The Interlock feature is explained in Interlock Function on page 3 36 Use the command below to enable and disable interlock Enabling interlock will allow the interlock feature to trigger based on the conditions described in Interlock Function on page 3 36 This feature can only be controlled using a SCPI command as there is no front panel equivalent The default value of the interlock is set to Disabled M370430 01 Rev C Remote Operation Important The Interlock alarm cannot be masked or latched through the alarm protection mechanisms It can only be enabled or disabled using the following command Commands SENSe lt channel gt PROTection INTerlock STATe ON OFF Where ON enables the use of interlock protection OFF disables the use of interlock protection M370430 01 Rev C 5 71 Remote Operation Save and Recall The save and recall of user sett
149. anisms have caused the power supply to shutdown E m ee NN D iiir C E Messico RR C sss 2 pO E C eee E NE m M 5 40 M370430 01 Rev C Remote Operation Table 5 12 OPERation SHUTdown Status Register 1 PROTection Reflects the summary of the PROTection sub register INTerlock The power supply is shut down by INTerlock signal ME External Shutdown The power supply is shut down by External Shutdown signal Table 5 13 OPERation SHUTdown PROTection Status Register Over Voltage protection has tripped Under Voltage protection has tripped Over Current protection has tripped AC failure protection has tripped OTP Over Temperature protection has tripped 128 Foldback protection has tripped 256 Fan Fan failure protection has tripped M370430 01 Rev C 5 41 Remote Operation Current SHare Sub Register This register shows the state of the current share configuration which can either be set through the front panel Current Share Config menu or through the SCPI command Important If current sharing is not being used the unit must be configured as a controller Failure to do so will result in unpredictable operation The SCPI command s for these instructions are SOURce COMBine CSHare MODE Table 5 14 OPERation CSHare Status Register 1 CONTroller The power supply is configured to be a Current Share CONTroller SLAVe The p
150. ar brackets to cabinet section See Figure D 8 using the following materials supplied with the slides e 4 8 x 0 375 Flat Head Countersunk Screws SST 4 8 Lock Washers e 4 8 Regular Washers 4 8 Hex Nuts D 8 M370430 01 RevC Rack Mount Options and Installation Instructions SPO 622 SHOWN amp c lt BAR NUT SPO 623 SHOWN INSTALL NOW TEMPORARILY IF USING TYPE 1 2 OR 3 RAILS 2X Figure D 8 Attaching Front And Rear Bracket To Cabinet Section Important Do not tighten hardware completely 6 Mount cabinet section into rack between upright rails using e 4 Bar nuts SPO 623 sold separately e 6 10 x 0 375 flat head countersunk Phillips SST screw not supplied by Jonathan Two for each side See Figure D 9 Important The hardware used will change depending on the type of mounting hole available in your equipment rack Ensure rails are level M370430 01 Rev C D 9 Rack Mount Options and Installation Instructions SPO 683 SHOWN SPO 622 SHOWN NOTE ONLY ONE SCREW USED ON FRONT SIDE Figure D 9 Mounting Cabinet Section Into Rack 7 Install chassis 8 Cycle chassis twice push in and out two times Ensure that rollers are engaged and the lock functions properly 9 Remove chassis and securely tighten hardware from step 4 See Figure D 10 D 10 M370430 01 Rev C Rack Mount Options and Installation Instructions a n E E 113 ES Y LI DP Figure D 10
151. as close as possible to 4 000 V Press any key other than the or keys to exit from interactive calibration mode M370430 01 Rev C Calibration and Troubleshooting Isolated Current Monitoring Calibration Important For maximum accuracy at a specific APG level follow the calibration procedure again but use the intended operating voltage level in steps 3 and 8 To calibrate the isolated current monitoring l M370430 01 Rev C Short the main output with a shunt Connect a multimeter to measure the voltage across the shunt Connect the voltmeter to the Isolated monitoring output lines J3 10 and J3 6 Set the current APG level to 4 V The SCPI command is SYST COMM APR LEV CURR 4 Set the input source to local for voltage analog programming the SCPI command is SYST REM SOUR CURR LOC Set the main output voltage to 100 by sending the command SOUR VOLT lt ModelVolt gt or use the rotary Adjust Enter control Turn the main output to On by pressing the OUTPUT ENABLE Main button on the front panel or send the command OUTP ON The OUTPUT ENABLE Main button will illuminate Enter the interactive calibration mode by sending the SCPI command CAL MON CURR ISOL Press the terminal keys or to reduce or increase the monitoring value Adjust the monitoring value displayed on the voltmeter that was set up in Step 1 to read as close as possible to 4 000 V Press any key other than the or keys to exit
152. ase the main output current value Adjust the main output current to 100 Press any key other than the or keys to exit from interactive calibration mode 7 15 Calibration and Troubleshooting Calibration Procedure for Isolated Modes The main output and the non isolated mode must be calibrated first Isolated Voltage Monitoring Calibration Important For maximum accuracy at a specific APG level follow the calibration procedure again but use the intended operating voltage level in steps 3 and 8 To calibrate the isolated voltage monitoring 2 7 16 Disconnect the load and connect the voltmeter to the output Connect the voltmeter to the isolated voltage monitoring output lines J3 5 J3 6 Set the Voltage APG level to 4 V The SCPI command is SYST COMM APR LEV 4 Set the input source to local for voltage analog programming The SCPI command 1s SYST REM SOUR LOC Set the main output voltage to 100 by sending the command SOUR VOLT lt ModelVolt gt or use the rotary adjust Enter control Turn the main output to On by pressing the OUTPUT ENABLE Main button on the front panel or send the command OUTP ON The OUTPUT ENABLE Main button will illuminate Enter the interactive calibration mode by sending the SCPI command CAL MON ISOL Press the terminal keys or to reduce or increase the monitoring value Adjust the monitoring value displayed on the voltmeter that was setup in Step 1 to read
153. ation INPut ANALog VOLTage Voltage APG Input Calibrate the CALibration INPut ANALog CURRent Current APG Input Calibrate the s CATa bration lt channel gt OUTPut Voltage og VOLTage controlled Non Isolated Voltage APG feature Calibrate the CALibration channel OUTPut Voltage og irs VOlLTage lsOlbated controlled Isolated Voltage APG feature gt ANAL ANAL signal system Calibrate the isolated current monitor signal system Calibrates the isolated and non isolated VA P measurement commands Calibrates the isolated and non isolated CAP measurement commands Calibrate the voltage analog programming system Calibrates the voltage analog programming system Calibrate the current monitor lt NR1 gt nothing for interactive mode NRI nothing Yes for interactive mode B B NRI nothing Yes for interactive mode NRI nothing Yes for interactive mode 99U9J9J8OH puguliulO2 dOS 0cV o 9eH L0 0 Tv0Z IN Table A 4 SCPI Commands for Calibration Continued Calibrate the CALibration channel OUTPut Voltage Og CURReEnt controlled Non Isolated Current APG feature Calibrate the S CART bration lt chennel gt sOUT Pt Voltage Og CURRent ISOLated controlled Isolated Current APG feature Calibrate the pelcCAhibration schanpnel soUTPut Resistive og VOLTage RESistive
154. ber of host address bits or a class The query format returns the number of bits set To query the actual number of bits used by the LAN interface in case the IP address is not static but assigned by a DHCP server the M370430 01 Rev C 6 61 Communications Options NCON parameter Network Connection Setting must be added to the query The default value is 8 In general Class A network is 24 bits Class B is 16 bits and Class A is 8 bits Command Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate LAN CLASs lt NRF gt Parameters 8 to 32 Example SYST COMM LAN CLAS 8 Query Syntax SYST COMM LAN CLAS SYST COMM LAN CLAS NCON Returned Parameters lt NR1 gt SYSTem COMMunicate LAN DEFault This command will apply the changes in LAN setting to the default setting The controller will go to reset condition and the default LAN setting will take effect Both IP address and Gate way address are set to zero The Host name is cleared The password is reset to admin The unit is set to DHCP or Auto IP Command Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate LAN DEFault Parameters none Example SYST COMM LAN DEF Query Syntax no query for this command Returned Parameters none SYSTem COMMunicate LAN DESCription This command will set the user description The description is limited to 24 characters Command Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate LAN DESCription lt SRD gt Parameters lt SRD gt Example SYST COMM LAN DESC EVAL UNIT Query Syntax SYST COMM LAN DESC Returned Parameters
155. ccccccccssssseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesueeseeeeeeeessaaaeeess 5 72 Set Remote Programming Interface cccccceceeeeccceeeeeaeeseeeeeeeeeueeeeeeeeeeeeseaaaaeees 5 72 Protection Mask Enable Alarms cccccccssseececceeseeeeeceeeeeseeeseeaeeeesssaageeeessaas 5 74 Power Saving Control Sleep Mode XTR XG 1700 W Only 5 75 6 COMMUNICATIONS OPTIONS 1 eere enne nennen nn nnn nean ananas 6 1 INTRODUGTION mm 6 2 SETTING UP XG XTR 850 WATT MODELS eee 6 2 BASICS RP EE 6 2 Network Topology and Connection esses 6 5 Software InstallatlOFiS issu oxvae e tor tad edidi ed dac Cd een GR Dad dera CRACA TERRE n O 6 8 Configuring the Device Using Devicelnstaller sesseeessssssss 6 10 Terminal Configuration eeessssssesssseesseeseennn nennen nennen nennen nnn nnns 6 16 Advanced SCHON gis esietodesa tette uat e aaia ed IL casted titanic 6 24 Network Topology 1 Simple LAN cccccssseecececesseeeeeeeeseeeeseeaeeeeeseeaseeeeesseaaes 6 24 Network Topology 2 ENET and RS 485 BUS cccccccesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeesaaes 6 27 Troubleshooting for XG XTR 850W Model with ENET and or RS 485 COMMUMCAN OM sas vets T e m 6 30 SETTING UP XG XTR 1500 AND 1700 WATT MODELS 6 32 LOCAL AREA NETWORK LAN OPTION ccccscccseeteeeeeeeesest
156. ceccececeecceccecsensececeeeusneesensetenseess 4 9 Analog Programming With External Voltage SOUICE ccccccssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 9 Voltage Controlled Voltage APG Setup cccccccccccesccsessseeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeseaaeaeees 4 10 Voltage Controlled Current APG Setup cccccccccccessssseseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeesessaaaeeees 4 12 Resistive Controlled Voltage APG Setup cccccceeeceececeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseaaaeeeeeeeees 4 15 Resistive Controlled Current APG Setup esee 4 17 Voltage and Current Readback riesa a EE N 4 19 ISOLATED ANALOG PROGRAMMING MODE ISOL suus 4 20 AUX Output and Isolated Analog Programming ISOL Connector 4 20 Voltage Controlled Voltage ISOL Setup ec ccccecccssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeessaaeeeees 4 23 Voltage Controlled Current ISOL Setup 0 cccccccececseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeessaeaeeeeeees 4 25 Resistive Controlled Voltage ISOL Setup ccccccceeeececceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeesseeeseeeeeeees 4 28 Resistive Controlled Current ISOL Setup eeeeeesssesseeeeeernnnrnnrnnn 4 30 VOLTAGE AND CURRENT READBACK ISOLATED 2 cceseeceeeteeeeeeeeteneeeesteneeees 4 32 M370430 01 Rev C IX Contents 5 REMOTE OPERA VION wiaiiccresareccveccactessiensaceesccwaideteebinecacawedenntetestistannsaaxendeveuse 5 1 INTRODUCTION m 5 2 HARDWARE AND CONNECTION SETUP
157. cific functions to a known state that is independent of the past use history of the device See Table 3 9 Power Supply Default Settings on page 3 44 for details 2 Force the device into the OCIS state see IEEE 488 2 standard section 12 5 2 3 Force the device into the OQIS state see IEEE 488 2 standard section 12 5 3 The reset command explicitly shall NOT affect the following 1 The state of the IEEE 488 1 interface 2 The selected IEEE 488 1 address of the device 3 The Output Queue 4 The Standard Status Register Enable setting 5 The Standard Event Status Enable SESR setting 6 The Operation and Questionable SCPI status registers and their fan out registers 7 Calibration data that affects device specifications 8 The Protected User Data query response Commands RST 1SYSTem lt channel gt RESet 5 56 M370430 01 Rev C Remote Operation Clear All Status Registers Clear Status Command Clears all Event Registers including the Status Byte the Standard Event Status and the Error Queue Command ACLS STATus lt channel gt CLEar M370430 01 Rev C 0 97 Remote Operation SCPI Preset Status 5 58 Configures the status data structures to ensure that certain events are reported at a higher level through the status reporting mechanism These events are summarized in the mandatory structures the Operation Status Register and Questionable Status Register The PRESe
158. ck If there are four front mounting locations available then install four 10 24 screws Tighten the screws to a torque of 20 5 to 22 5 in Ibs If there is only one hole available on either side then the RM XG2 RM XTR2 rails are not installed correctly P D 0 70V ues D 4 M370430 01 Rev C M370430 01 Rev C Rack Mount Options and Installation Instructions Figure D 3 RM XG2 RM XTR2 Rack Rails D 5 Rack Mount Options and Installation Instructions Mounting Option B Manufactured Slides from Jonathan Engineered Solutions Jonathan Engineered Solutions offers a wide variety of manufactured slides to allow the easy installation and removal of the power supply assemblies into all rack sizes Follow these steps to find the Jonathan product that suits your needs To install a single power supply in an equipment rack 1 Find your rack depth D which is the distance between the front and back flanges See Figure D 4 Figure D 4 Finding Rack Depth D 6 M370430 01 Rev C Rack Mount Options and Installation Instructions 2 Select your rail type See Figure D 5 STANDARD FLANGED TYPE 1 TYPE 2 TYPE3 TYPE4 10 CSK 10THRU SQUARE 10 TAPPED HOLES HOLES HOLES HOLES Figure D 5 Selecting a Rail Type 3 Refer to Table 7 2 to select the correct Jonathan Engineered Solutions Jonathan slide part number for your rack depth and rail type Table 7 2 Part Numbers for Jonathan Manufactured Slides Rack Depth Jonath
159. cket port number The query format returns the port number set The default value is 5025 Command Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate LAN PORT lt NRF gt Parameters 0 65535 Example SYST COMM LAN PORT 5025 Query Syntax SYST COMM LAN PORT Returned Parameters lt NR1 gt SYSTem COMMunicate LAN MACAddress This command allows for reading out the MAC address This command can only be used to query the MAC address The MAC address is set at the factory and may not be changed Command Syntax oYSTem COMMunicate LAN MACAddress Parameters None Example SYST COMM LAN MACA Query Syntax SYST COMM LAN MACA Returned Parameters lt SRD gt M370430 01 Rev C 6 63 Communications Options LXI COMPLIANCE 6 64 The XG is compliant with LXI version 1 2 Class C For more information on the LXI standard please visit the LXI Consortium Home Page This section describes how certain features of LXI have been implemented in the XG power supply LAN Indicator LED The PGM LED on the front panel is used as the LAN indicator If there is no connection the LED is off If there 1s a connection the LED is on While the unit is attempting to make a connection the LED blinks This same LED also blinks when clicking Identify Device On on the Web interface to identify which power supply the user is communicating with LAN Reset In order to return to the factory default settings a LAN reset may be performed To do this 1 Se
160. command CAL OUT P ANAL CURR 8 Press the terminal keys or to reduce or increase the main output current value Adjust the main output current to 100 9 Press any key other than the or keys to exit from interactive calibration mode M370430 01 Rev C Calibration and Troubleshooting Non isolated Resistive Programming of Current Calibration Important For maximum accuracy at a specific APG level follow the calibration procedure again but use the intended operating resistance level in steps 2 and 3 To calibrate the non isolated resistive programming of current l M370430 01 Rev C Short the main output with a shunt Connect a multimeter to measure the voltage across the shunt Connect the 4 000 kQ resistor to the non isolated connector APG J1 one terminal to resistive programming of current J1 12 and voltage programming of current J1 10 and the other terminal to the common J1 7 Set the resistive APG level to 4 kQ The SCPI command is SYST COMM APR LEV CURR 4 Set the input source as Resistive Non Isolated for Current Programming The SCPI command is SYST REM SOUR CURR ARES Turn the main output to On by pressing the OUTPUT ENABLE Main button on the front panel or send the command OUTP ON The OUTPUT ENABLE Main button will illuminate Enter the interactive calibration mode by sending the SCPI command CAL OUTP ANAL CURR RES Press the terminal keys or to reduce or incre
161. connected CAPS NUM Capture Figure 6 20 HyperTerminal Connection Is Lt M370430 01 Rev C 6 17 Communications Options 2 Click New to create a new connection The Connection Description window appears See Figure 6 21 Connection Description E Figure 6 21 Connection Description Window 3 Enter the name of the connection and select the 1con 4 Click OK The new connection setup dialog box will appear Figure 6 22 6 18 M370430 01 Rev C Communications Options Connect To x lt TR ENET Enter details for the host that you want to call Host address 10 10 10 54 Fort number 10001 Connect using TRAP Winsock Figure 6 22 New Connection Dialog Box 5 In the Connect using box select TCP IP Winsock 6 Inthe Host address box enter the IP address obtained in step 14 of the section entitled Assigning an IP Address to the Power Supply Unit on page 6 12 7 n the Port number box enter 10001 as the value 8 Click OK To specify the terminal connection properties 1 Click Disconnect if necessary and click Properties in the main HyperTerminal window See Figure 6 23 M370430 01 Rev C 6 19 Communications Options Figure 6 23 Main Terminal Window 2 Inthe ENET Properties window click on the Settings tab See Figure 6 24 Figure 6 24 ENET Properties Window 6
162. controlled Non Isolated Voltage APG feature Calibrate the LT TCALSJbDrationm echang eel oUTPut Resistive og VOLTage RESistive ISOLated controlled Calibrate the I JCALibratron chanmnel ourPut Resistive Og CURRent RESistive controlled Non Isolated Current APG feature Calibrate the current analog programming system Calibrates the current analog programming system Calibrate the Resistive controlled voltage analog programming system Calibrates the Resistive controlled voltage analog programming system Calibrate the Resistive controlled current analog programming system lt NR1 gt nothing Yes for interactive mode NRI nothing Yes for interactive mode NRI nothing Yes for interactive mode lt NR1 gt nothing Yes for interactive mode NRI nothing Yes for interactive mode 99U9J9JOH PUBPWILWWOD dOS o 8H L0 0 T0Z IN Lo V Table A 4 SCPI Commands for Calibration Continued Calibrate the S TCALTbrationi chentel sOUTPut ANAL Resistive Og CURRent RESistive ISOLated controlled Isolated Current APG feature Get Input CALibration channel PARameter Calibration INPUE Parameters Get Output CALibratron schannel PARameter Calibration LOUTPUE Parameters Get Analog CALibration lt channel gt PARameter A Programming PRogram Calibration Parameters Calibrates the Resistive contro
163. d s for these instructions are OUTPut lt channel gt AUXiliary STATe Output Auto Start Mode Auto Restart The Auto Start mode establishes the state of the output of the power supply after recovery from a complete power cycle all front panel LEDs are not illuminated If Auto Start mode is set to On the power supply output will return to its previous value when the power supply is powered up again If Auto Start mode is set to Off the power supply output will remain off after the power supply is powered up again To change the Auto Start mode 1 Press and hold the OUTPUT ENABLE Main button for 1 second HS Un or AS GFF is displayed 2 Switch the Auto Start mode The SCPI command s for these instructions are OUTPut channel POWer STATe PowerON STATe 3 18 M370430 01 Rev C Local Operation Auxiliary Auto Start Mode The Auxiliary Auto Start mode determines the state of the auxiliary output after a complete power cycle all front panel LEDS are not illuminated With Auxiliary Auto Start mode turned to On the auxiliary output will be activated after the power supply is powered up again To define the Auxiliary Auto Start mode 1 Press and hold the OUTPUT ENABLE Aux button for 1 second HUHS Un or AUAS GFF is displayed 2 To change to status to On or Off press the OUTPUT ENABLE Aux button The SCPI command s for these instructions are OUTPut lt channel gt AUXiliary Powe
164. d notifies AMETEK in writing of any defect in material or workmanship within the applicable warranty period stated above then AMETEK may at its option repair or replace the Product or issue a credit note for the defective Product or provide the Buyer with replacement parts for the Product The Buyer will at its expense return the defective Product or parts thereof to AMETEK in accordance with the return procedure specified below AMETEK will at its expense deliver the repaired or replaced Product or parts to the Buyer Any warranty of AMETEK will not apply if the Buyer is in default under the Purchase Order Agreement or where the Product or any part thereof e is damaged by misuse accident negligence or failure to maintain the same as specified or required by AMETEK e is damaged by modifications alterations or attachments thereto which are not authorized by AMETEK e is installed or operated contrary to the instructions of AMETEK e iS opened modified or disassembled in any way without AMETEK s consent or e is used in combination with items articles or materials not authorized by AMETEK The Buyer may not assert any claim that the Products are not in conformity with any warranty until the Buyer has made all payments to AMETEK provided for in the Purchase Order Agreement PRODUCT RETURN PROCEDURE 1 Request a Return Material Authorization RMA number from the repair facility must be done in the country in which it wa
165. d reloading the calibration parameters using these commands you can calibrate the unit for maximum accuracy for a specific load and then switch loads and load a calibration set that is accurate at maximum accuracy for the new load 1 25 Calibration and Troubleshooting Restore Factory Calibration To restore factory calibration use the SCPI command for returning the power supply to factory calibration settings The SCPI Command s for these instructions are CALibration RESTore Restore Default Calibration To restore default calibration unit gain and zero offset for all calibration parameters use the SCPI command for returning the power supply to default calibration settings This can be useful when recalibrating the unit to a specific load but causes ALL calibration values to return to default values All types of calibration must be done to restore the unit to fully functional condition It 1s strongly recommended that the calibration coefficients be saved before using this command See Storing and Loading Calibration Parameters on page 7 25 The SCPI Command s for these instructions are CALibration DEFault User Diagnostics 7 26 If your power supply is not performing as described in this Manual read through the procedures and checks in this chapter before calling your service technician These procedures are limited to operator level functions only They do not require cover off servicing of the unit
166. dels the current ripple is measured at 10 100 output voltage and full output current 9 When using remote sense the total of the load voltage and the load line drops must not exceed the rated output of the power supply For example for an XG 6 220 in an application with 1 V of load line loss 0 5 V Line the maximum available load voltage would be 6 1 5 V Note The unit may operate at higher output voltages than this but there is no guarantee that the power supply will meet performance specifications Ultimately the upper limit of the output voltage will be determined by internal circuitry of the power supply non adjustable 10 With rated resistive load 11 At 100 200 Vac input voltage and maximum output power Applies to all footnotes Programming and Readback RS 232 RS 485 USB built in GPIB Ethernet optional Specifications are guaranteed from 1 to 100 of the rated output voltage current and power AC Line Input Specifications for XG XTR 1500 Watt The input to the power supply requires the following input specifications Rated AC Input Voltage Frequency 100 240 Vac 47 63 Hz Operational AC Input Voltage Frequency 85 265 Vac continuous single phase 360 440 Hz 47 63 Hz single phase Input Current at 100 200 Vac 23 12 A Inrush Current 100 200 Vac Less than 50 A Power Factor Correction 0 99 100 200 Vac rated output power Contact factory for details regarding this mode of operation suoneoiyioedg
167. derations CAUTION Equipment damage Use properly rated diodes to protect the power supply from damage while driving inductive loads INDUCTIVE LOADS To prevent damage to the power supply from inductive kickback connect a diode rated at greater than the supply s output voltage and current across the output Connect the cathode to the positive output and the anode to return Where positive load transients such as back EMF from a motor may occur a second diode in series with the output is recommended to protect the power supply BLOCKING and FREE WHEELING DIODES The Peak Reverse Voltage ratings should be a minimum of 2 3 times the power supply maximum output voltage The Continuous Forward Current rating should be a minimum of 1 5 times the power supply maximum output current Heatsink may be required There also may be a need for higher voltage rated parts dependent on load circuit design and inductor values Connecting to the Load in Local Sensing Mode M370430 01 Rev C Connect the negative output terminal of one power supply to the positive output terminal of the next power supply See Figure 3 5 for a representation of series operation 3 47 Local Operation Figure 3 5 Series Operation 3 48 M370430 01 Rev C Local Operation Connecting to the Load in Remote Sensing Mode Connect the negative output terminal of one power supply to the positive output terminal of the next power supply Th
168. ding down the SET key This will allow the unit to boot without attempting to collect the IP settings You can then set the required IP values See IP Address above GWAdadress Gateway address setting A default gateway is a node a router on a computer network that serves as an access point to another network This value can be changed by using the command SYST COMM LAN GWAD address For example to set the gateway address to 192 168 1 1 use the command SYST COMM LAN GWAD 192 168 1 1 Any change to this value will NOT take effect until after power to the unit has been cycled 6 52 M370430 01 Rev C Communications Options HostBits Number of host bits as opposed to network bits in network mask A CIDR class C network uses 24 network bits and 8 host bits Class A 24 Class B 16 This value can be changed with the command SYST COMM LAN CLASS lt number gt As an example to set to Class A the command would be SYST COMM LAN CLASS 24 Note that many systems refer to an alternate description referred to as the subnet mask Some conversions from subnet mask to class are Subnet MaskClass 255 255 255 0 24 255 255 0 016 255 0 0 0 8 Any change to this value will NOT take effect until after power on the unit has been cycled Port No TCP remote port number This value must be set to 5025 SCPI to support the built in Web page This value can be changed with the port number command SYST COMM LAN PORT lt number gt Fo
169. ds Important When an alarm is cleared by using this method only the current highest precedence alarm is cleared If another alarm has occurred then this alarm will now become the highest precedence alarm and will begin blinking on the display 2 Repeat the alarm clearing until you have cleared all alarms Clearing a Flash Failure Alarm The Flash Failure alarm is the only exception for clearing alarms If a flash failure occurs at boot time it can only be cleared by a soft reset key combination press see Resetting the Power Supply on page3 43 or by power cycling the unit If a checksum error is detected when recalling a user slot no modification of settings will occur and an error will be pushed to the SCPI error queue The alarm will clear after a duration per the currently configured front panel timeout setting To clear a triggered alarm use one of the following methods Turn the power supply Off and then On e For failures that occur during a recall of user memory settings wait the duration of the currently configured front panel timeout e Press and hold the reset key combination Flash Fail ONLY See Resetting the Power Supply on page 3 43 The SCPI command s for these instructions are OUTPut channel PROTection CLEar 3 22 M370430 01 Rev C Local Operation Clearing Automatic Alarms Some alarms will clear automatically when the condition that caused the alarm is no longer present When an
170. e STATus lt channel gt STANdard ENABle Enable Register bits 255 gt lt ESE word gt Standard Event ESR Query the Standard Event Status Register STATus lt channel gt STANDard EVENt Status Register SERS Query 39U3131J34 PUCPWILWWOD dOS o 8H L0 0 T0Z IN grv Table A 1 IEEE 488 2 Commands Continued Display All Display all the SCPI SCPI command headers available Command on this device Headers Identification IDN oxoTem channel IDENtrIfy Query device identification Query string OPC Operation Complete Command M ien OR Recall a User Memory Setting Index 1 oxorem sohannel RECAll Setting See SAV below 5 e MCI BST Ir seYXoremlechannel BESet Resets all values to default state excluding calibration data save User SAV Save a User Memory Setting Settings SYSTem channel SAVE setting location Query Service SRE Service Request Enable Request STATus channel SREQuest ENABle Query Enable SRE Service Request Enable Enable Flags 0 STATus channel SREQuest ENABle Command 255 status enable Read Status TB Read the status byte Byte STATus lt channel gt SBYTe EVENt 39U313J34Y PUBPLWILUOD dOS 9rv O 9eH L0 0 Tv0ZE IN Table A 1 IEEE 488 2 Commands Continued Self Test TST TI 1SYSTem e channel sTEST Query Wait To WAI SYSTem channel WAIT Continue
171. e It is not possible to write for example CALibrat CURR LEV because the extra first node does not explicitly match the short or long form of the calibration node The command strings include punctuation While some punctuation is sent with the string other markings are used to identify different elements of the command syntax and are not sent with the string The following punctuation is sent with the command string e Colons separate command keywords from lower level keywords For example CAL CURR STAT e Blank spaces separate command keywords from parameter values For example CURR 0 1 e Commas separate parameters from each other when more than one parameter is sent in the same string For example CAL STAT OPE T IZS4 7 Semicolons separate multiple commands from the same subsystem This allows for greater efficiency For example CAL CURR LEV MIN VOLT LEV MIN is the same as typing CAL CURR LEV MIN CAL VOLT LEV MIN e Colons and semicolons can be used together to link commands from different subsystems For example CAL CURR LEV MIN MEAS CURR The short form is made up of 3 or 4 letters There can only be a absolute short or long form For example it is not possible to write CALibrat CURR LEV because the extra the first node does not match explicitly the short or long form of the calibration node A 4 M370430 01 Rev B SCPI Command Reference The following punctuation is not sent with the c
172. e use the first 2 octets 1n the above case 169 254 of the PC s IP address and set a unique value for the third and fourth octet as long as there are no conflicts with any other IP addresses other instruments on the same private network In this example 169 254 0 209 would work Note For private network configurations no Gateway address is required 0 0 0 0 M370430 01 Rev C 6 33 Communications Options AMETEK LXI DISCOVERY BROWSER The AMETEK LXI Discovery Browser is a software tool provided by AMETEK This tool can be used to automatically locate LXI compliant devices on your network This is especially helpful if any of them are using DHCP In this case the IP address of the device is not known at power up since it is being automatically set by the network s DHCP server The AMETEK LXI Discovery Browser will scan the network and return the IP addresses of any attached LXI compliant devices Installing the AMETEK LXI Discovery Browser The software for the XTR can be downloaded from the AMETEK Programmable Power website 1 Goto the folder for LXI Discovery Browser and ENet Test Utility 2 From there go to the EVXIBrowse directory 3 Goto the Disk1 directory 4 n the Disk1 select the Setup application A window similar to the following figure should appear o Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for AMETEK LXI Discovery Browser The InstallShield R Wizard will install AMETEK LXI Discovery Browser
173. e current operating mode the foldback timer will begin counting immediately after the delay time has been set Resetting Activated Foldback Protection To reset activated and latched foldback protection press and hold the rotary Adjust Enter control for approximately 3 seconds The SCPI command s for these instructions are OUTPut channel PROTection CLEar M370430 01 Rev C 3 2 Local Operation Using Over Voltage Protection OVP 3 28 The OVP circuit protects the load in the event of an analog programming error an incorrect voltage control adjustment or a power supply failure The OVP circuit monitors the output voltage at the output of the power supply and will disable the output whenever a preset voltage set point is exceeded You can set the preset voltage trip point by using the 9 position mode control on the front panel or via one of the remote programming interfaces To prevent accidental tripping of the OVP while setting up the firmware will prevent the OVP set point from being less than 105 of the voltage set point when in local set point control mode When the XG XTR is in VAP mode for defining voltage set point the set point limitation will be based on the VAP input signal level The user should note it is possible to trip OVP in this mode if the OVP is configured when the analog programming source is off When the user attempts to configure an OVP setpoint that is less than 105 of the voltage set poin
174. e exact desired value for the setting has been selected press the rotary Adjust Enter control to commit the value to the unit Table 3 4 Select and Set from the Front Panel 9 Positions on the Mode Turning the rotary Adjust Enter Pressing the rotary Adjust Control Knob control lets you Enter control lets you VOLTS Voltage Select the voltage set point in coarse Set the value selected and cycle Programming or fine adjustment modes See to the next setting Automatic Mode Crossover on page 3 13 AMPS Current Programming Select the current set point in coarse or fine adjustment modes See Constant Current Mode Operation on page 3 13 FLD Foldback select Foldback option CC CV or Set the value selected and cycle none See Setting Foldback Mode to the next setting on page 3 26 Set the value selected and cycle to the next setting PRT Protection Select the OVP set point see Set the value selected and cycle page 3 29 Select the UVP set point to the next setting see page 3 31 Select OTP temperature and Shutdown see page 3 32 SAV Save User Preset Select the user setting memory Save user setting memory location See Saving User Setting values Memory Locations on page 3 40 RCL Recall User Preset Select the user setting memory Load user setting memory location See Recalling User Setting values into the power supply Memory Locations on page 3 41 M370430 01 Rev C 3 3
175. e for reference only I Instructions for 1500 Watt and 1700 Watt models with the MEB option begin on page 6 32 The information presented here will guide you in making the connections necessary to control your power supply remotely SETTING UP XG XTR 850 WATT MODELS Basics This section is intended for network administrators responsible for the configuration and maintenance of devices on the network It provides information for connecting and configuring the power supply with the MEA option in earlier models Important If using the MEB version of the LAN interface please refer to the section on LOCAL AREA NETWORK LAN OPTION on page 6 32 This section describes the equipment and procedures to fully set up the simplest configuration of an XG XTR 850W unit with the ENET option and a single computer Important The remote interface that was previously configured when the local lock setting was activated will still be available for remote control while the front panel is locked System Requirements Accessories 6 2 Windows XP Windows 2000 Windows NT4 0 with service pack 6 0a or later Windows ME or Windows 98 Internet Explorer 5 01 or later 30 MB hard drive space e 64 MB RAM Power supply with ENET port e ENET RJ 45 and RJ 45 STP Cat 5 cross cable PC Installation CD M370430 01 RevC Communications Options Communication Cable M370430 01 Rev C Use a standard RJ 45 see Figure 6 1 and RJ
176. e more positive supply s positive sense line should connect to the positive terminal of the load or distribution point Its return sense line should connect to the connection between the two units at the same spot as the negative supply s positive sense line The return sense line of the negative supply should be connected to the return of the load See Figure 3 6 CAUTION Equipment damage Do not connect sense lines through relays Figure 3 6 Load Connections in Remote Sensing Mode M370430 01 Rev C 3 49 Local Operation Configuring Multiple Supplies for Current Sharing Operation APG Method Up to four power supplies can be connected in parallel to increase the output current One of the units will operate as the master unit and the remaining units will operate as slave units controlled by the master unit The master unit uses the analog programming lines to set the output voltages and currents of the slave units to match its output In remote digital operation only the master unit can be programmed remotely while the slave units that are connected remotely will only provide voltage current and status readback information In APG current sharing topologies only the master unit can be programmed using any of the input methods front panel remote digital or analog programming control The slave unit s voltage and current output s are determined by the master unit through the REF I input to each slave unit The readback
177. e this wizard click Finish Finish _ Cancel Figure 5 9 Completing the New Hardware Wizard This completes the first part of the installation during which the USB to serial converter is installed The second part involves the installation of a serial port which should follow automatically once the converter installation is complete Installation of the serial port does not require any user intervention Verifying Installation Once the installation of the serial port has completed verify that the installation has been successful by looking under Device Manager of the System Properties screen The device should have installed as a USB Serial Port COMx attached to USB High Speed Serial Converter M370430 01 Rev C 5 11 Remote Operation To verify that the device has been installed 1 In Control Panel go to System click the Hardware tab and click on Device Manager 2 On the View menu select Devices by Type To change the virtual COM port properties select the USB Serial Port and then Click Properties This allows you to change serial port properties such as data rate bps and data bits You are also able to change the COM port which is assigned to your device 4 Click the Port Settings tab then click Advanced L Device Manager a E x Fik Acton view Help e js 2zeje m xm E48 PC SHMUEL 2M Adverced Corfiguration and Power Intd PER 7 Microsoft ACPI Comcliant System i ACPI Fixed Feature Burto
178. e to deactivate the APG voltage mode Quick Tip ias The SCPI commands for these instructions are ee Z SYSTem lt channe l gt REMote SOURce VOLTage lt LOCal page 5 1 i AVOLtage IAVoltage ARESistive IAResistive gt SYSTem channel COMMunicate APRogram LEVel CURRent ISOlated MEASure channel SCALar APRogram CURRent DC M370430 01 Rev C 4 13 Analog Programming APG and Isolated Analog Programming ISOL Analog Programming With External Resistor The pin numbers are described in Table 4 3 on page 4 6 APG Connector Figure 4 7 Programming Output Current using an External Resistor 4 14 M370430 01 Rev C Analog Programming APG and Isolated Analog Programming ISOL Resistive Controlled Voltage APG Setup To activate APG voltage mode using an external resistor 1 Turn the 9 position mode control to the VAP position or press the rotary Adjust Enter control if the mode control is already at the VAP position URPr is displayed on the output voltage display 2 Turn the rotary Adjust Enter control to select rn I amp i resistor source from non isolated connector 3 Press the rotary Adjust Enter control to commit the selected mode LE U is displayed on the output voltage display 4 Select the input source level using the rotary Adjust Enter control 5 Once the desired level has been selected press the rotary Adjust Enter control to commit the change The display will return
179. e to designer Available to designer Available to designer INSTrument Summary PROGram Running Not Used Standard Event Status Register Available to designer Available to designer Operation Complete Available to designer Request Control Query Error Device Dependent Error Execution Error Command Error User Request Power On MAV 1 FA SY RQS Error Event Queue Status Byte 0 1 B X 1 c i re 5 1T Figure 5 18 SCPI Status Reporting Model 5 30 M370430 01 Rev C Remote Operation Status Registers Model from IEEE 488 2 The IEEE 488 2 registers shown in the bottom rectangle of Figure 5 16 follow the IEEE 488 2 model for status registers The IEEE 488 2 register only has enable registers for masking the summary bits Figure 5 19 shows the details on the relationship between the mask enable registers and the summary bits Sections describing the bits for both registers will follow Figure 5 19 Error Event Queue Status Flag QUEStionable SCPI Register Summary Bit OPERational SCPI Register Summary Bit Standard Event Status Register NOOB QO N O SERS Enable NOOB O N O Figure 5 19 IEEE 488 2 Register Model M370430 01 Rev C Status Byte Register Status Byte Enable Register NOOB QO N O Summary 5 31 Remote Operation Status Byte The Status byte register contains the STB and
180. e you clear it Table 3 4 Alarm Order of Precedence Alarm Precedence Output Maskable Display Latch AC Fail l Im Yes MN AC FA a Over Temperature Protection OTP Z Hu O7IIIIpo Over Temperature Protection OTP Slave OT7IIIIpo 1700 Watt only Fan UNE ANN NE cl ice ee ree DAY Tipo hes i Iv Ao Over Voltage Protection OVP No UuP Pro Over Current Protection OCP _ e R E LF Pro Foldback Eo Yes Fid Pro External Shutdown 10 Mo Ys Sd POL Under Voltage Protection UVP 11 Lowest No Yes J JUP Pro Current Loop Protection 12 M a AOOTI Flash Checksum Failure FLA FAIL 1 The Flash Checksum Failure alarms are an exception as id can J occur during boot up or recalling a user setting slot If a checksum error is detected when recalling a user slot no mod ification of settings will occur and an error will be pushed to the SCPI error queue If a checksum occurs at boot up then this checksum error can be cleared by doing a soft reset or by power cycling the unit M370430 01 Rev C 3 21 Local Operation Clearing Alarms Clearing Triggered and Manual Alarms To clear a triggered alarm use one of the following methods Turn the power supply Off and then On e Press and hold the rotary Adjust Enter control for 3 seconds To clear a manual alarm 1 Press and hold the rotary Adjust Enter control for 3 seconds The Air Lir message will be displayed on the front panel for a few secon
181. ect the Setup application A window similar to the following diagram should appear Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for AMETEK EnetTest Utility The InstallShield R Wizard will install AMETEK EnetTest Utility on your computer To continue dick Next WARNING This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties 6 42 M370430 01 Rev C Communications Options 5 Click Next and view any last minute release information in the README file Readme Information Please read the following readme information carefully Enet Test Utility Distribution disk AMETEK README rtf file AMETEK Programmable Power 1998 2010 InstallShield M370430 01 Rev C 6 43 Communications Options 6 Click Next which takes you to the Customer Information window Please enter your information User Mame customer Organization Ametek Install this application for Anyone who uses this computer all users Only for me customer InstallShield 7 Enter your user name and organization as well as your installation preference and then click Next 6 44 M370430 01 Rev C Communications Options 8 Either accept the automatic Destination Folder by clicking Next or choose another Destination Folder by clicking the Change button and navigating to your preferred installation directory once selected click Next Click Next to install to this folder or dick Change to install to a different folder A Inst
182. ect to change without notice C O o A8Y L0 0 T0Z IN Electrical Specifications for XG XTR Family 850 W Table C 1 Models Output Ratings Output Voltage Output Current Output Power Line Regulation Voltage 0 005 of rated output voltage 2 mV Current 0 01 of rated output current 1mA Load Regulation Voltage 0 005 of rated output voltage 2 mV Current 0 02 of rated output current 4 mA Output Ripple rms 300 kHz Voltage Current Output Noise p p 20 MHz Voltage Maximum Recommended Remote Sense Line Drop Compensation per Line Up prog Response Time 0 Vmax Down prog Response Time Full Load Down prog Response Time No Load Over Voltage Trip Point XG XTR 850 Watt Electrical Specifications for 6 V to 600 V Models 6 110 8 100 12 70 20 42 33 25 40 21 60 14 80 10 5 100 8 5 150 5 6 300 2 8 600 1 4 12 V 20 V 33 V 40 V 60 V 80 V 100 V 150 V 300 V 600 V 110 A 100 A 70 A 42 A 25A 21A I4 A 10 5 A 8 5 A 5 6 A 2 8 A 1 4 A 670 W 810 W 850 W 850 W 835 W 850 W 850 W 850 W 860 W 850 W 850 W 850 W 1 2 3 mV 2 4 mV 2 6 mV 3 0mV 13 7 mV 4 mV 5mV 9 5 mV 17 mV 32 mV 12 mA 11 mA 8 mA 52mA 3 5 mA 3 mA 2 1 mA 1 9 mA 1 6 mA 1 3 mA 1 1 mA 2 3 mV 2 4 mV 2 6 mV 3 0 mV 13 7 mV 4 mV 5 mV 9 5 mV 17 mV 32 mV 26 mA 24 mA 18 mA 12 4mA 9 mA 8 2 mA 6 8 mA 6 1 mA 5 7 mA 5 mA 4 6 mA 4 3 mA 8 mV 8 mV 8 mV 8 mV 8 mV 8 mV 8 mV 8 mV 8 mV 10 mV 25 mV 50 mV 200 mA 180 mA 120mA
183. ecting and Cleaning on page 2 3 2 Install Install the power supply Step 2 Location and Mounting on benchtop or rack mount page 2 4 Ensure adequate ventilation 3 Connect Input Connect AC input power Step 3 Connecting AC Input Power Power on page 2 5 4 Select Wires Select wires that are correctly Step 4 Selecting Load Wires on rated for the maximum DC page 2 8 output current 5 Test Perform functional tests for Step 5 Performing Functional voltage mode operation current Tests on page 2 10 mode operation and front panel controls 6 Connect Loads Connect the load wires to the Step 6 Connecting Loads on DC output page 2 12 7 Connect Remote Connect remote sensing Step 7 Connecting Remote Sensing if connectors on power supply to Sensing on page 2 15 required load 2 2 M370430 01 Rev C Installation Step 1 Inspecting and Cleaning Initial Inspection When you first receive your unit perform a physical check 1 Inspect the unit for any scratches and cracks broken switches connectors or displays 2 Ensure that the packing box contains the 7 5 foot 2 5 m power cord supplied with the XG XTR 850 W model only 3 Ifyou see external damage or suspect internal damage contact the carrier immediately Periodic Cleaning The power supply only requires periodic cleaning not routine servicing Whenever a unit is removed from operation clean the metal surfaces w
184. ending and receiving text could be used in its place Consult your GPIB card manufacturer to see if they provide an equivalent program M370430 01 Rev C Remote Operation X GPIBO PCI GPIB Measurement amp Automation Explorer File Edit View Tools Help Configuration be save gd Revert A Restore Defaults 4 Scan for Instruments E Interactive Control B NI Spy GPIe Analyzer xP Hide Help E 9 My System GPIB Interface Properties esc ral Al a Es ial Data Neighborhood Name Value B Devices and Interfaces GPIB m GPIBO PCI GPIB m Interface Information Interface Instrument 0 GPIB Hardware Model PCI GPIB Basics NIPCI 6250 Devi Serial Number 00684844 Use the drop Ha Network Devices IP Address Not Applicable down lists Y Miscellaneous VISA Resources Mone ratore General Settings and text boxes PXI PXI System Unidentified to change the GPIB Interface ID GPIBO v GPIB board 7 Serial amp Parallel settings Select 5 42 Scales Primary Address 0 v Save vhen the G Software Secondary Address None v aa fi IVI Drivers System Controller Revert to go back to the H Remote Systems I O Timeout 13 10sec v previous Ea settings You Autopolling can also use 3 a A the Restore Termination Settings Datfaults Send EOI at End of Write button to change the Terminate Read on EOS F board settings to a standard EOS By
185. eneeseeesanes 6 32 Media Access Control MAC Address ccccccccseeeeececceeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeseeeeeeeeeeaaas 6 32 Communication Configuration sseeeeesseesssssseeeee enne enne nnne nnns 6 32 EAMG ORME CIO IM aae dus eemaenitod tenetis umm S cCu Sram uet S unte edat e mevadtan mette E 6 32 DIreCHtOsP C COMMeCHON T TT TUI TET 6 33 Private Network Connecllon sce avec o ea ts eos ve eked 6 33 AMETEKEXIDISGOVERY BROWSER roe bep abba e veran c boc leti da 6 34 M370430 01 Rev C xi Contents xii Installing the AMETEK LXI Discovery Browser ccccsssceeeeseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeesnaaees 6 34 Using the AMETEK LXI Discovery Browser cccccccseeeeeeecaeeeeeeesaeeeeeesenaaees 6 41 AMETE ENED TESTU DY 2x estate ista a nieve verre fusa Detox 6 42 Installing the AMETEK EnetTest Utility eeeeeeeeereees 6 42 Using the AMETEK Ethernet Test Utility esses 6 48 SETTING EAINJAARAMETEBOSusduishar iib s tuor ne Rb uta mta P wisi wr MPUR USE 6 49 Setting LAN Parameters via Ethernet ccccccccccececseesseeeceeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeeees 6 49 Setting LAN Parameters via Serial or USB Port sseseeesssssse 6 49 Setting LAN Parameters via Web Interface ccccccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeaeees 6 50 CONNECTING TO A NETWORK eeeseeeeeeennnennm enne 6 54 Connecting with PC on Same Side of Router as Power S
186. ent APG mode 3 Press the rotary Adjust Enter control to select the APG mode The output voltage display should read LE U and the output current display will display APG level 4 Press the rotary Adjust Enter control to return to normal mode 5 Ifthe APG mode was modified in step 2 execute the procedure to deactivate the APG voltage mode Quick Tip palos The SCPI commands for these instructions are pid dices eee SYSTem channel REMote SOURce VOLTage LOCal page 5 1 AVOLtage IAVoltage ARESistive IAResistive SYSTem channel COMMunicate APRogram LEVel VOLTage ISOlated MEASure channel SCALar APRogram VOLTage DC M370430 01 Rev C 4 11 Analog Programming APG and Isolated Analog Programming ISOL Voltage Controlled Current APG Setup Activating APG Current Mode To activate APG current mode using an external voltage source l Turn the 9 position mode control to the CAP position or press the rotary Adjust Enter control if the mode control is already at the CAP position LAPr is displayed on the output voltage display Turn the rotary Adjust Enter control to select source Un 15 Voltage source from non isolated connector Press the rotary Adjust Enter control to commit the selected mode LE L is displayed on the output voltage display Select the input source level using the rotary Adjust Enter control Once the desired level has been selected press the rotary Adjust
187. er Set STATus lt channel gt QUEStionable Questionable PTRansition Status Positive Transition Register Restores the configuration of the SCPI status registers to known reporting conditions IE Transition registers and enable register See Status Reporting in SCPI on page 5 29 for more details Query the Questionable Status Register Access the Questionable Status Register Query the Questionable Status Register Condition Access the Questionable Negative Trans Filter Register See Table 5 15 on page 5 49 Access the Questionable Positive Trans Filter Register See Table 5 15 on page 5 49 Yes lt Transition Flags 0 65535 7 Transition Flags 0 65535 7 99U9J9J8H pugululO dOS co V o 9eH LO 08v0 EN Query Questionable Status Temperature Condition Register Set Questionable Status Temperature Enable Register STATus channel QU UEStionable TEMPerature CONDition STATus channel QU UEStionable TEMPerature ENABle Query the Questionable Temp Conditions Register See Table 5 15 on page 5 49 Access the Questionable Enable Flags Temp Enable Register See 0 65535 Table 5 15 on page 5 49 99U9J9JoH pueululo2 dOS o 8H L0 0 T0Z IN ce V Table A 10 Status Commands Continued Query STATus channel QUEStionable Questionable TEMPerature EVENt Status Temperature Event Register Set
188. er to user manual of you communication card before wiring M370430 01 Rev C cable Table 5 5 Pin Table 5 6 DB 9 Pinouts Name Description Ground No connection RXD Twisted RXD Transmit data pair C No connection RJ 45 Plug Pinouts Name Description No connection Ground No connection GND ss DB 9 connector on PC Figure 5 5 RS 485 Communication Cable with DB 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RJ 45 plug o Remote Operation RS 485 Communication Cable with Two RJ 45s Use the top connector of the two 8 pin RJ 45 jacks as shown in Figure 5 1 to connect to the RS 485 remote interface Communication cable with two RJ 45 shielded connectors see Figure 5 3 connecting the master unit to the slave unit The cable length should be 9 84 feet 3 m or longer The pinouts for the RJ 45 plug on the master unit are the same as described in Table 5 7 Table 5 7 RJ 45 Plug on Slave Unit Pin Name Description 1 2 NC No connection 3 RXD Twisted 7 GND Ground 8 No connection lt J 0 01 O N 1 2 d 4 o 6 7 8 Master unit J6 Slave unit J4 Figure 5 6 RS 485 Communication Cable from Master to Slave Unit Completing the Setup To complete the setup Configure the XG XTR to use the 485 remote interface and setup the terminal that will be used on the connected PC See sections entitled Selecting the Appropriate Communication Port on page 5 24 and Terminal Configurat
189. eration when used in conjunction with the OVP setting The UVP range is variable from 0 V to OVPspr 10 The UVP is a protection that becomes active after the output is enabled and a period of time has passed to allow the output to reach its set point value before the UVP protection begins monitoring As with OVP if the voltage set point is determined by analog control VAP and the voltage strays to within 5 of the UVP set point then UVP Safe will trigger to warn the user that they are about to trigger the UVP alarm The period of time before the UVP monitoring is active after the output is enabled is determined by the rise time delay for the model as listed in Table C 2 Remote Operation on page C 8on the row called Up prog Response Time 0 Vmax Since the rise time is based on a purely resistive load the user should be aware that UVP triggering might be possible in capacitive or rectifier loads due to the rise time being longer In these cases it is recommended that the user mask the UVP alarm until the rise time has elapsed and then unmask the alarm to allow UVP protection to be enabled during operation 3 30 M370430 01 Rev C Local Operation Defining the UVP Set Point To define the UVP set point 1 Turn the power supply On 2 Set the output to the desired voltage 3 Turn the 9 position mode control to the PRT position Fro UUP is displayed 4 Turn the rotary Adjust Enter control until Pro UUP is displayed 5 Press
190. eue is not empty the error queue bit in the Status register will be set Querying For the Errors 5 54 Executing a query of the event queue will respond with the oldest error currently on the queue This error is removed The response format is discussed in the error event queue description section Command SYSTem ERRor EVENt M370430 01 Rev C Remote Operation Examples SYST ERR SYST ERR EVENT Responses might be ep syntax S ror 0 Nog JEEEYOIRT Querying For the Error Code Only It is possible to query for only the error code When querying the error code only the response will be the numeric error code only no additional description will be given The error queried will be removed from the queue Command 1SYSTem ERRor CODE EVENt Example SYISTIERR CODE SYST ERR CODE EVENT Responses might be T02 0 Querying For the Number of Errors in the Queue To query the device for the number of errors currently stored in the error queue you should use the following command Command 1SYSTem ERRor COUNt Example SYST ERR COUN Response might be 3 M370430 01 Rev C 9 95 Remote Operation Reset Command The Reset command performs a device reset The Reset command is the third level of reset in a three level reset strategy set out in IEEE 488 2 see IEEE 488 2 standard section 17 1 2 The Reset command shall do the following 1 Set the device spe
191. evel of indentation presents a branch The command to execute can then be found by following the tree from the root or farthest left node all the way down to the leaf node For example to do the analog isolated programming command start at the CA Libration root node go through the OUTPut node and then move down past the VOL Tage and CURRent nodes which appear at that level to the ANALog node and then move through the optional VOL Tage node to the ISOLated node Ihus the command would then be CALibration OUTPut ANALog VOLTage ISOLated All commands can be formed by looking at this tree and taking the unique path from the root node to the leaf node Table A 1 on page A 14 shows all the commands fully formed with parameters CALibration PARameter APRogram ENP OUTPut INPUT ANALog VOLTage CURRent OUTPut VOLTage CURRent MONitor VOLTage ISOLated CURRent ISOLated ANALOSg VOLTage M370430 01 Rev B ISOLated RESistive ISOLated CURRent ISOLated RESistive ISOLated VOLTage PROTection L OVER RESTore DEFault INITiate IMMediate MEASure AProgram VOLTage DC ISOLated DC CURRent DC ISOLated DC SCALar VOLTage DC CURRent DC OUTPut PROTection CLEar gt FOLDback MODE DELY M370430 01 Rev C SCPI Command Reference A 9 SCPI Command Reference LATCH
192. from interactive calibration mode Calibration and Troubleshooting Isolated Voltage Programming of Voltage Calibration Important For maximum accuracy at a specific APG level follow the calibration procedure again but use the intended operating voltage level in step 3 To calibrate the isolated voltage programming of voltage l 2 7 18 Disconnect the load and connect the voltmeter to the output Connect the input voltage source to the Isolated connector J3 3 and J3 6 Set the Voltage APG level to 4 V The SCPI command 1s SYST COMM APR LEV 4 Set the input source voltage to 4 000 V Set the input source as Voltage Isolated for Voltage The SCPI command is SYST REM SOUR AVOL Turn the main output to On by pressing the OUTPUT ENABLE Main button on the front panel or send the command OUTP ON The OUTPUT ENABLE Main button will illuminate Enter the interactive calibration mode by sending the SCPI command CAL OUTP ANAL ISOL Press on the terminal keys or to reduce or increase the main output voltage value Adjust the main output voltage to 100 Press any key other than the or keys to exit from interactive calibration mode M370430 01 Rev C Calibration and Troubleshooting Isolated Resistive Programming of Voltage Calibration Important For maximum accuracy at a specific APG level follow the calibration procedure again but use the intended operating resistance level in step 3 To calibra
193. g the 9 Position Mode Control The 9 position mode control is used with the rotary Adjust Enter control to configure settings in local operation See Figure 1 2 Front Panel Display and Controls on page 1 6for location of the front panel features Using the 9 position mode control select one of nine modes VOLTS AMPS FLD PRT SAV RCL CAP and VAP See Figure 3 1 and Table 3 1 for detailed information on the nine modes VOLTS POM AMES VAP PRT RCL SAV Figure 3 1 9 Position Mode Control Using the Rotary Adjust Enter Control The rotary Adjust Enter control is used to change settings and set the value selected The front panel displays information on the output voltage and output current displays Each display has a maximum of four characters that are made up of 7 segments 3 2 M370430 01 RevC Local Operation Coarse and Fine Adjustment Modes The coarse and fine adjustment modes are used for setting the voltage and current set points OVP and UVP settings Coarse adjustment When using local operation to set the current and voltage set points use mode the coarse adjustment mode default followed by the fine adjustment mode see next The coarse adjustment mode quickly adjusts the settings in large increments to reach the desired value Fine adjustment Pressing the rotary Adjust Enter control to change the mode to fine mode adjustment mode provides the ability to manipulate the last significant digit Once th
194. ge ISOLated CURRent ISOLated MCHanne ll ADDRESS PON VOLT CURR ENA VOLT CURR SAVE SRECaL VERS10n ERROT NEXT CODE NEXT COUNt HELP HEADers USXNDTSx LEGacy M370430 01 Rev C SCPI Command Reference A 13 VL V d 34 L0 0 T0Z IN SCPI Command Summary The SCPI commands supported by this programmable power supply are described in the tables in the remainder of this section These tables use the following column headings e Function The commonly used name for the function e SCPI Command The full command in long form Description Explains what the command does or what is affected by it Query Indicates whether the unit supports a query version of the listed command N A indicates Not applicable The command has no query form and will respond with an error if queried Table A 1 IEEE 488 2 Commands Parameter and SCPI Command Description Range Select Address ADR Select the power supply unit lt Address 1 30 gt to communicate with Clear Status teba ie St Alws lt channel gt Chlbar Clears all the status data structures Query the Error ERR Query the Error Queue for the Queue oldest error event Standard Event ESE Query the Standard Event Status Enable STATus lt channel gt STANdard ENABle Status Enable register Query settings Standard Event ESE Set the Standard Event Status Enable Flags 0 Status Enabl
195. ge display 2 Turn the rotary Adjust Enter control to select Un 5 voltage source from non isolated connector 3 Press the rotary Adjust Enter control to commit the selected mode LE is displayed on the output voltage display 4 Once the desired level has been selected press the rotary Adjust Enter control to commit the change The display will return to the normal display Deactivating APG Voltage Mode To deactivate the APG voltage mode 1 Turn the 9 position mode control to the VAP position or press the rotary Adjust Enter control if the mode control is already at the VAP position 2 UHPr is displayed on the output voltage display 3 Turn the rotary Adjust Enter control to select nanE 4 Press the rotary Adjust Enter control to commit the change The display will return to the normal display 4 10 M370430 01 Rev C Analog Programming APG and Isolated Analog Programming ISOL Query for Analog Voltage Input Level To query for analog voltage input level from non isolated input 1 Turn the 9 position mode control to the VAP position or press the rotary Adjust Enter control if the mode control is already at the VAP position LIHP r is displayed on the output voltage display 2 Ifthe mode is currently nant then select any other APG mode If this step is done be sure to restore the APG setting to nanE when the operation is complete Otherwise do not rotate the rotary Adjust Enter control to keep the curr
196. h 2 Front panel display See Figure 1 2 for details 3 Air Intake Vents M370430 01 Rev C 1 5 Introduction Front Panel Display and Controls Sorensen AMETEK Figure 1 2 Front Panel Display and Controls Item Ol cool Oo Ul BI wl NI O 1 6 Description Rotary Adjust Enter control Constant Voltage CV Mode LED green Model Identification Label Output Voltage Display Constant Current CC Mode LED green Output Current Display Alarm Indicator LED red OUTPUT ENABLE Main button OUTPUT ENABLE Aux button 9 Position Mode Control For detailed information see Configuring Settings from the Front Panel on page 3 2 M370430 01 Rev C Rear Panel Connectors on 850 Watt Models E p ABU BI comm D oo Figure 1 5 XG XTR 850 Watt Units 300 V to 600 V Models M370430 01 Rev C Introduction Introduction Item 1 3 J2 4 J4 5 6 71 8 3 9 J5 10 J6 11 12 1 8 Description 6 V 40 V Models DC Output Terminal Positive 60 V 150 V Models DC Output Connectors Positive 6 5 mm hole diameter 300 V 600 V Models DC Output Connectors Positive 6 5 mm hole diameter 6 V 40 V Models DC Output Terminal Negative 60 V 150 V Models DC Output Connectors Negative 6 5 mm hole diameter 300 V 600 V Models DC Output Connectors Negative 6 5 mm hole diameter Ethernet ENET or GPIB Connector optional RS 232 RS 485 Connector In Port A
197. hannel RECord STARt PROGram lt channel gt RECord STOP Important Ifthe start recording command is executed then any previously stored Auto Sequence program is deleted For example PROG STAR VOLT 12 OUTP ON PROG DWEL 60 SOUTP OFF OUTP ON OUTP OFF M370430 01 Rev C 5 63 Remote Operation PROG DWEL 0 PROG STOP This program will send a 12 V square wave with 120 seconds 50 duty cycle When the program is finished the dwell time is restored to 0 seconds Saving an Auto Sequence Program to File The following procedure indicates how to save an Auto Sequence program to a text file on the attached PC To save an Auto Sequence Program to a file l Start the text capture by selecting Transfer gt Capture Text from the Hyper Terminal program Set the location and name of the auto sequence to be captured Click the Start button Execute a program read back by sending PROG channel READ Stop the text capture by selecting Transfer Capture Text gt Stop from the Hyper Terminal program Using any text editor open the file which you captured the Auto Sequence program to Remove the first line which should read PROG channel READ and the first blank line This makes the first line of the program the first line of the file Save the file and exit the text editor The Auto Sequence program has now been stored and can be sent to any unit See Reloading an Auto
198. he AMETEK LXI Discovery Browser may be useful in this step to determine the power supply s IP Address For example the following diagram shows the AMETEK LXI Web Browser on the left and the parameters properly filled out on AMETEK Ethernet Test Utility on the right SN 0937402669 2 10 Clear IP Address 192 168 1 100 2010 AMETEK Programmable Power Inc Refresh Host 1921681101 v Pot Conrad L j U C ONP In this case the AMETEK LXI Discovery Browser was used to locate the power supply and determine that its address is at 192 168 1 101 This address was entered into the HOST field of the EnetTest Utility M370430 01 Rev C Communications Options With the Host and Port fields of the Ethernet Test Utility set interaction with the power supply through SCPI commands can begin as the following figure shows AMETEKXI 33 0 50 0 5N 0937402669 2 70 06 7 7 10 outp stat outp stat an outp stat Clear Host 1192 168 1 101 Port i Connect SETTING LAN PARAMETERS There are three ways to set the required LAN information on the power source through the Ethernet connection through the serial or USB port or through the Web interface Setting LAN Parameters via Ethernet Use the GetAssignIPAddress exe Windows utility program that is distributed on the CD ROM with every power source This utility uses the network connection to set parameters on the power source therefore the power
199. he FLD position 2 PAS XIT is displayed on the output voltage display and the output current display shows the Constant Power mode 3 Turn the rotary Adjust Enter control until vove is displayed in the output current display 4 Press the rotary Adjust Enter control to commit the setting once the desiredvalue has been set 5 The green FLD LED will turn off and the display will return to the normal display mode The SCPI command s for these instructions are SOURce channel POWer MODe STATe SQURCce channel POWer sLEVel 3 20 M370430 01 Rev C Local Operation Alarms and Errors Several conditions can cause alarms in the XG XTR Some conditions are From user configurable features Controlled in hardware and will trigger regardless of configuration All alarms with the exception of the Fan alarm will result in the output of the power supply being disabled The Fan alarm does not affect the output When an alarm is triggered the appropriate alarm message will begin blinking on the display and the Alarm LED will be illuminated It is possible that more than one alarm will trigger at the same time When this occurs the alarm with the highest precedence will blink on the display Table 3 4 lists the precedence of alarms If the alarm is cleared and the event which caused the alarm has not been corrected then the alarm may trigger again immediately Fix the reason for the alarm befor
200. he register is defined by IEEE 488 2 register and is controlled using 488 2 common commands ESE ESE and ESR as well as SCPI aliases for multichannel use Standard Event Status Enable Register The Event Summary Enable command determines which bits in the Standard Event Status Register are summarized in the Event Summary Bit ESB of the Status Byte This register will be cleared at power up To enable events you must make the logical sum of all values for the events that you to be reported and send this parameter in decimal format See Table 5 9 for values for the events to be enabled in lt status enable gt parameter For example sending ESE 16 sets bit 4 of the Standard Event Status Enable Register This will cause the Event Summary bit ESB in the Status Byte to be set whenever the Execution Error bit bit 4 in the Standard Event Status Register gets set Command ESE status enable ESE The SCPI equivalent for multichannel use STATus channel s STANdard ENABle lt status enable gt STATus channel s STANdard ENABle Standard Event Status Register The Standard Event Status Register query allows you to determine the current contents of the Standard Event Status Register See Standard Event Status Register SESR Reading this register clears it Command ESR The SCPI equivalent for multichannel use STATus lt channel s gt STANdard EVENt M370430 01 Rev C 9 35 Remote
201. her will offer some noise immunity 2 9 Installation Step 5 Performing Functional Tests The functional test procedures include e Power on and front panel functional checks e Voltage mode operation and current mode operation checks For information on local operation see Local Operation on page 3 1 for adjusting front panel controls and settings Powering the Power Supply On Off To power on the power supply 1 Ensure that the front panel power switch is in the Off position 2 Ensure that the AC line voltage is within operating range 3 Connect the line cord to a grounded AC outlet 4 Turn the front panel power switch to the On position After a short power on delay 8848 8888 illuminates on the output voltage and current displays followed by PSU Un After approximately 1 second the display returns to normal status To power off the power supply Turn the front panel power switch to the Off position AC FA L will blink on the display The ALARM LED illuminates After a short delay all lights on the display will not be illuminated 2 10 M370430 01 Rev C Installation Voltage and Current Mode Operation Checks To perform the voltage and current mode operation checks l Re IPS S ze 11 12 M370430 01 Rev C Ensure that the front panel power switch is in the On position and the output is disconnected If the OUTPUT ENABLE Main button is illuminated press the button to turn off
202. hutdown pin is pulled high internally normally high Therefore if this feature is not used the polarity should be set to 1 to avoid false triggering See Defining the Polarity of the External Shutdown Signal on page 3 34 for instructions M370430 01 Rev C 3 33 Local Operation Defining the Polarity of the External Shutdown Signal 1 Turn the 9 position mode control to the PRT position or press the rotary Adjust Enter control if the control knob 1s already at the PRT position Pri OUP is displayed on the output voltage display 2 Turn the rotary Adjust Enter control until Pri 5d is displayed 3 Press the rotary Adjust Enter control to display 5d J shutdown on logic 0 or 5d shutdown on logic 1 4 Press the rotary Adjust Enter control to commit the desired polarity setting For example If you set the shutdown logic to 1 5d and apply a logic high greater than 1 2 Vdc to pin J3 12 relative to pin J3 6 on the ISOL connector the power supply will shut down Conversely if you set the shutdown logic to 0 Sd the power supply will only operate when you have a logic high greater than 1 2 Vdc to pin J3 2 relative to pin J3 6 Important There is an internal pullup resistor inside the shutdown circuit so the shutdown polarity should be set to 0 if it is not being used The SCPI command s for these instructions are X OUTPuT lt channel gt lt POLariucy Loop Protection version 2 21 and higher
203. ing an Isolated External Voltage Source 4 22 M370430 01 Rev C Analog Programming APG and Isolated Analog Programming ISOL Voltage Controlled Voltage ISOL Setup Activating ISOL Programming Voltage Mode To activate ISOL programming voltage mode with an external voltage source 1 Turn the 9 position mode control to the VAP position or press the rotary Adjust Enter control if the mode control is already at the VAP position APr is displayed on the output voltage display 2 Turn rotary Adjust Enter control to select U 5 voltage source from isolated connector 3 Press the rotary Adjust Enter control to commit the selected mode LE U is displayed on the output voltage display 4 Select the input source level using the rotary Adjust Enter control 5 Once the desired level has been selected press the rotary Adjust Enter control to commit the change The display will return to the normal display Deactivating ISOL Voltage Mode To deactivate the ISOL voltage mode 1 Turn the 9 position mode control to the VAP position or press the rotary Adjust Enter control if the mode control is already at the VAP position 2 UHPr is displayed on the output voltage display 3 Turn the rotary Adjust Enter control to select nanE 4 Press the rotary Adjust Enter control to commit the change The display will return to the normal display M370430 01 Rev C 4 23 Analog Programming APG and Isolated Analog Programming ISO
204. ings can be done using commands as well as at the front panel Executing the save and recall commands will have the same outcome as following the procedure outlined in Saving User Setting Memory Locations on page 3 40 and Recalling User Setting Memory Locations on page 3 41 Commands SYSTem lt channel gt SAVE lt user settings slot gt SYSTem lt channel gt RECall lt user settings slot gt Where lt user settings slot gt is any integer between 1 and 3 The value corresponds to the setting to be operated on Set Analog Programming Level Setting the analog programming level is used to define the range from 0 to the level that will be input into the analog programming lines to control the output The command is equivalent to the procedure described in Analog Programming Mode on page 4 9 Commands jsYSTem channel COMMunicate APRogram LEVel VOLTage ISOLated lt level gt SYSTem lt channel gt COMMunicate APRogram LEVel VOLTage lt level gt jsYSTem channel COMMunicate APRogram LEVel CURRent ISOLated lt level gt SYSTem channel COMMunicate APRogram LEVel CURRent lt level gt Where lt level gt is the maximum voltage or resistance that will be input to the analog inputs The acceptable range is from 2 to 10 V and 2 to 10kQ Set Remote Programming Interface The remote source can be select using the following SCPI commands
205. ion on page 5 21 for more details 5 8 M370430 01 Rev C Remote Operation Configuring Remote Control using the USB Connector The power supply can be controlled from a remote terminal using a USB interface The standard USB connector is located on the rear panel of both the XG XTR 850 Watt model as shown in Figure 1 3 on page 1 7 and the XG XTR 1500 and 1700 Watt models as shown in Figure 1 6 on page 1 9 Use a standard USB shielded cable up to 9 84 feet 3 m in length Setting Up the PC to Use the USB Connection Installing USB to Serial Converter and Serial Port To set up the USB connection you ll need to download the latest driver from Future Technology Devices International Ltd or from www programmablepower com To download and install a virtual COM port VCP driver l M370430 01 Rev C Go to www programmablepower com and navigate to the XG XTR product web page Click the download link to download the driver Download the appropriate virtual COM port VCP drivers for your operating system with enhanced BM series support Create a folder C FTDI Unzip files from the archive into this folder Connect your device to a spare USB port on your computer The Found New Hardware Wizard automatically launches as shown in Figure 5 7 5 9 Remote Operation Found New Hardware Wizard Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard This wizard helps you install a device driver for a hardware device To co
206. ion OTP 2 Over Temperature Protection OTP Slave 3 4 1700W only External Shutdown B 312 Under Voltage Protection UVP 10 1024 The SCPI command s for these instructions are SYSTem channel PROTection MASK M370430 01 Rev C Local Operation Alarm Output Latching M370430 01 Rev C When an alarm is triggered the output will be disabled with the exception of the Fan alarm When an alarm is cleared the alarm output latch determines if the output should be re enabled to the state before the alarm occurred or if the output should remain in the off state Where setting the bit position 1 of an alarm latch will result in output latching to the off state when the alarm is cleared and if cleared 0 output will be re enabled to the state before the alarm triggered To define the values for the bit position you determine which alarms you want to latch Read the value for this bit position from Table 3 6 and sum them together The result is the alarm last mask which you should send with the SCPI command For Example If you wanted to enable latching for OTP and Foldback you would take the OTP value of 2 and add it to the foldback value of 256 to get a mask of 258 This is the value you would send with the SCPI command The output latches are accessible through the SCPI command The SCPI command s for these instructions are SYSTem lt channel gt PROTection LATCh The latch command take a single decimal parame
207. ions have no accessible live parts N CAUTION Cable damage When making connections to the output terminals ensure terminals of opposite polarity do not touch Load cables and sense wires should be provided with strain relief DC Output Connectors WARNING Shock hazard Disconnect the AC input before making any connections A shock hazard may be present at the output terminals Allow 15 seconds after the AC power has been removed before making any connections 6 V 40 V Models The 6 V 40 V models are equipped with output terminals as shown in Figures 1 3 and 1 6 60 V 150 V Models The 60 V 150 V models are equipped with output connectors as shown in Figures 1 4 1 5 and 1 7 These models have output currents that may require users to use wire diameters that would not fit into a single output connector so there are two output connectors in parallel to increase the potential current carrying capacity of load wiring 300 V 600 V Models The 300 V 600 V models are equipped with output connectors as shown in Figure 1 5 2 12 M370430 01 Rev C Installation Inductive Loads and Batteries CAUTION The XG XTR power supply requires freewheeling and blocking diodes across the output while driving inductive loads or batteries to protect the power supply from damage caused by power being fed back into the supply and from high voltage transients Selecting The diode must have a voltage rating at least 20 greater th
208. is pressed Set thecurrent set point to ON OFF zero when the output enable button is pressed Returns the SCPI version to which the instrument complies Format is YYYY V Query system for all supported SCPI command headers Query the system for all supported legacy commands Alarm SYSTem lt channel gt PROTection MASK Enable disable alarms lt Alarm Mask 0 Yes Masking protection 2047 39U3131J34 PUBPWILWWOD dOS O A8Y L0 0 T0Z IN LoV Table A 9 System Commands Continued Set Alarm SYSTem channel PROTection LATCh Sets the Alarm Output Sum of output Output Latches Latches See Table 3 60n latch flags page Table 3 6 Table A 10 Status Commands Parameter and SCPI Command Description Range STATus channel OPERation CONDit Query the Operations ion Condition Register See Table 5 11 on page 5 40 Set Operation STATus channel OPERation ENABle Accessthe Operations Enable Enable Flags Status Enable Register See Table 5 11 on 0 65535 Register page 5 40 Query STATus channel OPERation EVENt Query the Operations Event Operation Register See Table 5 11 on Status Event page 5 40 Register Set Operation STATus channel OPERation Access the Operation lt Transition Flags Status NTRansition Negative Trans Filter 0 65535 gt Negative Register See Table 5 11 on Transition page 5 40 Register 39U
209. isolated voltage monitoring ls 2 Disconnect the load and connect the voltmeter to the output Connect the voltmeter to the non isolated voltage monitoring output lines J1 13 J1 7 Set the Voltage APG level to 4 V Send the SCPI command SYST COMM APR LEV 4 Set the input source as Local Send the SCPI command SYST REM SOUR LOC Set the main output voltage to 100 by sending the command SOUR VOLT lt ModelVolt gt or use the rotary adjust Enter control Turn the main output On by pressing the OUTPUT ENABLE Main button on the front panel or send the command OUTP ON The OUTPUT ENABLE Main button will illuminate Enter interactive calibration mode by sending the SCPI command CAL MON Press on the terminal keys or to reduce or increase monitoring value Adjust the monitoring value displayed on the voltmeter that was set up in Step 1 to read as close as possible to 4 000 V Press any key other than the or keys to exit from interactive calibration mode Non isolated Current Monitoring Calibration Important For maximum accuracy at a specific APG level follow the calibration procedure again but use the intended operating voltage level in steps 3 and 9 7 10 M370430 01 Rev C Calibration and Troubleshooting To calibrate the non isolated current monitoring l 10 M370430 01 Rev C Short the main output with a shunt Connect a multimeter to measure the voltage across the shunt Connect
210. ith Instrument in the GPIB Explorer toolbar See Figure 1 3 NI 488 2 Communicator appears 9 Inthe Send String box of the NI 488 2 Communicator window type IDN and click the Query button Important If you press Enter while typing the string to be sent the NI 488 2 Communicator program will exit 10 The String Received window in the lower half of the NI 488 2 Communicator window will show the ID string for the instrument The ID string indicates the model serial number firmware version as well as the GPIB card firmware version 0 18 M370430 01 Rev C Remote Operation Ethernet LAN ENET Connector Optional The power supply also can be programmed from a remote terminal using the Ethernet ENET If your power supply is configured with the Ethernet option set up instructions differ between the 850 Watt models and the 1500 and 1700 Watt models For the XG XTR 850 Watt power supply with the MEA option see SETTING UP XG XTR 850 WATT MODELS in Section 6 Communications Options of this manual Note the the MEA option instructions in the manual are for reference only The MEA option is no longer available For the XG XTR 1500 and 1700 Watt power supplies with the MEB option see SETTING UP XG XTR 1500 and 1700 WATT MODELS in Section 6 Communications Options of this manual For connecting the power supply to ENET use a LAN RJ 45 and RJ 45 STP Use a standard RJ 45 and RJ 45 cross cable Cat 5 Multiple P
211. ith naptha or an equivalent solvent and clean the front panel with a weak solution of soap and water Use low pressure compressed air to blow dust from components on the printed circuit boards M370430 01 Rev C 2 3 Installation Step 2 Location and Mounting The power supply may be rack mounted or used in benchtop applications Rack Mounting The XG XTR 850 Watt power supply is designed to fill half of a standard 19 inch 483 mm equipment rack The XG XTR 1500 and 1700 Watt power supplies are designed to fill a standard 19 inch 483 mm equipment rack Units can be combined with the same models in the 850 W or 1500 and 1700 W series for customer applications Purchasing Rack Mount Kits Ventilation Contact Customer Service see Contact Information on page 1 about purchasing the Rack Mount Kit options For a list of the part numbers see Appendix D Rack Mount Kit Options Installation information for the different rack mount options are provided with the rack mount kits For product support visit www programmablepower com and navigate to the DC Power Supplies page Whether operating the power supply in a rack or on a bench allow air to reach the ventilation inlets on the front and rear of the unit for cooling The direction of airflow is from the front of the unit to the back of the unit Ventilation space is not required at the top bottom or sides of the power supply M370430 01 Rev C Installation Step 3
212. l Menu System CO 8 M370430 01 Rev C Local Operation Display Messages on the Front Panel The front panel displays on the power supply will use text as shown in Table 3 2 to indicate the status or mode M370430 01 Rev C Table 3 2 Front Panel Display Text Display Text n LI 232 485 BBBB OD C FnPC FnPU Fid HbPS BPI b version 2 21 and higher Text Description Negative Polarity RS 232 RS 485 All segments On Power Up Positive Polarity Alternating Current RS 485 Address Analog Programming Power On Autostart Auxiliary Autostart Current Analog Programming Clear Constant Current Controller Constant Power Constant Voltage Coarse Current Pre set Mode Coarse Voltage Pre set Mode Current Share same as CUrrShAr Current Current Share same as CShr Fold Delay Done Error debug Foldback Fail Fan Flash Fine Current Preset Mode Fine Voltage Preset Mode Foldback Data rate kbps GPIB Interface 3 9 Local Operation Display Text BIDENS og 9 c3 m e e z m e a3 D 2 malal 91 7n a wn D 7 r Zo ee 153 FR LUM T nmi m n 3 10 Text Description Interlock ENET Interface Current APG Level Voltage APG Level Lock Local Loop Protection Off On Output Protection Over Current Protection Over Temperature Protection Over Voltage Protection Over Voltage Protection fine adjustment OVP Calibration Polarity Pro
213. l O o A8Y L0 0 T0Z IN Environmental Specifications Indoor use Operating Temperature Range Storage Temperature Range Operating Humidity Range Storage Humidity Range Operating Altitude Installation Category Pollution Degree Mechanical Specifications XG XTR 850 Watt WxHxD XG XTR 1500 Watt and 1700 Watt WxHxD Weight XG XTR 850 Watt XG XTR 1500 Watt and 1700 Watt Cooling Regulatory Approvals Safety EMC 0 C to 50 C 100 load 20 C to 70 C 30 90 RH no condensation 10 95 RH no condensation Up to 6 500 feet 2 000 m II IEC 1010 1 2 IEC 1010 1 8 4 x 1 7 x 19 0 inch 214 x 43 6 x 483 mm 16 8 x 1 7 x 19 0 inch 428 x 43 6 x 483 mm 11 Ib 5kg 20 Ib 9 5 kg Forced air cooling by internal fans CSA 22 2 No 61010 1 and UL61010 1 Marked with cCSAus CE EN61010 1 Complies with EN61326 1 Complies with EN55022 Class A FCC Part 15A for conducted emissions Complies with EN55022 Class A FCC Part 15A for radiated emissions Complies with EN61000 4 series of standards for immunity suoneoyioedg Specifications 30 in 7 6 mm 17 99 in 456 9 mm 17 32 in 18 9 in 18 5 in 439 9 mm 479 9 mm 469 9 mm 26 8 mm 214 2 mm Figure C 1 XG XTR 850 Watt Mechanical Dimensions 6 to 40 V Models M370430 01 Rev C C 11 Specifications 17 6 in 447 5 mm Ate Figure C 2 XG XTR 850 Watt Mechanical Dimensions 60 V to 600 V Models C 12 M370430
214. l operation affects both power on and output enable However when using SCPI there is a separate command for each The SCPI command to query or enable disable the 0 Voltage Output Preset at power on is SYSTem lt channel gt PON VOLTage ON OFF The SCPI command to query or enable disable the 0 Voltage Output Preset upon output enable is SYSTem lt channel gt PON ENAble VOLTage TONJONEJ Programming Current Output Preset To Enable Disable automatic reset to 0 Amps Turn the rotary Adjust Enter control to PRT and press Turn again until PrG BU iP is displayed nui ri 1 2 3 Press to display UU iF L rr 4 5 mit Turn to display CUrr Bn or Curr OFF Press to commit the selected setting Important This single front panel operation affects both power on and output enable However when using SCPI there is a separate command for each The SCPI command to query or enable disable the 0 Current Output Preset at power on is SYSTem lt channel gt PON CURRent ON OFF The SCPI command to query or enable disable the 0 Current Output Preset upon output enable is SYSTem lt channel gt PON ENAble CURRent ON OFF M370430 01 Rev C 3 37 Local Operation Power On Status Signal Power On Status signal indicates a fault condition in the power supply Power On Status signal is a TTL output signal at Pin J2 13 with reference to COM ISOLATED Pin J2 2 or Pin J2 6 During norm
215. l shut down due to constant voltage The default value is NONE To set the foldback delay send the command Command OUTPut lt channel gt PROTection FOLDback DELay lt delay_time gt M370430 01 Rev C 5 69 Remote Operation Where delay time is a value in the range of 0 5 50 seconds The unit of second is the default and no units should be used with this parameter Increments of 0 1 seconds are allowed The default value is 0 5 seconds Over Temperature Protection The over temperature protection OTP is the alarm that protects the unit in case of ventilation blockage fan failure or some other event that causes the unit to overheat The OTP cannot be masked to disable it The OTP alarm can have its output latch on clearing See Alarm Output Latching on page 3 25 The SCPI command s for these instructions are SYSTem channel s PROTection LATCh The On setting shown by the front panel Using Over Temperature Protection Lock OTP on page 3 32 maps to having the OTP latch flag set The OFF setting maps to having the OTP latch flag cleared The default is to have the flag cleared Loop Protection Enable Disable The Loop Protection is described in Loop Protection on page 3 34 Enabling Loop Protection LOOP PRO on front panel will allow the Loop Protection feature to trigger based on the conditions described in Loop Protection page 3 34 This feature can be controlled by either front p
216. lify the figures The simplified block will show a 16 bit register and the summary bit See Figure 5 21 for details on the structure used for each standard SCPI register Positive Transition Mask Condition Register Condition Source 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 14 Never Used lt _ Never Used Never Used Never Used Figure 5 21 SCPI Register Model 5 38 M370430 01 Rev C Remote Operation OPERation Status Register The operation status register is a standard SCPI 16 bit register which contains information about conditions which are part of the power supply s normal operation The Operation Status data structure has the operation status register and two sub registers to represent shutdown and protection shutdown Each of the sub registers is summarized in a summary bit Figure 5 22 represents the Operation Status data structure The represents the logical summation or of bits in a register Table 5 11 Table 5 12 and Table 5 13 describe the meanings of each bit as well as the bit number and bit weight STATus OPERation SHUTdown PROTection Over VOLTage Under VOLTage Over CURRent Not Used AC Off Over TEM Perature Not Used Foldback Fan Failure Not Used Not U sed Not U sed Not U sed STATus OPERation SHUTdown Not Used Not Used Not Used PROTection Summary INTerlock Not Used External Shutdown Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Nor
217. lines connected to the load without also connecting the load power leads to the output terminals CAUTION Reverse polarity Avoid reversing positive and negative sense connections When using remote sense to compensate for load line losses ensure that the positive sense line is connected to the positive load terminal and the negative sense line is connected to the negative load terminal Do not reverse these connections or the power supply may be damaged Important Long load leads with large capacitance at the load and remote sensing can cause voltage instability due to inductance of the load leads Measures to reduce inductance and or capacitance raising resonant frequency or using local sense can be beneficial in stabilizing the system M370430 01 Rev C Local Operation Chapter 3 Local Operation provides the procedures for local front panel operation such as Configuring settings Operating in constant voltage mode constant current mode and constant power mode available in version 2 21 and higher Using the protection features Using multiple power supplies Local Operation Introduction Once you have installed the power supply and connected both the AC input power and the load covered in Installation on page 2 1 the power supply is ready for local operation To turn the power supply on see Powering the Power Supply On Off on page 2 10 Configuring Settings from the Front Panel Usin
218. lled current analog programming system Queries and loads the input calibration parameters in arbitrary program block data format Queries and loads the output calibration parameters in arbitrary program block data format Queries and loads the APG calibration parameters in arbitrary program block data format Table A 5 SCPI Commands to Clear All Protection Mechanisms SCPI Command Description NRI nothing Yes for interactive mode arbitrary program Yes block data gt lt arbitrary program Yes block data gt lt arbitrary program Yes block data gt Parameter and Range Query Clear Output OUTPut lt channel gt PROTection CLEar_ Clears the currently set N A Protection alarms 39U313J34Y puguliulO2 dOS c V o 9eH L0 0 Tv0ZE IN Table A 6 SCPI Commands for Foldback Protection Parameter and SCPI Command Description Range Query JOoUTPut channel PROTection FOLDb Set the delay time seconds lt Delay 0 5 50 gt Yes DE Lay before foldback protection is triggered JOUTPut lt channel gt PROTection FOLDD Select condition for foldback CV CC INONE MODE 39U3131J34Y puewwop dOS o 8H L0 0 T0Z IN Ec V Table A 7 SCPI Commands for Power Parameter and SCPI Command Description Range Shutdown t JOUTPuL Polarity Sets the TTL level that will HIGH LOW Logic Control trigger an External Shutdown Main Outpu
219. log programming ISOL control for remote operation and readback Seamless switching between front panel and any digital interface RS 232 RS 485 USB GPIB or ENET Simultaneous digital displays for both voltage and current Front panel control by rotary Adjust Enter knob permitting high resolution output setting Active Power Factor Correction PFC reduces input current and input current harmonics Automatic crossover system allowing the power supply to switch between Constant Current Constant Voltage and Constant Power available in version 2 21 and higher operating modes Parallel or series connection among multiple units to produce greater diversity or to use in higher power applications Short circuit protection of DC outputs provideing greater operating safety Built in APG and ISOL optional interface to provide a galvanically isolated analog voltage control of the output master slave output tracking and remote Enable disable for safety and precision Remote output voltage sensing to automatically compensate for cable losses Software calibrated Three user setting memory locations M10 Option preprograms the voltage to reset to zero upon power on and upon output enable M370430 01 RevC Introduction XG and XTR Models firmware version 2 0 and higher Table 1 1 lists the models in the XG XTR 850 Watt series covered by M370430 01 Rev C this Manual Table 1 1 XG XTR 850 Watt Series Voltage and
220. ly dictated by the SCPI standard This section provides a high level review of the standard status reporting required by SCPI and then covers the XG XTR specific reporting that is implemented within the SCPI status reporting framework Figure 5 18 is taken from the SCPI 99 standard and shows the minimum status reporting requirements for a SCPI compliant device Throughout this chapter figures are used to explain the relationship between the registers enable disabling register and their summary bits The figures use four logical symbols to demonstrate the relationship between the register The block represents logical not or complement of the input signal The amp block represents the logical AND operator The block represents the logical OR operation The block represents the logical OR of all the bits from the enable register The model has several ellipses which are there to indicate that the pattern of logic shown is repeated for all bits in the registers 9 29 Remote Operation QUEStionable Status VOLTage CURRent TIME POWer TEMPerature FREQuency PHASe MODulation CALIbration Available to designer Available to designer Available to designer Available to designer INSTrument Summary Command Warning Not Used CALIbrating SETTing RANGing SWEeping MEASuring Waiting for TRIGger Summary Waiting for ARM Summary CORRecting Available to designer Available to designer Availabl
221. mA 40 mA 32 mA 20 mA 12 mA ni i ulli ms udi ms udi ms di ms udi ms ms ui ms ual ms 250 ms m Cb rl lt 0 5 7 5 V 0 5 10 V 115V 124V 2 39V 2 44V 3 66 V 3 95 V 3 125 V 3 180 V 5 330 V 5 660 V suoneoyioedg o 8H L0 0 T0Z IN L O Table C 3 XG XTR 1700 Watt Electrical Specifications for 6 V to 600 V Models Models 6 220 8 200 12 140 20 84 33 50 40 42 60 28 80 21 100 17 150 11 2 300 5 6 600 2 8 Efficiency 75 77 77 80 79 57 82 85 83 86 83 87 6 83 879 83 87 83 87 83 87 83 87 83 87 82 5 1 Maximum output voltage is guaranteed to be lt 0 1 of the rated voltage at zero output setting using the front panel or digital remote programming modes 2 Maximum output current is guaranteed to be lt 0 2 of the rated current at zero output setting using the front panel or digital remote programming modes and when measured with rated load resistance 3 Total output power is also based on AUX1 Output Voltage 5 V and AUX1 Output Current 0 5 A and AUX2 Output Voltage 15 V and AUX2 Output Current 0 5 A 4 From 90 132 Vac or 170 265 Vac constant load 5 From 90 132 Vac or 170 265 Vac constant load 6 From no load to full load constant input voltage 7 For load voltage change equal to the unit voltage rating constant input voltage 8 For 6 V models the current ripple is measured at 2 6 V output voltage and full output current For all other models the current ripple is measured at 10 100 out
222. mand headers Command SYSTem lt channel gt HELP LEGacy For example SYST2 HELP LEG Might return 296 AUX OUT ERR qonly CLR nquery FOLD DLY VSET ISET TRG nquery OVP UVP HELP gonly HLP qonly 5 61 Remote Operation Locking and Unlocking the Front Panel Locking out the front panel will prevent any of the buttons from functioning All the buttons and knobs on the front panel will display the LOCL LOC message to be display on the Current and Voltage displays if pressed or rotated This mode prevents any changes to the unit from the front panel See the following procedure to lock and unlock the front panel The SCPI Commands for these instructions are SYSTem channel REMote STATe LOCal REMote Where LOCal is used to set the front panel mode to local REMote is used to set the front panel into locked mode remote For example SYST REM STAT REM Front panel is locked remote digital programming mode only SYST REM STAT LOC Front panel is unlocked SYST REM STAT Query for status Auto Sequence Programming Auto Sequence programming lets you execute a program stored in the power supply s memory The program that can be stored in memory can be composed of any of the SCPI commands described in this Manual For example Auto Sequence programming allows you to set the timer to turn the power output of the supply Off or On after a time interval or to program volt
223. may appear Errors are placed in a queue as they are detected Error Messages Error Messages B 2 Errors are placed in a queue as they are detected The queue works on a first in first out FIFO basis If the queue overflows the last error in the queue is replaced with error 350 Queue Overflow When all errors have been read from the queue further error queries return 0 No error The error queue is cleared when any of the following occur IEEE 488 2 section 11 4 3 4 Upon receipt of a CLS command Upon reading the last item from the queue M370430 01 Rev C Error Messages Command Error List An error in the range 199 100 indicates that an IEEE 488 2 syntax error has been detected by the instrument s parser The occurrence of any error in this class causes the command error bit bit 5 in the Event Status Register to be set M370430 01 Rev C Table B 1 Error Code 100 102 108 109 110 113 121 140 150 151 Command Error List Error Message Description Command error This is the generic syntax error Syntax Error An unrecognized command or data type was encountered for example a string was received when the device does not accept strings Parameter not Allowed More parameters were received than expected for the header for example the SRE common command only accepts one parameter so receiving SRE 0 1 is not allowed Missing Parameter Fewer para
224. meters were received than required for the header for example the SAV common command requires one parameter so receiving SAV is not allowed Command header error An error was detected in the header Undefined header The header is syntactically correct but it is undefined for this specific device for example X YZ is not defined for any device Invalid character in number An invalid character for the data type being parsed was encountered for example an alpha in a decimal numeric or a 9 in octal data Character data error This error is generated when parsing a character data element String data error This error is generated when parsing a string data element fails Invalid string data A string data element was expected but was invalid for some reason see IEEE 488 2 7 7 5 2 for example an END message was received before the terminal quote character B 3 Error Messages Execution Error List An error in the range 299 200 indicates that an error has been detected by the instrument s execution control block The occurrence of any error in the class causes the execution error bit bit 4 in the Event Status Register to be set Execution errors are reported by the device after rounding and expression evaluation operations have taken place Table B 2 Error Code 200 203 220 221 B 4 Execution Error List Error Message Description Execution Error This is the generic syntax error
225. mming CAP Level Current Sharing Mode Alarm Latches Front Panel Timeout Saving User Setting Memory Locations To save user setting memory locations 1 Turn the 9 position mode control to the SAV position SAVE is displayed on the output voltage display with a number indicating a preset position which is displayed on the output current display 2 Turn the rotary Adjust Enter control to select a preset position from to 3 3 Press the rotary Adjust Enter control SRUE done is displayed on the output voltage display 4 The setting has now been saved to the selected user setting memory location 3 40 M370430 01 Rev C Local Operation The SCPI command s for these instructions are SAV lt setting_location gt or SYSTem lt channel gt SAVE lt setting_location gt Recalling User Setting Memory Locations This feature recalls settings that were previously saved To load user setting memory locations 1 Turn the 9 position mode control to the RCL position r L L is displayed on the output voltage display with a number indicating a preset position on the output current display 2 Turn the rotary Adjust Enter control to select a preset position from to 3 3 Press the rotary Adjust Enter control rLL dont is displayed on the output voltage display The settings in the selected user setting memory locations have now been applied to the power supply The SCPI command s for these instructions are NC
226. mperature Figure 5 23 gives an overview of the Questionable Status data structure The represents the logical summation of bits in a register Table 5 15 Table 5 16 and Table 5 17 describe the meanings of each bit as well as the bit number and bit weight 5 4 7 Remote Operation STATus QUEStionable VOLTage Over Voltage Protection OVP Under Voltage Protection UVP Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Over Temperature Protection 0 48 OTP Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Figure 5 23 SCPI QUEStionable Registers Fanout Never Used STATus QUEStionable VOLTage Not Used Not Used Not Used TEMPerature Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Never Used M370430 01 Rev C Remote Operation Table 5 15 QUEStionable Status Register i valcr DOR pee 7007 Summary of Voltage Register Not Implemented Not Implemented 8 POWer Not Implemented Summary of Temperature Register Not Implemented Not Implemented 128 Not Implemented 256 Not Implemented 512 Not Used gt gt gt Not Used E d ilios as o NN C C RR C M AE ares PPP DR INE it sn SPO i Aaa
227. n Protection Sub Register Commands Query Protection Event SCPI command STATus lt channel gt OPERation SHUTdown PROTection EVE Nt Query Protection Condition SCPI command STATus channel OPERation SHUTdown PROTection COND ition Enable Protection Sub Register SCPI command STATus channel OPERation SHUTdown PROTection ENABle status enable Query format STATus channel OPERation SHUTdown PROTection ENAB le Set Protection Positive Transition Filter SCPI command STATus channel OPERation SHUTdown PROTection PTRa nsition stats enable Query format STATus channel OPERation SHUTdown PROTection PTRa nsition Set Protection Negative Transition Filter SCPI command STATus channel OPERation SHUTdown PROTection NTRa nsition status enable Query format STATus channel OPERation SHUTdown PROTection NTRa nsition 5 46 M370430 01 Rev C Remote Operation QUEStionable Status Register M370430 01 Rev C The Questionable Status register is a standard SCPI 16 bit register that stores information about questionable events or status during power supply operation That is bits in these registers may indicate that the output of the supply is of undesirable or questionable quality The Questionable Status data structure consists of a questionable status register and two sub registers representing the status of the voltage outputs and te
228. n i ACPI Sleep Button HM AMD Curon tm Processor B 3 PCT bus iB CMedia AC97 Audo Device iH IEEE 902 119 Wireless Cer i r PCI Modem i Wf PCI standard host PU bridge kegy 515 UUL PLI CO USGS Upen Host Loncroner USB Root Hub Eee USB High Speed Serial Converter Ser ASB Serial Port COM na A SiS 7001 PCT Fa HSR inen Host Controller SS 7001 PCI to USS Open Host Controls E 4 LIS Root Hub El e USB High Speed Serial BPA USB Seria Port COMS pe 55 7001 PCI to LISS Open Host Controler 6 USB Root Hub z SS 7001 PCI to USB Open Host Controler LSB Root Hub es SS 7002 USB 2 0 Enhanced Hast Controler fet USS 2 0 Root Hub M SS 900 PCI Fast Ethernet Adapter h 95 Accelerated Graphics Port P SS PCI IDE Controller AE SIS PCI to ISA bridge i Audio Codec Legacy AES Drivers lt Legacy video Capb re Devices Media Control Devices i Figure 5 10 Device Manager 5 12 M370430 01 Rev C Remote Operation Figure 5 11 Communications Port COM1 Properties 5 Inthe COM port list scroll to the required COM port Advanced Settings for COM1 Use FIFO buffers requires 16550 compatible UART Select lower settings to correct connection problems Select higher settings for faster performance Defaults Receive Buffer Low 1 J High 14 14 Transmit Buffer Low 1 High 16 16 COM Port Number EEE gt Figure 5 12 Completing the new hardware wizard 6 Click OK Ensure that
229. nal ilBl Xj File Edit View Call Transfer Help ADR 2 IDN AMETEK xG 600 2 8 SNH1002004518 2 12 01 10 11 ADR 10 IDN AMETEK XG 60 14 0 SNH1004 B0012 2 12 01 10 11 Connected 0 04 48 Auto detect Auto detect Figure 6 34 HyperTerminal Window Figure 6 34 shows the HyperTerminal session for the combined configuration which is an ENET and RS 485 network This figure also shows access to power supplies 2 and 10 sequentially Setting Up Your System To set up your system 6 28 M370430 01 Rev C Communications Options 1 Connect your system as shown in Figure 6 33 and turn every power supply unit to ON 2 Setup your computer as described in Setting Up the Computer on page 6 5 Repeat this section for each computer hooked up to the system 3 Install the DeviceInstaller software on the PC you wish to use to configure the unit s with See the instructions for Software Installations on page 6 8 4 Configure the ENET card of the master unit power supply 1 in Figure 6 33 See the instructions for Configuring the Device Using DevicelInstaller on page 6 10 5 Configure the master power supply which is the unit with the ENET option power supply 1 in Figure 6 33 by following the instructions in Selecting ENET as the Communication Porton page 6 16 6 The following Steps 7 8 and 9 must be repeated for each slave unit 7 For the slave unit that you are setting up turn the 9 Po
230. nd STATus channel QUEStionable VOLTage status enable Query Format STATus channel QUEStionable VOLTage CONDition ENABle ENABle PTRansition PTRansition NTRansition NTRansition 5 52 M370430 01 Rev C Remote Operation Temperature Status Register Commands Query Temperature Status Register Event SCPI command STATus lt channel gt QUEStionable VOLTage TEMPerature EVENt Query Temperature Status Register Condition SCPI command STATus lt channel gt QUEStionable VOLTage TEMPerature CONDition Enable Temperature Status Register SCPI command STATus lt channel gt QUEStionable VOLTage TEMPerature ENABle lt status enable gt Query Format STATus lt channel gt QUEStionable VOLTage TEMPerature ENABle Set Temperature Status Positive Transition Filter SCPI command STATus lt channel gt QUEStionable VOLTage TEMPerature PTRansition lt status enable gt Query Format STATus lt channel gt QUEStionable VOLTage TEMPerature PTRansition Set Temperature Status Negative Transition Filter SCPI command STATus lt channel gt QUEStionable VOLTage TEMPerature NTRansition lt status enable gt Query Format STATus lt channel gt QUEStionable VOLTage TEMPerature NTRansition M370430 01 Rev C 5 53 Remote Operation SCPI Error Event Queue The error event queue contains items that incl
231. nd an error occurred but was not recorded Communication error This is the generic communication error for devices Input buffer overrun Software or hardware input buffer on serial port overflows with data caused by improper or nonexistent pacing B 5 Error Messages Table B 3 Device Specific Error List Error Error Message Description Code 365 Time out error This is a generic device dependent error Query Error List An error number in the range 499 400 indicates that the output queue control of the instrument has detected a problem with the message exchange protocol described in IEEE 488 2 chapter 6 The occurrence of any error in this class causes the query error bit bit 2 in the Event Status Register to be set Table B 4 Query Error List Error Error Message Description Code 400 This is the generic query error for the power supply used only when the other types of errors do not apply B 6 M370430 01 Rev C Specifications Appendix C Specifications provides the product specifications for the XG and XTR Family 850W 1500W and 1700W Programmable DC Power Supplies These specifications are represented over the full operating temperature range e Nominal line input voltage should be assumed unless otherwise stated All sense lines are configured for local operation by default e Except where otherwise noted specifications apply to single unit operation only Specifications are subj
232. nd descriptions 5 36 M370430 01 Rev C Remote Operation Table 5 10 Standard Event Status Register Bit Bit Weight Bit Name Description Command Error CME _ Set if an IEEE488 2 syntax error has been detected by the parser an unrecognized header was received or a group Execute Trigger was entered into the input buffer inside an IEEE 488 2 program message See Command Error List on page B 3 for a list of possible error codes and descriptions User Request URQ Not Implemented Power ON PON Not Implemented 8 15 N A Reserved Reserved for possible future use by IEEE Bit values are reported as zero 6 6 AN Uo N 4 128 N Operation Complete The Operation Complete command causes the power supply to generate the operation complete message in the Standard Event Status Register when all pending operations have been finished See bit 0 in Table 5 10 for more details Command OPC OPC Wait to Continue Command The Wait to Continue command prevents the power supply from executing any further commands or queries until the no operation pending flag is TRUE Command WAI M370430 01 Rev C 5 37 Remote Operation Standard SCPI Register Structure All registers except the SERS and Status registers will have the following structure which control how they report status information In all subsequent figures that have SCPI registers this structure will be condensed down into a single block to simp
233. nd response To avoid this you can either wait for and read the first response before sending the second query or send a device clear message before sending the second query M370430 01 Rev C A 5 SCPI Command Reference Terminating Characters Every command string must end with a terminating lt new line gt character It is also acceptable to use a lt carriage return gt followed by a lt new line gt Terminating a command string always resets the SCPI command path to the root level Common Commands A 6 The IEEE 488 2 standard includes a set of common commands for functions such as reset and self test These common commands always start with an asterisk contain 4 or 5 characters and may have one or more parameters The command is always separated from the parameter by a blank space Multiple commands sent in the same string are separated by a semi colon The following is an example of how 3 common commands can be sent together in the same string ORC PSC OLI TRG M370430 01 Rev B SCPI Command Reference Parameter Types Several different data types are defined for use in program messages and response messages Boolean Parameters Discrete Parameters Numeric Parameters String Parameters M370430 01 Rev C Boolean parameters are single binary conditions such as 1 and 0 or ON and OFF The following is an example of a command that uses Boolean parameters SYST COMMtGPIB PONS ON OFF
234. netrate more than 1 8 in 3 0 mm into the bottom and or the back of the unit M370430 01 Rev C D 3 Rack Mount Options and Installation Instructions Mounting Option A 1U Rails 1U rails are to support the power supply rack mount packages The rail is a flanged rail type and only available for a rack depth of 25 inches The part number to order this option is RM XG2 for the XG family and RM XTR2 for the XTR family Tools and Materials Required To mount and connect the power supply you will need the following tools and materials e Screwdriver Phillips head 2 e Standard carpenter s level e Eight 10 24 x 30 mm Phillips head screws Installation Procedures To install the power supply in an equipment rack 1 Ensure that your rack resembles the rack shown in Figure D 3 and has inner holes within the specified dimensions 2 Find the 1U space in which you wish to install your power supply in the specific rack 3 Place the lower plain flange of the RM XG2 RM XTR2 rail at the lowest point of the 1U space If it is placed correctly a hole on the inner flange of the vertical rack will line up to the oval mounting slot in the rail Using the carpenter s level for accuracy install the rail using two 10 24 screws Tighten the screws to a torque of 20 5 to 22 5 in lbs Hepeat on the opposite side using the level to ensure both rails align Slide the power supply assembly onto the rails and against the front rails of the ra
235. nfiguration ideas present in this section by referencing the various setup instructions Single Computer and Single Power Supply Unit Figure 6 6 shows the connection between the ENET unit and Local Computer through a crossover cable however a HUB could also be used with straight through Ethernet cables as well Connect your computer to the ENET as shown in Figure 6 6 or if this topology does not match your configuration refer to the Advanced Section on page 6 24 to identify the topology you wish to implement and follow the instructions described in that section Local Computer Power Supply Figure 6 6 Single Computer Single Power Supply Setting Up the Computer To set up the computer 1 Open Explorer on the main computer go to Control Panel gt Network Connections gt Local Area connections See Figure 6 7 M370430 01 Rev C 6 5 Communications Options Network Connections File Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help Back As j F mx X Ea B lal iz P gt fy Folders sf Ej Address Network Connections m Ga Folders x Desktop P uc My Documents Al B E My Computer i a4 3 5 Floppy 4 3 Sorte lt Local Disk C Gs NEW D e Control Panel iy Administrative Tools A AN Network Connections x Local Area Wireless g Printers and Faxes Connections C Scheduled Tasks Shared Documents cae Dimas Documents Create Shortcut gg My Network Places Pialake ag
236. nitoring e Isolated current monitoring e Isolated source for analog programming e Non isolated source for analog programming Over voltage protection system CAUTION Equipment damage Calibration procedures should only be performed by qualified user 7 2 M370430 01 Rev C Calibration and Troubleshooting Main Voltage and Current Calibration Principle Understanding the Problem Figure 7 1 illustrates two sources of analog programming error gain error and offset error Gain error is the departure from the ideal slope of the measured versus programmed line Offset error is the magnitude of the measured value when the programmed value is zero Calibrating one will affect the other so an iterative calibraton procedure is used For best results iterative calibration of gain and offset will be required After first calibration of both repeat gain calibration for 90 of maximum value and offset calibration for 10 of maximum value Repeat as neccesay Measured Value Gain Error 7 Offset Error Programmed Value Figure 7 1 Offset Intercept Error and Gain Slope Error M370430 01 Rev C 7 3 Calibration and Troubleshooting Step 1 Gain Calibration Measured Value Measured Value Programmed Value Programmed Value Figure 7 2 Calibration Step 1 Gain Calibration Adjust the gain so that the real line and ideal line intersect at a programmed value of 90 Step 2 Offset Calibration Measured Value
237. ntinue click Next Figure 5 7 Found New Hardware Wizard 7 Click Next 8 On the Install Hardware Device Driver screen select Search for a suitable driver for my device recommended and click Next See Figure 5 8 Found New Hardware Wizard Eso oN Install Hardware Device Drivers A device driver is a software program that enables a hardware device to work with an operating system This wizard will complete the installation for this de vice e USB Serial Port A device driver is a software program that makes a hardware device work Windows needs driver files for your new device To locate driver files and complete the installation click Next What do you want the wizard to do Display a list of the known drivers for this device so that can choose a specific Figure 5 8 Install Hardware Device Drivers 5 10 M370430 01 Rev C Remote Operation 9 Inthe Locate Driver Files dialog box in the field Optional Search Locations select Specify A Location and click Next 10 On the next screen enter the file path C FTDI and click OK 11 On the next screen select Driver Files Search Results and click Next 12 In Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard see Figure 5 9 click Finish to complete the installation Found New Hardware Wizard Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard gt USB High S peed Serial Converter Windows has finished installing the software for this device To clos
238. ntrol when the desired mode has been selected The FLD LED will illuminate and JELA will be displayed in the output voltage display 4 Adjust the desired delay time using the rotary Adjust Enter control The range can be set from 0 50 seconds to a maximum of 50 seconds The step size is in increments of 0 05 seconds when setting from 0 50 to 5 seconds and then in 1 second increments from 5 seconds to 50 seconds 5 Once the desired foldback delay time has been selected press the rotary Adjust Enter control to commit the foldback delay setting To disable foldback protection 1 Turn the 9 position mode control to the FLD position or press the rotary Adjust Enter control if the control knob is already at the FLD position 2 FLdis displayed on the output voltage display and the output current display shows the current foldback trigger mode 3 Turn the rotary Adjust Enter control until nant is displayed in the output current display 3 26 M370430 01 Rev C Local Operation 4 Press the rotary Adjust Enter control to commit the setting once the desired value has been set 5 The green FLD LED will turn off and the display will return to the normal display mode The SCPI command s for these instructions are OUTPut lt channel gt PROTection FOLDback MODE OUTPut channel PROTection FOLDback LATCh Important If you set foldback while the output is enabled and the trigger you select 1s the same as th
239. o be used in the FDTI software Click OK when done Setup the data format to be used See Data Format on page 5 21 for details Set up the Hyper terminal you will need to configure the properties Click File gt Properties to bring up the connection properties dialog and click on the Settings tab USB Properties Function arrow and ctrl keys act as Terminal keys Windows keys Backspace key sends O CtlaH Del 9 Ctrl H Space Ctrl H E mulation ANSI J Telnet terminal ID ANSI Backscroll buffer lines 500 C Play sound when connecting or disconnecting Input Translation ASCII Setup Figure 5 16 USB Settings Fill out the following selections in the connection properties dialog Terminal keys Ctrl H Space Ctrl H On the Emulation list select ANSI 10 Click on the ASCII Setup button to bring up the ASCII Setup dialog M370430 01 Rev C Remote Operation Figure 5 17 ASCII Setup 11 Check the following boxes Send line ends with line feeds Echo typed characters locally Append line feeds to incoming line ends Wrap lines that exceed terminal width 12 Change the Line delay to 30 milliseconds 13 Click OK in the ASCII Setup window 14 Click OK in the Properties window HyperTerminal has now been configured to communicate with the XG XTR M370430 01 Rev C 5 23 Remote Operation Selecting the Appropriate Communication Port
240. ommand string e Braces or curly brackets identify a selection of choices Choose one of the enclosed values e Vertical bars or pipes can be read as or and is used to separate the choices found within the braces e Angle brackets lt gt identify where specific values must be entered for a parameter For example in the example at the top of the page the parameter lt current gt appears in the command string To set the current set point to 0 1 A the syntax is CAL CURR LEV Cae Me e Square brackets identify optional parameters If an optional parameter is not sent with the command string a default parameter is sent in its place Using Minimum and Maximum In the following example Minimum and Maximum are offered as alternative choices to declaring a specific parameter value CAL CURRent LEVel lt current gt MIN MAX The string CAL CURR LEV MIN sets the current calibration level to the minimum model value Using Queries A question mark lets you query the present value for most parameters For example to query the current calibration state use CAL TSECt STAT You can also use the following to query minimum and maximum allowed values for most parameters VOLT MIN VOLT MAX Important If you send two queries it is best to read and respond to the first response before trying to read the second Otherwise you may receive an incomplete first response followed by a complete seco
241. on CONDzitaion Status Shutdown Protection Condition Register Set Operation STATus channel OPERation Status SHUTdown PROTection ENABle Shutdown Protection Enable Register STATus lt channe gt OPE Ration SHUTdown PROTection EVENt Shutdown Protection Event Register Set Operation STATus channel OPERation Status SHUTdown PROTection NTRansition Shutdown Protection Negative Transition Register Access the Operation Transition Flags Shutdown Positive Trans 0 65535 Filter Register See Table 5 12 on page 5 41 Query the Operation Shutdown Protection Condition Register See Table 5 12 on page 5 41 Access the Operation Enable Flags Shutdown Protection Enable 0 65535 Register See Table 5 12 on page 5 41 Query the Operation Shutdown Protection Event Register See Table 5 12 on page 5 41 Register See Table 5 12 on Transition Flags 0 65535 7 929U9J9J8OH pugululO2 dOS 0 V o 9eH L0 0 Tv0Z IN Table A 10 Status Commands Continued Set Operation Status Shutdown Protection Positive Transition Register Query Operation Status Event Set Operation Status Enable Condition Register Set Operation Status Positive Transition Register Set Operation Status Negative Transition Register STATus channel OPERation SHUTdown PROTection PTRansition STATus channel OPERation CSHare
242. on Error List Error Code 2209 224 29 Error Message Description Data out of range Indicates that a legal program data element was parsed but could not be executed because the interpreted value was outside the legal range as defined by the device see JEEE 488 2 11 5 1 1 5 Illegal parameter value Used where the exact value from a list of possible values was expected Out of memory Used when the Autosequence programming buffer is full Device Specific Error List An error in the range 399 300 or 1 32767 indicates that the instrument has detected an error which is not a command error a query error or an execution error some device operations did not properly complete possibly due to an abnormal hardware or firmware condition These codes are also used for self test response errors The occurrence of any error in the class causes the device specific error bit bit 3 in the Event Status Register to be set M370430 01 Rev C Table B 3 Device Specific Error List Error Code 300 313 314 315 350 360 363 Error Message Description Device specific error Indicates that the power supply could not complete the operation due to some condition of the power supply Calibration Memory Lost Save Recall Memory Lost Configuration Memory Lost Queue Overflow A specific code entered into the queue in lieu of the code that caused the error This code indicates that there is no room in the queue a
243. on ieu coe iAV ERU duns A 14 EHBOBRJMESSAGES veuftutishatesabiidiited iu pela ABIDE an RU SetU i iare eru ori Feat dca B 1 ERROR MESSAGES odis S cU ord ve MOVE Me mo etta ertt C TA P dua A ME B 2 Sreiiucigedaqgenl imt P M B 3 Execution Error LISU ect e agere rna teneo Xa Ue Y ea Desk Lena ring cene Ua erdt eas eis B 4 Device Specille Error LIS soin rata Ete iosene boue lua teen ius Ue LLA B 5 QUEN Error INT I METUIT B 6 eigdse euo cT C 1 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR XG XTR FAMILY 850 W C 2 AC Line Input Specifications for XG XTR 850 Watt cccccceceeeeeeeeesseesssseseeeeees C 3 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR XG XTR FAMILY 1500 W C 4 AC Line Input Specifications for XG XTR 1500 Watt cicciii essas C 5 M370430 01 Rev C xiii Contents ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR XG XTR FAMILY 1700 W C 6 AC Line Input Specifications for XG XTR 1700 Watt seeeeeesssees C 7 REMOTE OPERATION PROGRAMMING csscecseecesectesetenceteeeeeneecseeteneeteeeteneeneeees C 8 COMMON SPECIFICATIONS FOR ALL MODELG cccsecceeeeceeeteseeeeeeteeeenseeteneeaees C 9 RACK MOUNT OPTIONS AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS eennnn D 1 RACK MOUNT KIT OPTIONS c acutus cutert ssa tia dead teria aa redd c curb ai D 2 XG XTR Single
244. on your computer To continue dick Next WARNING This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties 6 34 M370430 01 Rev C Communications Options 5 Click Next and view any last minute release information in the README file Please read the following readme information carefully LXI Discovery Brower Distribution disk AME TEK README rtf file 1 Replaced Elgar with AMETEK logo install set text text resources string table icon etc 2 Adjusted dialog layout and style adjusted column default widths to accommodate some of our products strings 3 F terminators from version strings for display 4 n install version advanced to 1 00 009 InstallShield M370430 01 Rev C 6 35 Communications Options 6 Click Next which takes you to the Customer Information window jE AMETEK LX Customer Informati Please enter your information User Name mmm Organization Ametek Install this application for Anyone who uses this computer all users Only for me customer InstallShield 7 Enter your user name and organization as well as your installation preference and then click Next 6 36 M370430 01 Rev C Communications Options 8 Either accept the automatic Destination Folder by clicking Next or choose another Destination Folder by clicking the Change button and navigating to your preferred installation directory once selected click Next Click Next to install to
245. onnector J3 4 J3 6 Set the Current APG level to 4 V The SCPI command is SYST COMM APR LEV CURR 4 Set the input source voltage to 4 000 V Set the input source as Voltage Isolated for Current The SCPI command is SYST REM SOUR CURR IAV Turn the main output to On by pressing the OUTPUT ENABLE Main button on the front panel or send the command OUTP ON The OUTPUT ENABLE Main button will illuminate Enter the interactive calibration mode by sending the SCPI command CAL CZOULTPTANALTICURER IOOL Press the terminal keys or to reduce or increase the main output current value Adjust the main output current to 10096 Press any key other than the or keys to exit from the interactive calibration mode M370430 01 Rev C Calibration and Troubleshooting Isolated Resistive Programming of Current Calibration To calibrate the isolated resistive programming of current l M370430 01 Rev C Short the main output with a shunt Connect a multimeter to measure the voltage across the shunt Connect the 4 000 kQ resistor to the isolated connector One terminal to resistive programming of current J3 7 and voltage programming of current J3 3 and the other to common J3 2 Set the Resistive APG level to 4 kQ The SCPI command is SYST COMM APR LEV CURR 4 Set the input source as Resistive Isolated for Current Programming The SCPI command is SYST REM SOUR CURR IAR Turn the main output On or send the command
246. ons Options SYSTEM COMMANDS The system commands control the system level functions of the power source Subsystem Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate LAN ADDRess Set LAN IP address APPLy Apply the change in setting CLASs Set LAN Host bits DEFault Set LAN to a default known setting DESCription Set user description DNSaddress Set LAN DNS address GWADdadress Set LAN Gateway PASSword Set LAN password PORT Set LAN socket port address MACAddress Read the MAC address SYSTem COMMunicate LAN ADDRess This command will set the LAN IP address The query format returns the IP address set To query the actual IP address used by the LAN interface in case the IP address is not static but assigned by a DHCP server the NCON parameter Network Connection Setting must be added to the query The default value is 0 0 0 0 Command Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate LAN ADDRess lt NRF gt Parameters ddd ddd ddd ddd IP address gt Example SYST COMM LAN ADDR 255 255 167 2 Query Syntax SYST COMM LAN ADDR SYST COMM LAN ADDR NCON Returned Parameters lt CRD gt SYSTem COMMunicate LAN APPLy This command will apply the changes in LAN setting The controller will go to reset condition and the new LAN setting will take effect Command Syntax SYSTem COMMunicate LAN APPLy Parameters none Example SYST COMM LAN APPL Query Syntax no query for this command Returned Parameters none SYSTem COMMunicate LAN CLASs This command will set the num
247. or XTR 150 5 6 SN E00123456 1 00 Build LO 217 213 2006 AMETEK XG or XTR 150 5 6 SN E00123456 1 00 Build 10 2174 1172005 Important Execution of the program may be terminated at any time by pressing the Esc key in the MS Windows Hyper Terminal window The power supply can be controlled during program execution Deleting an Auto Sequence Program It is possible to delete the current Auto Sequence Program using the SCPI noted below Command PROGram lt channel gt DELete ALL Repeating an Auto Sequence Program An Auto Sequence Program can be configured to repeat any number of times or infinitely The default at power up is to have the repeat count default to once The program will repeat if the repeat count can be changed using the PROGram lt channel gt REPeat command Ifa program is running or pause the PROGram lt channel gt REPeat command will not work Commands PROGram lt channel gt REPeat 1 SCOune gt NE ty Where lt count gt is the repeated count from 1 to 65 534 INFinity is the character mnemonic for repeating without end For Example PROG STAR IDN IDN PROG STOP M370430 01 Rev C 5 67 Remote Operation PROG PREP 2 PROG STAT RUN The output after the last command might be as follows AME TERK XG or XTR 150 5 6 SNF 800123456 1 00 Build L0 217 11120095 AMETEK XG or XTR 150 5 6 SNF E00123456 1 00 Build T0 217 uw 122005 AMETEK XG or
248. ork that the unit with with the ENET option is the ENET option is connected connected to and ping the to computer you are trying to use Devicelnstaller on If no response is seen then contact your network administrator and find out if ICMP requests are being filtered on the network and a possible reason for not being able to contact the computer Devicelnstaller is not See Selecting a Network configured to use the Adapter on page 6 10 Ethernet card on your computer that is connected to the network which has the unit with ENET option on it reachable configured properly administrator locally in the ASCII Setup dialog box of HyperTerminal The power supply is not The communication port on Select ENET as the responding the power supply unit is not communication port Refer to selected properly The the correct power supply address of the power supply address using the front panel unit is not valid The address has not been selected using the ADR address M370430 01 Rev C 6 31 Communications Options SETTING UP XG XTR 1500 and 1700 WATT MODELS This section is intended for network administrators responsible for the configuration and maintenance of devices on the network It provides information for connecting and configuring the power supply with the MEB option LOCAL AREA NETWORK LAN OPTION All power supplies functions are programmable over the LAN Ethernet interface if the ENET
249. ou ll need to configure the XG XTR to use the ENET option card as the active communication port To select ENET as the communication port 1 Turn the 9 position Mode control to PGM pE is displayed in the output voltage display 2 Turn the rotary Adjust Enter control to select the LAn communication port 3 Press the rotary Adjust Enter control AAAP is displayed on the output voltage display 4 Turn the rotary Adjust Enter control to select the desired address between 1 to 30 5 Press the rotary Adjust Enter control to commit the new address Terminal Configuration Data Format 6 16 The terminal program allows for communication with the power supply To use a terminal program set it up using the parameters from the following sections If you wish to use HyperTerminal see Setting Up a HyperTerminal Connection on page 6 17 for instructions Serial data format is 8 bit one stop bit No parity bit Flow control none M370430 01 Rev C Communications Options End of Message The end of message is the Carriage Return character ASCII 13 0x0D The power supply ignores the Line Feed ASCII 10 0x0A character Setting Up a HyperTerminal Connection To set up a HyperTerminal connection 1 Start Windows HyperTerminal by clicking Start gt All Program gt Accessories gt Communications gt HyperTerminal See Figure 6 20 Pen Cont tion Hyper Terminal Fle Edt Wew Cal Trawie Heb Da 624 DI Dis
250. oubleshooting procedures for connecting and setting up ENET communications Troubleshooting for the Combined ENET RS 485 Communication One of the power supply units is not responding Sequentially several units are not responding e g from 21 to end All of the units are not responding 6 30 The power supply is not turned on The communication interface is not set as a slave unit RS 485 or the address has not been set correctly RS 485 communication is disconnected at the first unit that is not responding The ENET communication is disconnected The HyperTerminal session is not configured properly Turn the power supply ON Check that the RS 485 bus is selected as the communication interface and the address is correct Check your RS 485 communication Try switching the cable linking this unit to the last unit that is known to have given a response Check the ENET communication Check the settings of the HyperTerminal session Follow the instructions in the Selecting ENET as the Communication Port on page 6 16 M370430 01 Rev C Communications Options Troubleshooting for ENET Communication Devicelnstaller does not Your ENET cable is nota Use the correct ENET cross detect your device cross cable cable Power supply is not turned Turn the power supply ON on The network that your Connect a laptop to the HUB computer is on cannot reach or to the switch that the unit the netw
251. ovde bove devo fs 4 3 REMOTE PROGRAMMING OPTIONS eee eee eee eee eee eee sete tees sees ees eee eeoone 4 4 APG PINS AND FUNCTIONS Jl eeccccecccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccsccccsessssssssssessssssosusues 4 5 AUX OUTPUT AND ISOL CONNECTOR PINS AND FUNCTIONS J3 4 21 REMOTE CONTROL CONNECTOR PINS AND FUNCTIONS J4 AND J61 5 3 81 55 PINOUTS e r eana AA 5 4 RJS PINOUBS 2 eve ILI cece tetestlersiateceteledeiersia ee R 0499 CCNA eee REEL 5 4 DB 25 PINOUETS 5n ice SUV re vie voii 04966 eU VI ETU IE EPE Ede i Vo G 5 5 DBO PINOUTS e EO IERI ILIO IEEE LEE eaten A Ua TEE E 5 7 RJ 45 PLUG PINOUES a2 ue e ERIT A TWEEN AVETE EAR Nd RO 5 7 RJ 45 PLUG ON SLAVE UNIT 5usccisisive isis ete 4444646966400650 e 6369664008606444 64696664 5 8 RULES FOR MULTICHANNEL RESPONSES eee e ee eee eee eee eee eoe esee oseteeos 5 27 STATUS BYTE SUMMARY REGISTER cssssccssssssccssssscccssssccccsssscccssssccessess 5 32 STANDARD EVENT STATUS REGISTER cccccccooocco0000000000000000000000000000000000 5 36 OPERATION STATUS REGISTER cccccccocccc0000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000 5 40 OPERATION SHUTDOWN STATUS REGISTER cccccccssssssscscccccccccccceeees 5 41 OPERATION SHUTDOWN PROTECTION STATUS REGISTER 5 41 M370430 01 Rev C TABLE 5 14 TABLE 5 15 TABLE 5 16 TABLE 5 17 TABLE 5 18 TABLE 5 19 TABLE 7 1 TABLE A 1 TABLE A 2 TABLE A 3 TABLE A 4 TABLE A 5 TABLE A 6 TABLE A 7 TAB
252. ower Supply Connections to RS 485 Bus Up to 30 units may be connected to the RS 485 bus The first unit master unit connects to the controller via any appropriate port and the other units slave units are connected with the RS 485 bus via the J6 connector All units connected together should also have unique multichannel addresses A standard straight through RJ 45 Ethernet network cable can be used to provide the connection between the power supplies See Figure 5 13 RS 232 RS 485 USB GPIB id RS 485 IN OUT IN IN OUT J4 J6 J4 J6 Power Supply 1 Power Supply 2 J4 J6 Power Supply 30 Figure 5 15 Multi Power Supply Connection to RS 485 Bus M370430 01 Rev C 9 19 Remote Operation Multiple Power Supply Setup Master Setup Configure the master XG XTR by selecting the communication interface you wish to use to communication with the Master and follow the setup instruction in this chapter Important If either RS 232 or RS 485 are used for communication with the master the data rate must be configured for 9600 bps to properly communicate with the slave units Slave Setup 1 Turn the 9 position mode control to PGM rE is displayed in the output voltage display 2 Turn the rotary Adjust Enter control to select LhAn and press the control to enter the setting 3 Set a unique address See Multichannel Address Setting on page 5 25 5 20 M370430 01 Rev C Remote Operation Terminal Configuration
253. ower supply is configured to be a Current Share Slave 0 42 M370430 01 Rev C Remote Operation Operation Status Register Commands The response format for all register queries will be in decimal notation Query Operation Status Register Event SCPI command STATus lt channe l gt OPERation EVENt 2 Query Operation Status Register Condition SCPI command STATus channel OPERation CONDition Enable Operation Status Register SCPI command STATus channel OPERation ENABle status enable Query Format STATus channel OPERation ENABle Set Operation Status Positive Transition Filter SCPI command STATus channel OPERation PTRansition status enable Query Format STATus channel OPERation PTRansition Set Operation Status Negative Transition Filter SCPI command STATus channel OPERation NTRansition status enable Query Format STATus channel OPERation NTRansition M370430 01 Rev C 9 43 Remote Operation Current Sharing Sub Register Commands Query Current Share Event SCPI command STATus lt channel gt OPERation Query Current Share Condition SCPI command STATus lt channel gt OPERation Enable Current Share Sub Register SCPI command STATus lt channel gt OPERation lt statusenable gt Query format STATus lt channel gt OPERation Set Current Share Positive Transition Filte
254. peration Quick Tip Remote operation uses these SCPI commands See page 5 1 3 16 5 Once the desired value has been set press the rotary Adjust Enter control to commit the setting Important The control circuits have been designed to allow you to set the output voltage up to 105 over the model rated maximum value The power supply will operate within these extended ranges but full performance to specification is not guaranteed The SCPI command s for these instructions are SOURce channel VOLTage LEVE1 IMMediate AMPLitude Important The maximum and minimum setting values of the output voltage are limited by the Over Voltage Protection and Under Voltage Protection settings To set the current set point IspT 1 Turn the 9 position mode control to the AMPS position or press the rotary Adjust Enter control if the 9 position mode control is already at the AMPS position The voltage set point is blinking in the output voltage display The output current will be displayed in the output current display 2 Setthe desired current value using the rotary Adjust Enter control 3 Press the rotary Adjust Enter control to transition to Fine Adjust mode The set point blinks faster to indicate fine adjust tracking mode 4 Set the desired current value using the rotary Adjust Enter control 5 Once the desired value has been set press the rotary Adjust Enter control to commit the setting Impo
255. peration Programming Table C 4 Remote Operation Programming Programming Mode Voltage and Current Output Voltage Programming Votage and Current Output Resistive Programming Output Voltage and Current Monitor Voltage Programming Accuracy Current Programming Accuracy Power Programming Accuracy Voltage Readback Accuracy Current Readback Accuracy Power Readback Accuracy Isolation Prog and Readback Lines Voltage and Current Programming Resolution Power Programming Resolution OVP Programming Resolution Voltage and Current Readback Resolution Power Readback Resolution Parallel Operation Series Operation Constant Voltage CV Constant Current CC Indicator Shutdown Control OUTPUT ENABLE Auxiliary Control Power Supply Status Signal Interlock Enable Disable APG ISOL Digital 0 100 Voltage control range is 0 0 to 2 0 10 0V in 0 1V increments 0 100 Resistive control range is 0 0 to 2 0 10 0K in 0 1K increments 0 100 Output voltage monitor range is 0 0 to 2 0 10 0V in 0 1V increments 0 5 of rated output voltage max 0 to 4 0V 4K Ohm range 0 1 of rated output voltage 0 5 of rated output voltage typical in other ranges 1 0 of rated output current max 0 to 4 0V 4K Ohm range 0 2 of rated output current 1 0 of rated output current typical in other ranges 1 of range full scale 0 1 of rated output voltage 1 of range full scale 0 2 of rated output c
256. perly Java can be installed from the Java website M370430 01 Rev C 6 55 Communications Options Home Product Support Contact Us AMETEK DC Power Supplies PROGRAMMABLE POWER Sorensen Programmable Power Products IP Address 192 168 1 101 MAC Address 90 02 04 AB EF EF Host Name LAN Instrument Address String TCPIP0 192 168 1 101 5025 SOCKET LXI Compliance Class C LXI version 1 2 Description XG Power Supply Manufacturer AMETEK Model XG 20 42 0 Serial Number SN 0936A03865 Firmware 2 10 Figure 6 36 Home Page An easy way to get the power supply s address is to use the AMETEK LXI Discovery Browser Simply turn your power supply on You may need to click the refresh button in order to locate the supply But if it is reachable from your PC then it will display the power supply You can double click on the power supply to automatically bring up a Web browser that will open to the power supply s Home page 6 37 shows a screen capture of the IP Address Manufacturer Model Sein Version 132 158 1 10f AMETEK AG 20 420 SNH 0936403365 82 10 Host Name tesla IP Address 192 168 1 100 2007 AMETER Programmable Power Inc Refresh 6 56 M370430 01 Rev C Communications Options Connecting with Power Supply Hidden Behind a Router It is more difficult to communicate with the power supply when it is hidden from the PC by a router An example of such a situation is in
257. point that is reached first based on the Ry either Vsgr or Isgr will determine which mode the power supply will remain in The operating mode is indicated by either the CC mode LED or the CV mode LED one of which will illuminate on the front panel M370430 01 Rev C Local Operation Output disabled The mode of operation is not determined until the output is enabled The CV and CC mode LEDs will not indicate the mode while the output is disabled Constant Voltage CV Mode Operation If the output is enabled and the configured current set point is much higher than the requirements for the attached load then the voltage will rise until it reaches the voltage set point When the output voltage reaches the voltage set point it stops rising The unit will continue to operate in CV mode The load current will still vary to meet any changes in required load current draw resulting from a change in the attached load Constant Current CC Mode Operation If the output 1s enabled the voltage and current start to rise At this time the unit is operating in CV mode default operational mode As the load current drawn reaches the value of the output current setting the unit will switch to CC mode and not allow any additional current to be drawn above the value of Isgr The unit is now operating in CC mode The voltage will still vary to meet any changes in required output voltage resulting from a change in the attached load Constant Power
258. ponses Condition Response Example No multichannel Only the device selected SYSTem VERSion address used using the adr or SYST lt address gt COMM MCH ADDR commands will respond The device addressed in the SYSTem2 VERSion single multichannel address specified command will respond regardless of if it has been selected ALL or broadcast Only the device selected SYSTem multichannel using the adr ALL VERSion address specified or SYST channel C OMM MCH ADDR or commands will respond If SYSTem0 VERSion none of the devices have been selected then no response will be seen Multiple Only the device selected SYSTem multichannel using the adr or 1 2 4 5 6 VERSion addresses specified SYST lt address gt COMM MCH ADDR commands will respond If none of the device have been selected then no response will be seen 0 2 Remote Operation Multichannel commands are particularly useful for configuring groups of devices that require identical configurations The SCPI Commands for these instructions are root command lt ALL addrl1 gt lt addr2 gt I lt addr3 gt lt command gt lt parameter gt For example sour ly 2y e GP ESROLHDE 4 Syst4 5 6 0per enab 255 syst ALL clear outputO0 stat on 5 28 M370430 01 Rev C Remote Operation Status Reporting in SCPI M370430 01 Rev C The status reporting implemented in the XG XTR 1s primari
259. position mode control to the CAP position or press the rotary adjust Enter control if the control knob 1s already at the CAP position LHPr is displayed on the output voltage display 2 Turn the rotary Adjust Enter control to select U 5 voltage source from isolated connector 3 Press the rotary adjust Enter control to commit the selected mode LE L is displayed on the output voltage display 4 Select the input source level using the rotary adjust Enter control 5 Once the desired level has been selected press the rotary adjust Enter control to commit the change The display will return to the normal display Deactivating ISOL Current Mode To deactivate the ISOL current mode 1 Turn the 9 position mode control to the VAP position or press the rotary Adjust Enter control if the control knob is already at the VAP position 2 LHPr is displayed on the output voltage display 3 Turn the rotary Adjust Enter control to select nanE 4 Press the rotary Adjust Enter control to commit the change The display will return to the normal display M370430 01 Rev C 4 25 Analog Programming APG and Isolated Analog Programming ISOL Query for ISOL Current Input Level Quick Tip Remote operation uses these SCPI commands See page 5 1 4 26 To query for ISOL current input level from non isolated input 1 Turn the 9 position mode control to the CAP position or press the rotary Adjust Enter control if the control knob
260. power supply e Any alarm has tripped and been cleared automatically 3 23 Local Operation Alarm Masking 3 24 The alarm LED will remain illuminated until the alarm is manually cleared see Clearing Triggered and Manual Alarms on page 3 22 or by turning the main output on if the alarm has automatically been cleared It is possible to completely disable some alarms through the use of the alarm mask If an alarm is masked then this masking will prevent it from registering in the SCPI conditions registers as well as not triggering the alarm The alarms that can be masked are identified in Table 3 4 on page 3 21 Setting the bit position 1 of an alarm will result in the alarm being enabled Clearing the bit position 0 of an alarm will result in the alarm being masked disabled For Example If you wanted to enable the OTP Foldback and UVP alarms you would take the foldback value of 256 and the UVP value of 1024 to get a mask of 1280 This is the value you would send with the SCPI command Control of the alarm mask is only available using the SCPI command The SCPI command s for these instructions are SYSTem lt channel gt PROTection MASK The mask command takes a single parameter made up of the sum of the values for the alarms that are to be masked See Table 3 5 for the alarm values associated with each maskable alarm Table 3 5 Alarm Mask Bit Positions Alarm Bit Position Value Over Temperature Protect
261. pple is measured at 10 100 output voltage and full output current 9 When using remote sense the total of the load voltage and the load line drops must not exceed the rated output of the power supply For example for an XG XTR 6 110 in an application with 1 V of load line loss 0 5 V Line the maximum available load voltage would be 6 1 5 V Note The unit may operate at higher output voltages than this but there is no guarantee that the power supply will meet performance specifications Ultimately the upper limit of the output voltage will be determined by internal circuitry of the power supply non adjustable 10 With rated resistive load 11 At 100 200 Vac input voltage and maximum output power 12 OCP set point can be programmed from 0 105 of rated current Applies to all footnotes Programming and Readback RS 232 RS 485 USB built in GPIB Ethernet optional Specifications are guaranteed from 1 to 100 of the rated output voltage current and power AC Line Input Specifications for XG XTR 850 Watt The input to the power supply requires the following input specifications Rated AC Input Voltage Frequency 100 240 Vac 47 63 Hz Operational AC Input Voltage Frequency 85 265 Vac continuous single phase 360 440 Hz 47 63 Hz Input Current at 100 200 Vac 11 5 6 A Inrush Current 100 200 Vac Less than 25 A Power Factor Correction 0 99 100 200 Vac rated output power Contact factory for details regarding this
262. ptions Direct to PC Connection Connect the instrument directly to a PC LAN port with a crossover cable similar to an Ethernet cable but wired differently to enable direct connection rather than through a network Next establish an IP address for the instrument You can assign a static IP address by using the same address as the PC that the instrument is connected to To find the PC s IP address use the ipconfig exe command per in the section on Private Network Connection next Private Network Connection A private network has no DHCP server therefore the instrument would be connected to a Windows PC with a crossover cable and manually assigned a static IP address matching that of the PC The available IP address range assigned by the Internet Assigned Network Authority LANA for Automatic Private IP Addressing APIPA is 169 254 0 0 to 169 254 255 255 When setting up a private network you will have to log off and disconnect first from any network connection and re log in to Windows To check the PC s IP address run the ipconfig exe program from the command prompt The screen on a private network should look as follows Microsoft R Windows DOS C Copyright Microsoft Corp 1990 2001 C gt ipconfig Windows IP Configuration Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection Connection specific DNS Suffix IP Address 169 254 0 208 Subnet Mask e 2554 25530240 Default Gateway To determine what IP address to us
263. put voltage and full output current 9 When using remote sense the total of the load voltage and the load line drops must not exceed the rated output of the power supply For example for an XG XTR 6 220 in an application with 1 V of load line loss 0 5 V Line the maximum available load voltage would be 6 1 5 V Note The unit may operate at higher output voltages than this but there is no guarantee that the power supply will meet performance specifications Ultimately the upper limit of the output voltage will be determined by internal circuitry of the power supply non adjustable 10 With rated resistive load 11 At 100 200 Vac input voltage and maximum output power Applies to all footnotes Programming and Readback RS 232 RS 485 USB built in GPIB Ethernet optional Specifications are guaranteed from 1 to 100 of the rated output voltage current and power AC Line Input Specifications for XG XTR 1700 Watt The input to the power supply requires the following input specifications Rated AC Input Voltage Frequency 100 240 Vac 47 63 Hz Operational AC Input Voltage Frequency 85 265 Vac continuous single phase 360 440 Hz 47 63 Hz single phase Input Current at 100 200 Vac 23 12 A Inrush Current 100 200 Vac Less than 50 A Power Factor Correction 0 99 100 200 Vac rated output power Contact factory for details regarding this mode of operation suoneoiyioedg 98 0 o 8H L0 0 T0Z IN Remote O
264. r SCPI command STATus lt channel gt OPERation status enable Query format STATus channel OPERation Set Current Share Negative Transition Filter SCPI command STATus lt channel gt OPERation status enable Query format STATus lt channel gt OPERation 5 44 CSHare EVENt CSHare CONDition CSHare CSHare CSHare CSHare CSHare CSHare ENABlIe ENABle PTRansition PTRansition NTRansition NTRansition M370430 01 Rev C Remote Operation Shutdown Sub Register Commands Query Shutdown Event SCPI command STATus channel Query Shutdown Condition SCPI command STATus lt channel gt Enable Shutdown Sub Register SCPI command STATus lt channel gt status enable Query format STATus channel Set Shutdown Positive Transition Filter SCPI command STATus channel status enable Query format STATus channel Set Shutdown Negative Transition Filter SCPI command STATus lt channel gt status enable Query format STATus lt channel gt M370430 01 Rev C OPERation SHUTdown EVENt OPERation SHUTdown CONDition OPERation SHUTdown ENABlIe OPERation SHUTdown ENABlIe OPERation SHUTdown PTRansition OPERation SHUTdown PTRansition OPERation SHUTdown NTRansition OPERation SHUTdown NTRansition 9 45 Remote Operatio
265. r Current lt Level 2 APG Level can be between 10 gt MAXimum MI 2 10 volts Nimum Select the current device to receive the commands The parameter for this command is the address set on the front panel under the remote Alter or query the state of LOCal AVOLtag e TAVoltage ARE Sistive IAResis tive the remote programming voltage APG source 39U313J34Y puguliulO2 dOS 9cV o 9eH L0 0 Tv0Z IN Table A 9 System Commands Continued Setup the SYSTem channel REMote SOURCce Current control RRent APG source Set Front Panell SYSTem channel REMote STATe lock state Power On JSYSTem channel PON VOLTage Voltage Low Power On SYSTem channel PON CURRent Current Low Output Enable Voltage Low Output Enable Current Low Query SCPI Version SYSTem channel VERSion SCPI Help Legacy Help SYSTem channel HELP LEGacy j SYSTem channel PON ENADblIe VOLTag SYSTem channel PON ENAble CURRen SYSTem channel HELP HEADers Alter or query the state of LOCal AVOLtag the remote programming e IAVoltage ARE current APG source Sistive IAResis tive Change front panel control LOCal1 REMote mode Set the voltage set point to zero when the power is turned on Set the current set point to zero when the power is turned on Set the voltage set point to ON OFF Yes zero when the output enable button
266. r example to set the tcp port to 5025 the command would be SYST COMM LAN PORT 5025 Any change to this value will NOT take effect until after power on the unit has been cycled LAN Default Lan factory default settings are entered by setting the right Knob to the PGM location and then selecting LAN with the left knob and pressing and holding it until the LAn R5t message appears on the front panel The IP address is set to DHCP or AUTO IP Alternatively the LAN may be reset with the SCPI command SYST COMM LAN DEFAULT Once you have an IP address you can test the IP address from your Windows PC by using the ping utility under MS DOS To use the ping utility bring up a DOS window using the start menu Start gt Programs gt Accessories gt Command Prompt At the command prompt type ping lt IP address gt M370430 01 Rev C 6 53 Communications Options This will send an IP ping request to the power source For this to work the power source must be turned on and connected to the same network as the PC Also the power source interface configuration must be set to use a baud rate of 460 800 If the IP address is found it will look like this Microsoft R Windows DOS C Copyright Microsoft Corp 1990 2001 C gt ping 100 10 1 63 Pinging 100 10 1 63 with 32 bytes of data Reply from 100 10 1 63 bytes 32 time lt lms Reply from 100 10 1 63 bytes 32 time lt ims Reply from 100 10 1 63 bytes 32 time lt lms Reply from 100 10 1
267. r lowest noise performance use shielded twisted pair wiring of 20 to 26 AWG of the shortest length possible Ground the shield to pin J1 7 analog common on the Analog Programming Connector or to the chassis via one of the Analog Programming Connector screws M370430 01 Rev C Analog Programming APG and Isolated Analog Programming ISOL Analog Programming Mode For more details about connections for your particular model see Rear Panel Connectors on 850 Watt Models on page 1 7 or Rear Panel Connectors on 1500 and 1700 Watt Models on page 1 9 CAUTION Equipment damage The program monitor signal and return are internally connected to the power supply s negative output Do not attempt to bias these away from that potential See Making Control Connections on page 4 7 Analog Programming With External Voltage Source The pin numbers are described in Table 4 3 on page 4 6 Figure 4 4 Programming Output Voltage using an External Voltage Source Figure 4 5 Programming Output Current using an External Voltage Source M370430 01 Rev C 4 9 Analog Programming APG and Isolated Analog Programming ISOL Voltage Controlled Voltage APG Setup Activating APG Voltage Mode To activate APG voltage mode using an external voltage source 1 Turn the 9 position mode control to the VAP position or press the rotary Adjust Enter control if the mode control is already at the VAP position UAPr is displayed on the output volta
268. rON STATe Constant Power Mode version 2 21 and higher M370430 01 Rev C In Constant Power Mode the power supply will continually adjust the current levels to maintain a constant power set point This mode is intended primarily for loads with response time greater than approximately 100ms In order to provide additional protection for the load voltage and current limits may be set while in the constant power mode If the unit cannot regulate to the Constant Power setting due to load conditions it will regulate at either the voltage or the current limit depending on the load demand Example CP Mode Constant Power set 500W Voltage limit 61V Current limit 20A To activate Constant Power mode and set the value 3 Turn the 9 position mode control to the FLD position or press the rotary Adjust Enter control if the 9 position mode control is already at the FLD position 4 Turn the rotary Adjust Enter control until DAA XIT is displayed Press the rotary Adjust Enter control Turn the Adjust Enter control to the desired set point Press the rotary Adjust Enter control D V Ve 2o Turn the Adjust Enter control control for fine adjustment Local Operation 9 Press the rotary Adjust Enter control to commit the Constant Power operation To disable Constant Power operation 1 Turn the 9 position mode control to the FLD position or press the rotary Adjust Enter control if the 9 position mode control is already at t
269. rate in the CONTroller Sharing Mode l E current share controller or slave mode If only a single unit is being used it should be set to controller set SOURce channel CURRent LEVel Set current set point Current Set Immediate IMMediate AMPLitude immediate Point gt MAXimum Current Set MINimum point Set Constant 90URce POWer LbVel Set constant power set point Power Set Point gt Yes Power Set immediate point Set Constant SOURCe POWer MODe Set constant power mode 2 ON OFF Power Mode Enable Disable Set SOURce channel VOLTage LEVel Change voltage set point Voltage Set Immediate E au diate l T immediate Point gt JMA Ximum Voltage Set MINimum point Set Over SOURce lt channel gt VOLTage PROTect Set the over voltage lt OVP Set Voltage ion OVERvoltage LEVel protection level Point gt MA Ximum Protection MINimum Level Set Under SOURce channel VOLTage PROTect Set the under voltage lt UVP Set Voltage ion UNDer LEVel protection level Point gt MA Ximum Protection MINimum Level version 2 21 and higher 99U9J9J8H PUPLULWWOD dOS 8L V o 9eH L0 0 Tv0Z IN Table A 4 SCPI Commands for Calibration Restore 3 Factory Calibration Restore EA Default Calibration Calibrate OVP Parameter and Description Range Query CALibration lt channel gt RESTore Restores the calibration to the N
270. rogramming APG and Isolated Analog Programming ISOL Voltage and Current Readback The pin numbers are described in Table 4 3 on page 4 6 Figure 4 8 Voltage Readback Using APG Connector J1 Figure 4 9 Current Readback Using APG Connector J1 M370430 01 Rev C 4 19 Analog Programming APG and Isolated Analog Programming ISOL Isolated Analog Programming Mode ISOL See Rear Panel Connectors on 850 Watt Models on page 1 7 Rear Panel Connectors on 1500 and 1700 Watt Models on page 1 9 for more details about connections AUX Output and Isolated Analog Programming ISOL Connector The AUX Output and Isolated Analog Programming ISOL Connector is a 15 pin female DSUB connector See Figure 4 10 All pins on this connector are electrically isolated from the output of the power supply The AUX Output and ISOL Connector provides access to the following functions Function Auxiliary 5 V and 15 V outputs OUTPUT ENABLE Aux Power On Status output SD Shutdown input Interlock ISOL programming and monitoring IS VOL PR IS VOL PR C IS MON VOL AUX1 45V S MON CUR INTER LOCK 1 INTER LOCK 2 MAIN PS GOO XG XTRIS00 and XG XTR850 1700 optional standard COM ISOLATE AUX1 amp AUX2 ISO CUR RES P COM ISOLATE ISO VOL RES AUX2 15V SD Shutdown Main O P Figure 4 10 AUX Output and ISOL Connector Pinout 4 20 M370430 01 Rev C Analog Programming APG and Isolated An
271. rtant The control circuits have been designed so that output current can be set up to 105 over the model rated maximum values The power supply will operate within these extended ranges but full performance to specification is not guaranteed The SCPI command s for these instructions are SOURce channel CURRent LEVEL IMMediate AMPLitude M370430 01 Rev C Local Operation Shipped Configuration Local Operation The power supply is configured for local operation at the factory See Table 3 3 for a summary of this configuration For more information on default settings see Table 3 9 on page 3 43 Table 3 3 Shipped Configuration Local Control Configuration Additional References Use the front panel controls to See Chapter 3 Local Operation for front adjust the output voltage and panel operation See Chapter 4 Analog current set point settings Programming APG and Isolated Analog Programming ISOL for analog programming procedures The OVP set point is adjusted at See Using Over Voltage Protection OVP the front panel to 105 above on page 3 28 for the adjustment procedure the maximum rated output voltage Enabling the Output Enabling the output on will also turn off the ALARM LED if the ALARM LED has been latched on due to an alarm triggering and automatically clearing See Alarms and Errors on page 3 21 To enable the output power Press the OUTPUT ENABLE Main but
272. ry Adjust Enter control to commit the change The display will return to the normal display M370430 01 Rev C 4 17 Analog Programming APG and Isolated Analog Programming ISOL Query for Analog Current Input Level Quick Tip Remote operation uses these SCPI commands See page5 1 4 18 To query for analog current input level from non isolated input le Turn the 9 position mode control to the CAP position or press the rotary Adjust Enter control if the mode control is already at the CAP position LAPr is displayed on the output voltage display If the mode is currently nont then select any other APG mode If this step is done be sure to restore the APG setting to nanE when the operation is complete Otherwise do not rotate the rotary Adjust Enter control to keep the current APG mode Press the rotary Adjust Enter control to select the APG mode The output voltage display should read LE L and the output current display will display APG level Press the rotary Adjust Enter control to return to normal mode If the APG mode was modified in step 2 execute the procedure to deactivate the APG voltage mode The SCPI commands for these instructions are 9SYSTem schannel REMote SOURCe CURRent lt LOCal AVOLtage IAVoltagel ARESistive IAResistive SYSTem channel COMMunicate APRogram LEVel CURRent ISOlated MEASure channel SCALar APRogram CURRent DC M370430 01 Rev C Analog P
273. s AMETEK XG1700 SOUR COMB CSH CONT OUTP PROT LOOP ON sD Shutdown Main Q P J3 12 MAIN PS GOOD J3 13 J3 06 COM ISOLATE AMETEK XG1700 SOUR COMB CSH CONT OUTP PROT LOOP ON J3 02 COM ISOLATE SD Shutdown Main O P J3 12 J3 06 COM ISOLATE MAIN PS GOOD J3 13 AMETEK XG1700 SOUR COMB CSH CONT OUTP PROT LOOP ON J3 02 COM ISOLATE sD Shutdown Main Q P J3 12 J3 06 COM ISOLATE MAIN PS GOOD J3 13 To enable or disable Loop Protection l 2 The SCPI command s for these instructions are 43 02 COM_ISOLATEr Turn the 9 position mode control to the PRT position PRO OVP is displayed Turn the rotary Adjust Enter control until LOOP PRO is Press the rotary Adjust control to display LOOP ON or OFF Press the rotary Adjust control to change the setting to ON or Press the rotary Adjust control to accept the change OUTPut lt channel gt PROTection Loop STATe M370430 01 Rev C 3 35 Local Operation Interlock Function The Interlock function can be used to wire an external shutoff switch that can be used to enable or disable the power supply output When the switch is closed the power supply will operate normally If the switch is opened the power supply will trigger the interlock alarm The output will be disabled the display will blink toc and the ALARM LED will illuminate This alarm will automatically clear when the switch closes again and the output will automatically be
274. s Must have a homepage This ensures all LXI compliant devices have a similar look and which displays feel to their Web pages manufacturer serial number IP address etc A Web page button that causes an LED to flash on the power Function supply This makes determining which power supply a user is communicating with simpler This page allows for changing the values of LAN parameters like IP address Gateway Subnet Mask etc Remote Procedure Calls RPC RPCS are a part of the Open Network Consortium RPC is designed to facilitate distributed programming In the case of power supplies it allows for a program running on a computer to communicate to any number of power supplies over the network Drivers LXI compliant devices are required to provide an IVI Specific Driver M370430 01 Rev C 6 65 Communications Options 6 66 M370430 01 Rev C Calibration and Troubleshooting Chapter 7 Calibration and Troubleshooting contains information and procedures for calibrating and troubleshooting the power supply Calibration and Troubleshooting Introduction The calibration of the power supply is software dependent and there are no potentiometers to adjust Calibration is performed via SCPI commands The following items need to be calibrated e Programmed voltage e Voltage readback e Programmed current Current readback e Non isolated voltage monitoring e Isolated voltage monitoring e Non isolated current mo
275. s purchased e Inthe USA contact the AMETEK Repair Department prior to the return of the product to AMETEK for repair Telephone 800 733 5427 ext 2295 or ext 2463 toll free North America 858 450 0085 ext 2295 or ext 2463 direct Outside the United States contact the nearest Authorized Service Center ASC A full listing can be found either through your local distributor or our website www programmablepower com by clicking Support and going to the Service Centers tab 2 When requesting an RMA have the following information ready e Model number Serial number e Description of the problem NOTE Unauthorized returns will not be accepted and will be returned at the shipper s expense NOTE A returned product found upon inspection by AMETEK to be in specification is subject to an evaluation fee and applicable freight charges il M370430 01 Rev C About This Manual firmware v2 0 and higher Purpose Scope Audience The Operating Manual provides installation and operating information for the XG and XTR Family Programmable DC Power Supply The Manual provides safety information features and specifications installation procedures functional test procedures and operating procedures for both local front panel operation and remote operation The Manual also provides information on the GPIB interface option and LX compliant Ethernet ENET interface for models with the MEB and MEA options The Manual is
276. se units are only supported as defaults To place the unit in the command will cause an error to be pushed into the error queue A 2 M370430 01 Rev B SCPI Command Reference SCPI Command Hierarchy M370430 01 Rev C SCPI is an ASCII based command language designed for use in test and measurement equipment The command structure is organized around common roots or nodes which are the building blocks of SCPI subsystems An example of a common root is CALibration and some of the commands that reside in the CALuibration subsystem are CALibration OUTPut VOLTage DATA NR1 SCUREKent DATA lt NR1 gt CALuibration is the root keyword of the command OUTPut is a second level keyword and VOLTage and DATA are third level keywords A colon is used to separate a command keyword from a lower level keyword SCPI Command Reference Using SCPI Commands This Manual shows SCPI commands in the following format CALibration CURRent LEVel lt current gt MIN MAX The command is expressed as a mixture of upper and lowercase letters The uppercase letters suggest how the command can be abbreviated into a short form SCPI commands can be sent in long or short forms The short form is better for data entry The long form is better for readability Command strings are not case sensitive CURR Curr andcurr are all acceptable abbreviations for CURRent As for the long form CURRENT Current and current are all acceptabl
277. service requests To clear the Service Request Enable Register send sRE 0 A cleared register does not allow status information to generate a service request For example Sending SRE 8 Sets bit 3 of the Service Request Enable Register This will cause the Summary bit of the Questionable Status register bit 3 in the Status Byte to generate a service request message whenever it gets set See Status Byte on page 5 32 for details Command SERE Service Request Enable SRE The SCPI equivalent for multichannel use STATus channel SREQuest ENABle status enable STATus lt channel gt SREQuest ENABle Query the Status Byte The status byte query will return the contents of the status byte register and the MSS Master Summary Status message The response is in the format of a weighted decimal value representing the status byte register and the MSS message bit 6 Thus the response to STB is identical to the response to a serial poll except that the MSS message appears in bit 5 in place of the RQS message See Status Byte on page 5 32 for details Command OLB SCPI equivalent STATus lt address gt SBYTe EVENt 5 34 M370430 01 Rev C Remote Operation Standard Event Status Register SESR The standard event status register sets bits for specific events during power supply operation All bits in the standard event status registers are set through the error event queue T
278. sition Mode Control Knob to PGM pE 1s displayed in the output voltage display 8 Turn the rotary Adjust Enter control to select SLA and press the rotary Adjust Enter control 9 Setaunique address and press the rotary Adjust Enter control Once all slave units have been setup proceed with the next step 10 Set up the fixed IP address for the first unit using Devicelnstaller as described in Assigning an IP Address to the Power Supply Unit on page 6 12 11 Create and set up a new HyperTerminal session as described in Terminal Configuration on page 6 16 12 In the HyperTerminal session window type the ADR lt gt IDN command where the lt gt should be replaced by the address assigned to the power supply in step 9 Press enter to send the command 13 Verify that the unit responds with the ID string Perform this test for each unit that is connected including the master unit 14 If additional XG XTR units are using Network Topology 2 repeat the setup procedure steps 1 to 14 for each ENET and RS 485 group Important The IP address for each ENET and RS 485 group must be unique but the RS 485 bus addresses can be reused for each unique ENET RS 485 group M370430 01 Rev C 6 29 Communications Options Troubleshooting for XG XTR 850W Model with ENET and or RS 485 Communication This section describes specific troubleshooting for the combined ENET RS 485 communication only followed by typical tr
279. t OUTPut POWer STATe Control Main Output State 2 ON OFF Control Enable Disable Power On 2 OUTPut LsPOWer PONT STATE Control Main Output ONJOFF Main Output Autostart State Enable Control Disable Aux Output 2 JOUIPUE AUXil Tuary so lAle Control Aux Output State ON OFF Control Enable Disable Power L IOUTPUCLAUXILITQaERySPONISSTATe Control Aux Output ON OFF Auxiliary Autostart State Enable Output Control Disable Table A 8 SCPI Commands for Triggering Parameter and SCPI Command Description Range Set Immediate INITiate channel IMMediate Triggers the Autosequence Initiation of Program Trigger System 39U313J34Y puguliulO2 dOS Vo V o 9eH L0 0 Tv0Z IN Table A 9 System Commands Parameter and SCPI Command Description Range Query Sets the menu system 1 20 to one decimal Yes timeout place seconds gt Resets all values to default N A state excluding calibration data nee EE ad Perform unit Self test Yes returns 0 if pass non zero value for failure Set the menu system timeout Resets the Instrument to default values Waitto Continue Self Test ID ID Query c A User Preset Recall User Preset previously Query System Error Code ce 1SYSTem FPANel TIMeout SYSTem lt channel gt SYSTem lt channel gt SYSTem lt channel gt SYSTem lt channel gt SYSTem
280. t command affects only the enable registers and the transition filter registers of the status data structures PRESet does not clear any of the event registers or any item from the error event queue The CLS command is used to clear all event registers and queues in the device status reporting mechanism For the device dependent status data structures the PRESet command sets the enable register to all 1s and the transition filter register to report only positive transitions For the SCPI mandatory status data structures the PRESet command sets the transition filter registers to recognize only positive transitions and sets the enable register to Os The following will not be affected by this command Service Request Enable Register Parallel Poll Enable Register the memory register associated with the SAV command the power supply address Output Queue and the power on status clear flag setting Table 5 18 Preset Values of User Configurable Registers Register Filter Enable Preset Value Positive Transition Fer Negative Transition Fier Positive Transition Fer fi Negative Transition Fier fo Positive Transition Filter 1 Negative Transition Filter SCPI command STATus lt channel gt PRESet M370430 01 Rev C Remote Operation Command Line Help System The Help system is made up of a series of commands that can be used to get help on all available commands and details on their syntax The Help commands are
281. t has received a sharp blow been dropped or otherwise damaged in any way If the instrument is damaged see the Warranty on page 11 5 Do not disassemble the instrument It contains no user serviceable parts See the Warranty on page ii for instructions on obtaining service Attempting to service the instrument yourself may result in a risk of electrical shock or fire Internal capacitors remain charged after all power is disconnected 6 To reduce the risk of electrical shock disconnect AC power from the instrument before attempting any maintenance or cleaning or working on any circuits connected to the instrument Turning off controls will not reduce this risk vi M370430 01 Rev C Contents 1 INTRODUCTION em 1 1 FEATURES AND OPTIONS Ss suec tatit 2 2 ile aaa a n LAE 1 2 XG AND XTR MODELS FIRMWARE VERSION 2 0 AND HIGHER 2cceeceeeeereeees 1 3 iria uz 1 5 Front Panel Display and Controls ccccccssssceccceesseceeeceeeseceesseeaseeeeessaaseeesessaaees 1 6 REAR PANEL CONNECTORS ON 850 WATT MODELS c ccc c ccc mene 1 7 REAR PANEL CONNECTORS ON 1500 AND 1700 WATT MODELS se 1 9 INSTALLATION ec 2 1 BASIC SETUP PROCEDURE roiasc 0226950526064655 ae pest richiama s ec cease ut nian 2 2 STEP 1 INSPECTING AND CLEANING ccccccecceccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeseuecereueceeeuseveceeeueeneeas 2 3 Mitial ThiSpection s i RUE 2 3
282. t the 9 position mode control to PGM NN O a gt REL GAY 2 Turn the rotary encoder knob left side of front panel display to LAN 3 Press and Hold the rotary encoder knob until the LAN reset message appears on the front panel 7 segment display M370430 01 Rev C Communications Options Introduction to the LXI Standard This section is meant only as a brief summary of some of the features of LXI For a more complete description of LXI please refer to the LXI Consortium Home Page The authoritative description of LXI 1s the LXI standard VXI Discovery LXI devices are required to conform to the VXI 11 discovery protocol The AMETEK LXI Discovery Browser uses this discovery protocol to locate LXI compliant devices on the network This makes communicating with devices and locating their addresses simpler LAN Requirements LXI mandates many useful LAN requirements Dynamically If there is no DHCP server available the unit will use the Dynamically Configured Link Configured Link Local Addressing protocol to assign itself a link local Local address This is useful for cases when a network is down or unavailable Addressing but the user still wants to connect to the power supply DHCP The unit can obtain a dynamic address using the DHCP protocol Static IP The unit can be given a static IP Web Page Must be WSC compliant This ensures that the pages will display correctly on all W3C compliant Web browser
283. t via the front panel the set point will stop allowing the value to decrement If the user attempts to configure an OVP set point that is less than 105 of the voltage set point via SCPI a 221 settings conflict error will be pushed onto the error queue M370430 01 Rev C Local Operation Defining the OVP Set Point To define the OVP set point 1 Turn the power supply On Ensure the voltage is lower than the desired set point 2 Set the output to the desired voltage OVP can be set without setting desired output voltage first 3 Turn the 9 position mode control to the PRT position IIpo OYII is displayed 4 Press the rotary Adjust Enter control Turn the rotary Adjust Enter control to set the upper limit protection See Coarse and Fine Adjustment Modes on page 3 3 Important The OVP range is variable from VSET 5 to VMAX 25 6 Once the desired value has been set press the rotary Adjust Enter control to commit the setting The SCPI command s for these instructions are SOURce channel VOLTage PROTection OVERvoltage LEVel If the output is between OVP and 5 an OVP warning message is possible when in APG mode M370430 01 Rev C 3 29 Local Operation Using Under Voltage Protection UVP Important UVP will not be active for voltage set points that are less than 1 of model voltage The UVP prevents voltage settings below a set value The UVP lets you create a voltage window of op
284. t which hardware interface to use and follow the instructions and diagram for that hardware set up Configuring Remote Control Using RS 232 To configure remote control using RS 232 1 Use the top J4 connector of the two 8 pin RJ 45 jacks as shown in Figure 5 1 to connect to the RS 232 remote interface 2 Connect from PC to power supply using a cable that meets the cabling specifications listed in Table 5 1 5 2 M370430 01 Rev C Remote Operation J4 RS 232 and RS 485 connector in port J6 RS 232 and RS 485 connector out port Figure 5 1 Remote Control Connectors Table 5 1 Remote Control Connector Pins and Functions J4 and J6 Pi J4 1 J4 2 J4 3 J4 4 J4 5 J4 6 J4 7 J4 8 J6 9 J6 10 J6 11 J6 12 J6 13 J6 14 J6 15 J6 16 gt Reference Direction Function Ground 1 All references and directions indicated in this table are with respect to the XG XTR M370430 01 Rev C 5 3 Remote Operation RS 232 Communication Cable with RJ 45 to DB 9 Communication control cable with DB 9 connector male on the PC side and RJ 45 shielded connector on the power supply The cable length should be 9 84 feet 3 m or longer Table 5 2 DB 9 Pinouts Pin Name Description l No connection 3 Transmit data pag 4 No connection 5 Ground 6 7 8 9 NC No connection Table 5 3 RJ 45 Pinouts Pin Description Transmit data Twisted pair 5 4 M370430 01 Rev C DB 9 Pinout Figure 5 2
285. te set of values 8 bit EOS Compare o Changes to P board settings Set EOI with EOS on Write o do not affect Advanced Settings open handles to this H5488 Cable Length D Disabled v interface You F must close all Parallel Poll Duration 0 2 usec v existing handles to this Assert REN when SC F arr Bus Timing 2 500nsec w before the settings are applied to new handles Note By default yo SE 8 cal GPIB Board Settings This section provides access to all GPIB board settings E Connected Instruments oe Instrument PAD SAD Identification Hardware Model and Instrument 1 None Ametek XG 600 1 4 SN 1104400207 1 14 Build 27 02 12 09 G Number are ror information only and cannot be changed while others such as Interface ID v GF Properties ai T ill Figure 5 13 Scanning for Instruments 7 Inthe right window click on Instrument 0 and review the device properties See Figure 5 14 M370430 01 Rev C 5 17 Remote Operation a e H raiet emer nna nst E iren ine dm cmo WI deas isset XTR Be NG ar p pa ful 27 id 1G umen DAROE Blei n Baalcs Whai da yc S d Bai Creaa mari bs dat 14 Place TE Peine reed T FZ Pod fete irene m teria bal zum Tr ETS Ficaaa b E Simars i T icem Plains ji oy F amia Yate pel Maer Si ia dal x GPIB Instrument Settings Qi tiu Sip S Pons Figure 5 14 Instrument Properties 8 Click Communicate w
286. te the procedure to deactivate the APG voltage mode The SCPI commands for these instructions are SYSTem lt channel gt REMote SOURce VOLTage LOCal AVOLtage IAVoltagel ARESistive IAResistive SYSTem channel COMMunicate APRogram LEVel VOLTage TSO bared MEASure channel SCALar APRogram VOLTage DC M370430 01 Rev C Analog Programming APG and Isolated Analog Programming ISOL Resistive Controlled Current APG Setup To activate APG current mode using an external resistor source 1 Turn the 9 position mode control to the CAP position to press the rotary Adjust Enter control if the control knob is already at CAP position LAPr is displayed on the output voltage display 2 Turn rotary Adjust Enter control to select rn ISi voltage source from non isolated connector 3 Press the rotary Adjust Enter control to commit the selected mode LE L is displayed on the output voltage display 4 Once the desired level has been selected press the rotary Adjust Enter control to commit the change The display will return to the normal display Deactivating APG Current Mode To deactivate the APG current mode 1 Turn the 9 position mode control to the CAP position or press the rotary Adjust Enter control if the mode control is already at the CAP position 2 LHAPr is displayed on the output voltage display 3 Turn the rotary Adjust Enter control to select nanE 4 Press the rota
287. te the isolated resistive programming of voltage l 2 M370430 01 Rev C Disconnect the load and connect the voltmeter to the output Connect the 4 000 kQ resistor to the isolated connector One terminal to resistive programming of voltage J3 8 and voltage programming of voltage J3 3 and the other to common J3 2 Set the resistive APG level to 4 kQ The SCPI command is SYST COMM APR LEV 4 Set input source as Resistive Isolated for Voltage Programming The SCPI command is SYST REM SOUR IAR Turn the main output to On by pressing the OUTPUT ENABLE Main button on the front panel or send the command OUTP ON The OUTPUT ENABLE Main button will illuminate Enter the interactive calibration mode by sending the SCPI command CAL OUTP ANAL RES ISOL Press on the terminal keys or to reduce or increase the main output voltage value Adjust the main output voltage to 100 Press any key than the or keys to exit from interactive calibration mode 7 19 Calibration and Troubleshooting Isolated Voltage Programming of Current Calibration Important For maximum accuracy at a specific APG level follow the calibration procedure again but use the intended operating voltage level in step 3 To calibrate the isolated voltage programming of current l 7 20 Short the main output with a shunt Connect a multimeter to measure the voltage across the shunt Connect the input voltage source to the Isolated c
288. tection mode Power Supply Unit Isolated Resistive Analog Programming Recall Preset Remote Programming Interface Non Isolated Resistive Analog Programming Controller current share controller Share current share Multichannel Remote Interface Soft reset Save Preset Shutdown Slave current share slave Sleep Mode Isolated Analog Voltage Programming Non Isolated Analog Voltage Programming USB Interface Under Voltage protection coarse adjustment Under Voltage protection fine adjustment Voltage Analog Programming Voltage M370430 01 Rev C Local Operation A blinking numeric value is either a voltage or current set point in tracking mode The display in which the set point appears output voltage or output current display indicates the type of set point voltage or current M370430 01 Rev C 3 11 Local Operation Standard Local Operation The power supply can be controlled by two methods either from the front panel or from any of the remote interfaces Front panel control is referred to as local operation default setting while control via any of the remote interfaces is called remote operation To set up the power supply for remote operation see Chapter 5 Remote Operation Once the remote connection has been established the power supply can switch seamlessly between local operation and any digital interface RS 232 RS 485 GPIB USB and Ethernet Local lockout page 3 42 is a feature that allows
289. ted XG XTR unit create a separate terminal session This should have been done according to the instructions in Establishing Communication with the Power Supply on page 6 22 Also open a separate HyperTerminal session for each XG XTR unit that you wish to control An example of two units in a system is shown in Figure 6 31 XTR ENET HyperTerminal 10 x File Edit View Call Transfer Help Da AE EAE R IDN AMETEK XG 100 17 0 SN 1011A01064 2 12 01 10 11 4 Connected 0 01 10 Auto detect TCP IP SCROLL cars NUM Capture Print echo zZ XTR ENET 2 HyperTerminal T B ES File Edit View Cal Transfer Help Da 8 A re I DN AMETEK XG 600 2 8 SN 1002004518 2 12 01 10 11 4 Connected 0 02 00 Auto detect TCP IP SCROLL cars NUM Capture Print echo Figure 6 31 HyperTerminal Session 6 26 M370430 01 Rev C Communications Options There are two HyperTerminal windows for controlling two power supply units See Figure 6 31 XTR ENET HyperTerminal 77 723 2 x File Edit view Call Transfer Help oo Connect Ti m D lo 3 Dali e XTR ENET Change Icon Enter details for the host that you want to call IDN AMETEK XG 100 17 0 SNH 1011A01064 2 12 01 10 11 Host address 192 168 1 110 Connect using TCP IP Winsock 4 Connected 0 03 02 Auto detect TCP IP SCROLL cars NUM XTR ENET 2 HyperTerminal _ cC 0 x File Edit View Call Transfer Help
290. ted analog programming modes are used for the respective voltage and current control If local control digital control or non isolated APG is used the non isolated monitor lines should be used as the isolated monitor lines will not accurately reflect the output state of the power supply 2 Use unshielded cable up to 9 84 feet 3 m length with high density D Sub type connector and a ferrite bead Fair Rite part number 0443164251 CAUTION Equipment damage Do not drive or apply a voltage to pins J3 14 Inter Lock 1 or to pins J3 15 Inter Lock 2 M370430 01 Rev C 4 21 Analog Programming APG and Isolated Analog Programming ISOL Making ISOL Control Connections CAUTION Equipment damage Before making connections from external circuits to the Isolated Analog Programming Connector turn the front panel power switch to off and wait until the front panel displays have gone out For most connectors and jumpers use any suitable wire such as 22 AWG stranded wire For lowest noise performance use shielded twisted pair wiring of 22 AWG Use the shortest leads possible 5 V and 15 V Auxiliary Output reference to pin 2 and 6 isolated common on the ISOL Connector ISOL Programming With External Voltage Source The pin numbers are described in Table 4 4 on page 4 21 ISOL Connector Figure 4 11 Programming Output Voltage using an Isolated External Voltage Source ISOL Connector Figure 4 12 Programming Output Current us
291. ted or when the inactivity timeout occurs default is 3 seconds Normal display mode shows the output voltage and current values If a timeout occurs before the changes made to the value have been set the changes will not be saved and you will have to re enter the changes The inactivity timeout is variable from 1 to 20 seconds and can only be changed using the SCPI command The SCPI command s for these instructions are SYSTem lt channel gt FPANel TIMeout Important Each user memory setting location stores the timeout so that beginning users and expert users are not required to use the same timeout 3 7 Local Operation VOLTS Coarse Volt Tracking Ene Vol Tracking AMPS Coarse Current Tracking Fine Current Tracing Coarse Curert Pre Set Fine Current Pre Set Noe PRT OVP d UVF at 2 p A OUTP C ae wi SAVE elect Prese c RCL elect Prasa LEGEND Cid Mode Control State sting vive Press Rotary Adjust Enter Control CAPR urrent AFG Leve VNIS urrant APG Leve urrent AF eve HNIS urrant APG Lave Rotate Rotary Adjust Enter Control VAPR i Press Rotary Adjust P Enter Control when no modification of the tracking value has VOILadgae A eve pre been made U c J q q UU L UU UU U U U U J J J D a PB ADOR 1 31 SER PBS ADDR 1 31 D G AUN DDR a O X OGON O lr RR SHAH AR CON A P e TR Figure 3 2 Front Pane
292. ter made up of the sum of the values for the alarms to determine if they are to be latched in the off state on clearing See Table 3 6 for the values associated with each latchable alarm Table 3 6 Alarm Latch Bit Positions Alarm Bit Value Position AC Fail ooo Over Temperature Protection OTP 2 Over Temperature Protection OTP Slave 4 1700 Watt only Foldback 8 256 3 25 Local Operation Setting Foldback Mode Foldback mode is used to disable the output when a transition is made between the operating modes The power supply will turn off disable the output and lock in foldback mode after a specified delay if the power supply transitions into CV mode or into CC mode depending on the foldback mode settings This feature is particularly useful for protecting current or voltage sensitive loads Foldback can be set to trigger a switch when transitioning from CV to CC mode or from CC to CV mode To set the foldback protection and foldback delay time 1 Turn the 9 position mode control to the FLD position or press the rotary Adjust Enter control if the 9 position mode control is already at the FLD position 2 Select the type of crossover that will cause foldback to trigger by using the rotary Adjust Enter control If the mode selected is CC or CV mode the foldback delay timer will start on a transition into the selected mode If the mode selected is none foldback is not enabled 3 Press the rotary Adjust Enter co
293. the front panel to be locked so that accidental button presses are ignored This feature is often used to lock out the front panel while a user is controlling the power supply from a remote location The output of the power supply has three modes of operation Constant Voltage Constant Current and Constant Power available in version 2 21 and higher All three of the operating modes are available regardless of which control method local or remote is used Operating Modes Output enabled 3 12 The output mode in which the power supply operates at any given time depends on the following factors e Output voltage set point VspT Note the M10 Option includes a preset function to automatically reset the output voltage to zero Volts at both power on and output enabled unless deliberately programmed otherwise see Output Protection 3 36 Output current set point ISET e Impedance of the attached load R The three output modes of operation are Constant Voltage CV mode see page 3 13 Constant Current CC mode see page 3 13 and Constant Power CP mode version 2 21 and higher see page 3 13 When the output is turned on both the voltage and current rise as quickly as possible to try and reach the set points Vspgr and Isgr that were configured prior to enabling the output Initially the unit will operate in CV mode which is the default mode As the voltage and current rise to meet the requirements of the load the set
294. the main output On by pressing the OUTPUT ENABLE Main button on the front panel or send the command OUTP ON The OUTPUT ENABLE Main button will illuminate Enter the interactive calibration mode by sending the SCPI command CAL OUTP ANAL RES Press the terminal keys or to reduce or increase main output voltage value Adjust the main output voltage to 100 Press any key other than the or keys to exit from interactive calibration mode 7 13 Calibration and Troubleshooting Non isolated Voltage Programming of Current Calibration 7 14 Important For maximum accuracy at a specific APG level follow the calibration procedure again but use the intended operating voltage level in steps 3 and 4 To calibrate the non isolated voltage programming of current 1 Short the main output with a shunt Connect a multimeter to measure the voltage across the shunt 2 Connect the input voltage source to the non isolated connector current programming J1 10 J1 7 3 Setthe Voltage APG level to 4 V The SCPI command is SYST COMM APR LEV CURR 4 4 Set the input source voltage to 4 000 V 5 Set the input source as Voltage Non Isolated for Current The SCPI command is SYST REM SOUR CURR AVOL 6 Turn the main output On by pressing the OUTPUT ENABLE Main button on the front panel or send the command OUTP ON The OUTPUT ENABLE Main button will illuminate 7 Enter the interactive calibration mode by sending the SCPI
295. the output To check voltage mode operation turn the 9 position mode control to the VOLTS position The voltage set point will blink dimming and then return to full brightness For more information see Local Operation on page 3 1 Adjust the voltage to 5 V To check current mode operation turn the 9 position mode control to AMPS position Verify that the current set point is blinking in the output current display Adjust the current to 1 A Press the OUTPUT ENABLE Main button to turn On Turn the front panel power switch to the Off position Turn the front panel power switch to the On position Connect a short circuit across the output terminals Use leads of sufficient current carrying capacity See Step 4 Selecting Load Wires Press the OUTPUT ENABLE Main button to enable the output The button will be illuminated when the output is enabled CC Mode LED illuminates and the voltage and current are displayed CC Mode LED illuminates and the preset load current is displayed Turn the front panel power switch to the Off position Installation Step 6 Connecting Loads This section describes how to connect loads to the power supply for both single and multiple loads N WARNING Shock hazard There is a shock hazard at the power supply output when operating at an output greater than 40 V To protect personnel against accidental contact with hazardous voltages ensure that the load and its connect
296. the rotary Adjust Enter control to select the UVP for setting up 6 Setup the lower limit protection using the rotary Adjust Enter control Important The UVP range is variable from 0 volts to OVPser 10 7 Once the desired value has been set press the rotary Adjust Enter control to commit the setting See Coarse and Fine Adjustment Modes on page 3 3 The SCPI command s for these instructions are SOURce channel VOLTage PROTection UNDer LEVel Over Current Protection OCP The OCP alarm is a firmware alarm that is only configurable using the SCPI interface The OCP triggers if the output current exceeds the OCP set point Because the OCP alarm is a firmware based alarm it has a latency before detection of the condition can occur The user should be aware of this latency and take this into consideration when relying on OCP to protect a sensitive load The maximum period for detecting an OCP condition is 300 ms OCP is fixed at 110 of rated current M370430 01 Rev C 3 31 Local Operation Using Over Temperature Protection Lock OTP The OTP lock protects the power supply in the event of an over temperature alarm This alarm could be caused by ventilation restriction or overheating due to fan failure Two modes are available e Auto recovery OTP OFF where the power supply turns on again after cooling down e Latch mode OTP ON where you will need to reset the unit by turning the front panel power
297. thod that the XG XTR unit is using to obtain this address is correct stop here and exit close this window Otherwise continue to step 4 4 Expand the Local Area Connection tree if necessary expand further until the IP address of the XG XTR unit is displayed Then left click the IP address the screen should display as shown in Figure 6 16 M370430 01 Rev C 6 13 Communications Options Lartrone Denisi 1 dewalt Device Delali Web Conhauaion Telnet Configuration aig Local Area Connection 172 16 21 12 2 f BP ont zio Paii Geena vis 1 0 0 Figure 6 16 IP Address Details Window Important Do NOT use the Assign IP button in the tool bar upper left of this window The IP address is assigned using Steps 5 through 9 that follow 5 In this window click the Web Configuration tab which will open a new window See Figure 6 17 B antroniy Devicelnstallisr 4 10 4 Ea Lantronc Devices 1 deviceli ge n Area Connection 172 16 21 1253 HA Pon Address bip A122 18 21 5 10 80 Enana Brewis B A nm LL aeo LANTSONIX 17216 21 51 Navigate to hip M172 116 21 51 80 Figure 6 17 Entering the Lantronix Interface 6 14 M370430 01 Rev C Communications Options Next to the Address field click the green Go button You will be prompted for user name and password ignore these fields leave blank and click OK This brings up the Lantronix XPort interface Figure 6 18 d
298. to the normal display Deactivating APG Voltage Mode To deactivate the APG voltage mode 1 Turn the 9 position mode control to the VAP position or press the rotary Adjust Enter control if the mode control is already at the VAP position 2 URPr is displayed on the output voltage display 3 Turn the rotary Adjust Enter control to select nanE 4 Press the rotary Adjust Enter control to commit the change The display will return to the normal display M370430 01 Rev C 4 15 Analog Programming APG and Isolated Analog Programming ISOL Query for Analog Voltage Input Level Quick Tip Remote operation uses these SCPI commands See page 5 1 4 16 To query for analog voltage input level from non isolated input le Turn the 9 position mode control to the VAP position or press the rotary Adjust Enter control if the mode control is already at the VAP position UHPr is displayed on the output voltage display If the mode is currently nont then select any other APG mode If this step is done be sure to restore the APG setting to nanE when the operation is complete Otherwise do not rotate the rotary Adjust Enter control to keep the current APG mode Press the rotary Adjust Enter control to select the APG mode The output voltage display should read LE U and the output current display will display APG level Press the rotary Adjust Enter control to return to normal mode If the APG mode was modified in step 2 execu
299. ton on the front panel or enter the SCPI command The OUTPUT ENABLE Main button will illuminate To disable the output power Press the OUTPUT ENABLE Main button when the OUTPUT ENABLE Main button is illuminated The output will be disabled and the LEDs will not be illuminated Important The main output will not turn on if the shutdown function is activated See Using the External Shutdown Function on page 3 33 Quick Tip Remote The SCPI command s for these instructions are Operation uses these commands See OUTPut lt channel gt POWer STATe page 5 1 M370430 01 Rev C 3 17 Local Operation Enabling the Auxiliary Output To enable on the auxiliary output Press the OUTPUT ENABLE Aux button on the front panel The OUTPUT ENABLE Aux button will illuminate Important The auxiliary output will not be enabled if the external AUX ON OFF signal line is being used to disable the auxiliary outputs See AUX Output and Isolated Analog Programming ISOL Connector on page 4 20 To disable the auxiliary output Press the OUTPUT ENABLE Aux button on the front panel again The OUTPUT ENABLE Aux button will not be illuminated If the auxiliary output 1s activated 5 V on J3 9 AUX1 and 15 V on J3 11 AUX2 will be present with respect to Pin J3 2 or Pin J3 6 COM ISOLATED See also AUX Output and Isolated Analog Programming ISOL Connector on page 4 20 for more details The SCPI comman
300. trol to the VAP position or press the rotary Adjust Enter control if the control knob 1s already at the VAP position UHPr is displayed on the output voltage display 2 Ifthe mode is currently nant then select any other ISOL mode If this step 1s done be sure to restore the ISOL setting to nanE when the operation is complete Otherwise do not rotate the rotary Adjust Enter control to keep the current ISOL mode 3 Press the rotary adjust Enter control to select the ISOL mode The output voltage display should read LE U and the output current display will display ISOL level 4 Press the rotary adjust Enter control to return to normal mode If the ISOL mode was modified in step 2 execute the procedure to deactivate the ISOL voltage mode Quick Tip Remote The SCPI command for these instructions are operation uses these SCPI commands See SYSTem channel REMote SOURce VOLTage lt LOCal page 5 1 AVOLtage IAVoltage ARESistive IAResistive gt SYSTem channel COMMunicate APRogram LEVel VOLTage ISOlated MEASure channel SCALar APRogram VOLTage TSOlated DC M370430 01 Rev C 4 29 Analog Programming APG and Isolated Analog Programming ISOL Resistive Controlled Current ISOL Setup Activating ISOL Resistive Controlled Current Setup 1 Turn the 9 position mode control to the CAP position or press the rotary Adjust Enter control if the control knob 1s already at the CAP position
301. ude a numerical and textual description of the error or event Querying for the full queue item for example with SYSTem ERRor NEXT will return a response with the following syntax lt Error Event Number gt lt Error Event Description gt lt Optional Device Dependent Info gt The lt Error event_number gt is a unique integer in the range 32768 32767 All positive numbers are instrument dependent All negative numbers are reserved by the SCPI standard with certain standard error event codes described in the SCPI 1999 standard document The value zero is also reserved to indicate that no error or event has occurred The second parameter of the full response is a quoted string containing an lt Error event_description gt followed by optional lt Device dependent info gt text Each lt Error event_number gt has a unique and fixed lt Error event_description gt associated with it The maximum string length of lt Error event_description gt plus lt Device dependent_info gt is 255 characters As errors and events are detected they are placed in a queue This queue is first in first out If the queue overflows the last error event in the queue is replaced with error 350 Queue overflow Any time the queue overflows the least recent errors events remain in the queue and the most recent error event is discarded The error queue implemented in the XG XTR 1s capable of holding 4 errors When the error qu
302. ulation rating of the load wiring and circuitry is greater than or equal to the maximum or combined output voltage of the power supply CAUTION Equipment damage Do not connect power supplies from different manufacturers in parallel or in series gt CAUTION Equipment damage The remote programming inputs are internally referenced to the power supply s negative output Do not connect remote programming ground lines to the power supply s positive output gt You can operate power supplies of the same model with the outputs in series to obtain increased load voltage or with the outputs in parallel to obtain increased current also called current sharing Split supply operation gives you two positive outputs or a positive and a negative output See Figure 3 5 on page 3 46 When using multiple supplies in series or parallel they will not meet the single unit specifications in this Manual M370430 01 Rev C 3 45 Local Operation Power Supply Power Supply Figure 3 4 Split Supply Operation 3 46 M370430 01 Rev C Local Operation Configuring Multiple Supplies for Series Operation A maximum of two power supplies of the same rating can be connected in series to increase the output voltage CAUTION Equipment damage When two power supplies are connected in series they should be programmed to the same output voltage to prevent damage to the lower voltage supply at short circuit condition Load Consi
303. unications Options Using the AMETEK LXI Discovery Browser Once installed the AMETEK LXI Discovery Browser simply needs to be started up The following figure shows an XG power supply being detected on the network If there are multiple power supplies connected their identifying information will also appear in the LXI Discovery Browser window IP Address 192 168 1 101 AMETEK Host Mame tesla IP Address 192 168 1 100 M370430 01 Rev C AG 33 0 50 0 SNH 0937402669 2 10 D2010 AMETERK Programmable Power Inc Refresh Select the specified power supply and double click it to launch a Web browser that will open the LXI homepage of the selected power supply Clicking the Refresh button in the lower right corner of the window will cause the AMETEK LXI Discovery Browser to rescan the network for LXI compliant devices 6 41 Communications Options AMETEK ENETTEST UTILITY In addition to the AMETEK LXI Discovery Browser AMETEK also provides another useful utility the AMETEK EnetTest Utility This software application provides an interface for sending SCPI commands to a device and receiving its responses over the Ethernet Installing the AMETEK EnetTest Utility The software for the XTR can be downloaded from the AMETEK Programmable Power website 1 Goto the folder for LXI Discovery Browser and ENet Test Utility 2 From there go to the EnetTest directory 3 Gotothe Disk1 directory 4 n the Disk1 directory sel
304. upply 6 55 Connecting with Power Supply Hidden Behind a Router 6 57 oocket POM NUTTIDOL d ion atria a Detur taunt unius utbs Ua Osca de udin dud 6 59 Instrument Drivers and Application Software cccccccccccesesseesseeeeeessseeseeeeenees 6 60 SYSTEM CONMN ANIS s i bat atridar iuri tor ps Erw e ab ex pe ober a pru MTS LAA 7 6 61 DUDS YSIS SY aN of ii ee cease aslbccthe o CLAS a meten ecd m m da 6 61 EXUGOMP EIAINGE 6 64 Introduction to the LAI Staridald siio Uo dere ide eot ie es 6 65 iA ONE 6 65 LAN FREGUING INCITS ai fat ino dia ctr iex eaa a Uu Para Dass usd emus v it qe d uibs ra ve boa GAT OCURRA v 6 65 NVC PACS MR Et 6 65 Remote Procedure Calls RPC ccccccsssssccceeeeeseeessseeeeeeesseaeeeseeeeeeeessaeaseeeeeeees 6 65 Bcc En 6 65 CALIBRATION AND TROUBLESHOOTING eeu 7 1 INTRODUCTION E S 2 7 2 MAIN VOLTAGE AND CURRENT CALIBRATION PRINCIPLE eene 1 3 Understanding thie PPFODIGts esaet idee st iiu ce i ona oa Spese a cei Sena ues 7 3 eem Galli OaD Atl e e S 7 4 Step 2 ONS SE GallbralloHu ssec toi ete resa ata instans A bauen c eo obe 7 4 Step 9 Recalibral Calli occ tse thecos eterna Gee ea e esas ee er ono ox 7 5 CALIBRATING THE OUTPUT VOLTAGE advectus cura eu ra no ecd uds 7 6 Gain efc eU UT TN 7 6 ONS Er GallbFallODr ssim RII Sut pede RP TOREAPMESITE A
305. upply output to 90 of the nominal current level Turn on the output power The power supply starts up in Constant Current mode Read the current value on the ammeter display Type SCPI command with current value as parameter data For example type CAL OUTP 5 07 if you had an XG or XTR 150 5 6 calibrating with the current set point set to 5 04 A and the ammeter was reading 5 07 amps T 7 Calibration and Troubleshooting Offset Calibration 7 8 Offset calibration of the power supply provides the best accuracy in low range current To perform offset calibration 1 After performing gain calibration set the current to 10 from the nominal 2 Read the current value on the ammeter display Type SCPI command with the current value as parameter data For example you would type CAL OUT P CURR 0 50 if you had an XG or XTR 150 5 6 calibrating with the current set point set to 0 56 A and the actual current measured was 0 504 After performing offset calibration it is highly recommended that you repeat gain calibration Important For best results both calibrations may be repeated several times To maintain the high current accuracy of the XG XTR family of power supplies user current calibration should only be done with a high accuracy calibrated shunt resistor of at least 0 025 tolerance SCPI Command CALibration lt channel gt OUTPut CURRent lt ammeter reading in amps gt M370430
306. urrent With respect to chassis potential 600 V negative or positive main output 1500 V With respect to chassis potential 500 V 0 012 of full scale Up to 4 units in master slave mode Up to 2 units with external diodes CEM Le 068 e o CC TTL Low 0 0 6 V Logic low 0 0 1 4V Logic high 2 0 15V Dry contact compatible a TTL level or dry contact compatible TTL high OK 4 5 V TTL low fail 0 0 6 V Dry contact Open Short On or Off programmable 1 Typical APG or isolated APG accuracy can be improved to max accuracy by user calibration at the specific range selected 2 The shutdown input has user selectable negative logic operation via front panel or remote digital input output suoneoyioedg o A8Y L0 0 T0Z IN 6 9 Common Specifications for All Models Output Performance Specifications Aux output 5V 0 4V 0 5V at 0 4A 15V 1 2V 1 4V at 0 4A Temperature Coefficient 100 PPM C from rated output voltage after a 30 minute warm up Drift 8 hours 0 05 of rated output over an 8 hour interval with constant line load and temperature after a 30 minute warm up Hold up Time Typical 20 ms at any rated input line Transient Response Time Less than 1 ms for 6 V to 60 V models Less than 2 ms for 80 V to 600 V models OVP trip point accuracy 1 of set point Meter Accuracy 0 5 of actual output voltage or current 1 count Data readback transfer time 3 mSec Programming
307. ut Cover and Strain Relief XG XTR 1500 and 1700 Watt AC Input Wire The full 19 inch rack models are not supplied with a power cord or a non locking AC plug Table 2 2 specifies the recommended AC input wire size You must also purchase and install the correctly rated non locking plug for your installation Make sure that the wiring of the product and the AC plug comply with the applicable local code for your installation If you require a special cord contact Customer Service see Contact Information on page 1 Table 2 2 XG XTR 1500 and 1700 Watt Recommended AC Input Wire higher power AC Input Voltage Range and Wire Specifications Frequency 85 265 Vac 47 63 Hz single 3 X 10 AWG 2 wire plus safety phase 3 wire ground stranded copper 60 C minimum 300 V The input cord must be no longer than 9 84 feet 3 m 2 6 M370430 01 Rev C Installation XG XTR 1500 and 1700 Watt AC Input Wire Connection To make the AC input wire connections l M370430 01 Rev C Strip the outside insulation on the AC cable approximately 4 in 100 mm Trim the wires so that the ground wire is 0 5 in 12 mm longer than the other wires Strip 0 55 in 14 mm at the end of each of the wires Unscrew the base of the strain relief from the helix shaped body Insert the base through the outside opening in the AC input cover and from the inside screw the locknut securely onto the base Slide the helix shaped body onto the A
308. value using the rotary Adjust Enter control When the value has been selected press the rotary Adjust Enter control to commit the updated value Additional values may become available depending on the setting that is being configured Setting VOLTS and AMPS Modes The only exceptions to the select and set model are the VOLTS and AMPS modes which do not allow the selection of tracking and select and set mode by turning the rotary Adjust Enter control In VOLTS and AMPS modes the default entry mode setting is automatically selected as either voltage or current tracking respectively Voltage and current values can be set in tracking mode or select and set mode using the rotary Adjust Enter control Tracking mode the new values take effect as the rotary Adjust Enter control is rotated e Select and set mode the new values do not take effect until the rotary Adjust Enter control is pressed See Normal Display Mode and Inactivity Timeout on page 3 7 M370430 01 Rev C 3 5 Local Operation To access the tracking mode for entering voltage and current l Select the VOLTS or AMPS position on the 9 position mode control If the set point 1s blinking the unit 1s in coarse tracking mode e When the VOLTS mode is selected the voltage set point will blink in the output voltage display e When the AMPS mode is selected the current set point will blink in the output current display Use the rotary Adjust Enter control to
309. yed Important The power supply will boot with default options and calibration values 7 28 M370430 01 Rev C SCPI Command Reference Appendix A SCPI Command Reference provides a summary of the Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments SCPI that are supported by the XG and XTR Family Programmable DC Power Supply SCPI Command Reference SCPI Conformance Information Codes and Standards This power supply conforms to the following international standards e IEEE Std 488 2 1992 IEEE Standard Codes Formats Protocols and Common Commands For Use With IEEE Std 488 1 1987 IEEE Std 488 1 1987 IEEE Standard Digital Interface for Programmable Instrumentation e TIA EIA 232F e Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments SCPI Version 1999 0 IEEE 488 2 Requirements GPIB control implements all IEEE 488 2 requirements SCPI Requirements The power supply conforms to the following SCPI requirements e SCPI mandated commands e Questionable Status Register QSR Condition Event Enable e Operation Status Register OSR Condition Event Enable e Status Byte Register SBR e Standard Event Status Register SESR IEEE 488 2 SCPI Syntax and Style Parameters Units of Measure and Multipliers Refer to IEEE 488 2 section 7 7 3 for the definition of units of measure The default units of measure include e V Volt voltage e A Ampere current e W Watt power e S seconds time The

5 - Sorensen

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents